i ln ee alee
}
. i
7 F
af .
. ye ; ¥
:
nf ‘ a
ast
me > 38
Gare
a
i
=
‘as
a co
;
oh a .
| 4 -
;
6 ie
-
q 4
% a
are
4.
’ REELS AGIA hl
voce hy
JO 8G a ATT Ry
—_
ene
onic iaehetiee
thet Ae
et ern eee ed REE
ch Fabel 2ate, Cnet Bnei
a saa F et oids eee ;
Soe Hye A
pelts GEE pe mieeelern -
AS I
bins Sigeorn ae dian
Lea i yeups Ft Te
eer as py
ee
ie er rs
ce Petes ses
“ TREE RS,
oie Met a
: 54 Ro eon:
me ! 4
Leg
Fee
et
by ee eerie tte e
ened ot =
PA mises
i
fetal
2
is Baas
ae
: |
2 foxy!
. SP My Ved wees
; is era tee eyeN
Rt . ay Ewe Go week g
iss Ae AUN R EO ES et
S 2 : = EN 2 :
i } = > , = WA = =
s. a YW? Pras ” Ey ae Ww)
LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S31NVU de
Zz fs 2 a > KS as :
: =. il fy = c Z XE
a < = < 4 ¥ Was <
Ss « WYyD ee = 4
5 a G 5 2 3 .
NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3!¥vyuydit LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN
z i he z - z pe eS
== ow =~ w = My ow
: : : : 5 82
= oo = ma - ge
w ” pan nm * =
z o = o = o i
LIBRARIES NVINOSHLINS S3IUVUE
aS ie ” Zz 7) Z 7)
=<. ee = < = < ; =
.5 z 5 I Ff 18 -
2) ” Ww : . W ~ W” w
= Oo cr ~Wj YAN OO wea oO
= z E » WSS z E 2
ice, Ui oh ee an eva 5 ee
NOILALILSNI_NVINOSHUINS Saluvuaiy LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN _
a = ay Gd z
— — Lé7)
oc = oc a
<= =. _< 5 af
oc 4 a Ne load Cc
Py = > © : mt
sm 2 BS = O Oo
= z
NOILNLILSNI
VYGIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NVINOSHLINS Sa1uVvu gl
INSTITUTION NOILMLILSNI
i = ~
w 2 oO S
rs 5 rs) =
> ey > rd
a -* A =
- = ke
m = : m ”
” = 7) . &
TUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS SSIYVYEIT_LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN
RA Ht
NVINOSHLINS S31I¥vV¥dIT LIBRARIES
SMITHSONIAN
NVINOSHLIWS
SMITHSONIAN
NVINOSHLINS
vi LIBRARI ES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI
A us bs
v ier ya i
aan we. % c&X
: GY :
4 Uy
= by as
za a
A LIB
TUTION NOILNLILSNI
NVINOSHLINS S3I¥VYEIT LIBRARIES
INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI
INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI
= : -
> Fs) 0 w
= > > >
- = z Ce
>t! BRARI ES, SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILOLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S34 luvaud
< = ie = : < = wp
e a z 4 z = Vy
oO <= f O pa ,Y
D . “ ” Nn 2 VN ” po ti; :
=! 3 > mo ane < Oo ¢ Sag: F
= mS =< - Zz La a a
ze : : oo 2
TUTION 7p NOILNLILSNI_ NVINOSHLINS _LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN _INSTITUTIGE
a5 F a
NVINOSHLINS S3IYVUE!IT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALI
5
RARIES SMITHSONIAN
14 5 = Oo AYR = <= =
Ff 3 zy 3 VE z 5
ty Zz = ee = Sg
7, Ss > : = tS ae = >
77} 2 77) Lee 7 >
RARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI
7) ” ” 2
Wd sa WW w
a. a we =
<>; = < c
ac ao oc 4
eer = = z
i
oo
Pe)
>
A
m
wm
INSTITUTION NOIJLALILSNI
INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI
S3a1uvygs
od
Salyvugit
INSTITUTION
INSTITUTION NOILOLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3IYVUYSIT_LIBRAF
x 5 x Z 5 r: Yr YY: 5
WY w) . W . w “.
O fe 1 © ae O p, Sop ire es
= = z = = =
> = \ >" = > =
z Tp) Ca a wo Pu kee 7)
_NVINOSHLINS, SAIYVYEIT_ LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION
= ce =I we Le me ce
2 OSE : < ‘es z
WW a, cc
a Se 3 S 5 z
= oa ot z 3 zZ | a)
RARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI” NVINOSHLIWS Saluvugi7 LIBRA!
= i
° = So .. a le S o
5 a 2 ee] = Se)
E 5 = i > = =
= m= 5 ~ E =
z o Zz ts = D
i pS a!NVEIT_LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN — -
o wo ; ” NN : eo wn:
= a O <x oO r O
- = = 2 iE =
/RARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3INVYSITL.
pa = < | Zz Ne 1 s
- SS = 4 QE = a
*, = GF RGN 4
ay c Ps = RW < =
a = ac = SS a =
= ro} a = ym 5
m7 =z wad 4 Ney (es z
S3!uYvudiIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN_INSTITUTION _ NOILAL!
is = i z - z
2 5 2 5 G2G,> >
2 a ee eS E
m Y“” ser wor e m w)
” = He = w =
RARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI_NVINOSHLINS SaluvugIT_LIBRAF
-_. = a = < Se ae
Sc = = N = Ss = 5 YY
NO NS O PG BZ ae S BS BY
EFAS oc CK 'NRY’ CO a 9 ram “AX:
ING 2 E Wy 2 = Z = ye
ELALILSNI_NVINOSHLINS S3IYVYSIT_LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION Petia. 3!
al Seo 7 (RNA (REA > OSD EE 6A") 2 EEO) S 1 Ze 7 (B'S CEA > RR SOS
Meta 95 he
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
507,68
VOLUME 78 BAND
THE TRUSTEES OF THE DIE TRUSTEES VAN DIE
SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
CAPE TOWN KAAPSTAD
1979
® SET, PRINTED AND BOUND IN THE REPUBLIC OF SOUTH AFRICA BY
THE RUSTICA PRESS (PTY.) LTD., WYNBERG, CAPE
933
ANNALS OF THE ANNALE VAN DIE
SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
VOLUME 78 BAND 78
us “
a
I
1
4 ‘
{
1
az }
i
les 5
ly
~
: nes
=
=
yy
b
i
=)
=)
van
: ih
oe 0 «
=
i
7
LIST OF CONTENTS
BERRY, P. F.
A new species of deep-water palinurid lobster (Crustacea, Decapoda, Palinuridae)
from the east coast of southern Africa. (Published June 1979.) ..
COETZEE, D. J. see DE DECKER, A. H. B.
Cooper, M. R.
A new species of Myophorella (Bivalvia, Trigoniidae) from the Sunday’s River
Formation, South Africa. (Published April 1979.)
Cooper, M. R.
Cretaceous Trigoniidae (Mollusca, Bivalvia) from the Brenton Formation, Knysna.
(Published May 1979.)
DE Decker. A. H. B. & COETZEE, D. J.
Indicator copepods and oil yield fluctuations in pelagic fish in the Benguela Current
system. (Published June 1979.)
DINGLE, R. V., Lorp, A. R. & HENDEY, Q. B.
New sections in the Varswater Formation (Neogene) of Langebaan Road, south-
western Cape, South Africa. (Published June 1979.)
HENDEY, Q. B. see DINGLE, R. V.
KENNEDY, W. J. see KLINGER, H. C.
KENNEDY, W. J., WRIGHT, C. W. & KLINGER, H. C.
Cretaceous faunas from Zululand and Natal, South Africa. A new genus and
species of tuberculate desmoceratacean ammonite from the Mzinene Forma-
tion (Albian). (Published April 1979.) ..
KLINGER, H. C. see KENNEDY, W. J.
KLINGER, H. C. & KENNEDY, W. J.
Cretaceous faunas from southern Africa. Lower Cretaceous ammonites, including
a new bochianitid genus, from Umgazana, Transkei. (Published April 1979.)
Lorp, A. R. see DINGLE, R. V.
PRINS, A. J.
Discovery of the Oriental latrine fly Chrysomyia magacephala (Fabricius) along
the south-western coast of South Africa. (Published April 1979.) Z
SCHWEITZER, F. R.
Excavations at Die Kelders, Cape Province, South Africa. The Holocene deposits.
(Published August 1979.)
SIMPSON, G. G.
A new genus of late Tertiary penguin from Langebaanweg, South Africa. (Published
April 1979.) .. ‘ a me eye oe 7 s - te)
WRIGHT, C. W. see KENNEDY, W. J.
Page
93
21
49
69
81
29
11
39
101
E
a
EM
1
(=
}
>
f
2
A
=)
5 ru
x
na Ap , :
Le ‘ a
t Qe st . e
1 =! , ' 5
1 i
U 0
: uh
: 2
r
t 4
2 t fi
Le,
A es
_
= rs
t fi
f
2 e
=
¢
/
es -
ic
{
»
ze :
;
=
?) ¥
sie
i
~,
}
rx 1s
%
2
ft
‘i
i
a
: E +
-
y \
G =
i
A a
i _?
i
NEW GENERIC AND SUBGENERIC NAMES PROPOSED
IN THIS VOLUME
Dege Simpson, 1979 .. ae ous
Umgazaniceras Klinger & Kennedy, 1979 ..
Umsinenoceras Kennedy & Klinger, 1979 ..
VOLUME 78 PART 1 APRIL 1979 ISSN 0303-2515
567, 68
OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN
ae MOSES
CAPE TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements -
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered .
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations. ;
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 « 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes...’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes...’
“As described (Smith 1969a, 1969b; Jones 1971)’
“As described (Haughton & Broom 1927)...’
“As described (Haughton et al. 1927)...’
Note: no comma separating name and year
Dagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, 5, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list o,
scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BULLOUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P.-H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140.
FIscHER, P.-H., DuvAL, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. gén. 74: 627-634.
Koun, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann, Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
Konn, A. J. 19606. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull. Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4): 1-51.
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
:
.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 78 ~ Band
April 1979 April
Part 1 Deel
A NEW GENUS OF LATE TERTIARY PENGUIN
FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA
By
GEORGE GAYLORD SIMPSON
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town 8000
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na beskikbaarheid
van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad 8000
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
1, 2(1-3, 5-8), 3(1-2, 4-5, 8, t.-p.i.), 5(1-3, 5, 7-9),
6(1, t.-p.i.), 711-4), 8, 9(1-2, 7), 10(1-3),
11(1-2, 5, 7, t.—p.i.), 15(4-5), 24(2), 27, 31(1-3), 32(5), 33
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae na die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 908407 68 8
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The Rustica Press, Pty., Ltd., Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
A NEW GENUS OF LATE TERTIARY PENGUIN FROM
LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA
By
GEORGE GAYLORD SIMPSON
The Simroe Foundation, 5151 East Holmes Street, Tucson, Arizona 85711
(With 5 figures and 3 tables)
[MS. accepted 11 December 1978]
ABSTRACT
Additional specimens of penguin bones from the ‘E” Quarry in the latest Miocene/early
Pliocene Varswater Formation make possible the identification of the larger of the two penguin
taxa in that fauna and its definition as a new genus and species, Dege hendeyi.
CONTENTS
PAGE
Introduction - 1
Systematics 3
Acknowledgements 8
References 8
INTRODUCTION
In two previous papers (Simpson 1971, 1975) an extinct genus and species
of penguins, Inguza predemersus, was described and named from the late
Tertiary of Langebaanweg. It was noted that a second, clearly distinct taxon
occurred in the same deposit, but the specimens then at hand did not suffice
for adequate identification or, if new, definition of that taxon. Specimens
subsequently collected, although still not ideal, do suffice for those purposes
and are here described and named as a new genus and species.
The specimens are all from the ‘E’ Quarry in the Varswater Formation in
the vicinity of Langebaanweg, Cape Province. The Varswater Formation is of
very late Miocene and/or early Pliocene age (Hendey 1978). The quarry and
its stratigraphy have been carefully described by Hendey (1976), and those
data need not be repeated here. Hendey has shown that the rich faunas of this
formation represent a number of different environments—marine, estuarine,
fluviatile, and terrestrial. Almost all known fossil penguins have been found
in marine beds but generally in those deposited near shore or in distinctly
littoral conditions. The Varswater penguins also have some marine associates,
but the overall fauna of this varied formation, especially as regards the mammals
except for cetaceans, a seal and an otter, is predominantly nonaquatic.
Most of the specimens here studied come from the middle member of the
Varswater Formation, formerly (Hendey 1974) designated as “Bed 2’ but now
(Hendey 1976) as the Quartzose Sand Member. Some, however, may be either
1
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 78 (1), 1979: 1-9, 5 figs, 3 tables.
y ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
from that member or from one of two fossiliferous beds, 3aS and 3aN of Hendey,
in the overlying Pelletal Phosphorite Member (formerly ‘Bed 3’). The field
data provided by Hendey are given below for each specimen listed in the
hypodigm of the new species.
All specimens are in the South African Museum. All bear catalogue
numbers with the prefix (SAM-—PQ). As that prefix is uniform throughout, only
the distinctive locality prefix (L) and numerical part of the catalogue designation
will be given hereafter.
All measurements are in millimetres. In Tables 2 and 3 the following
abbreviations are used:
N number of specimens in sample.
OR _ observed range.
X-_ sample mean and its standard error.
S+ sample estimate of standard deviation and its standard error.
V+ sample estimate of coefficient of variation and its standard error.
Most of the designations and definitions of the dimensions involved in
the tables are among those used in Simpson (1975) as follows:
Humerus:
a. Maximum longitudinal dimension.
b. Width of shaft about one-third of the distance distal to head.
c. Width of shaft about two-thirds of distance distal to head.
d. Distance from radial condyle to longest distal process.
Femur:
a. Distance from the hollow between head and trochanter to that
between distal condyles.
b. Proximal width.
c. Distal width.
Tibiotarsus:
a. Distance from the proximal articulation, excluding the crest, to the
hollow between distal condyles.
6. Distal width.
The fragmentary nature of the three partial tarsometatarsi prevents use of
standard dimensions (a—c in Simpson 1975) for this bone but the following
ad hoc dimension is used:
Tarsometatarsus:
d. Width across distal ends (phalangeal articulations) of metacarpals
IJ-II.
A NEW GENUS OF LATE TERTIARY PENGUIN FROM LANGEBAANWEG 3
SYSTEMATICS
Order SPHENISCIFORMES
Family Spheniscidae
Dege gen. nov.
Etymology
Dege, pronounced approximately day-gay, is an augmentative form of
Swahili ndege, ‘bird’, hence “big bird’. It is hoped that, as with Inguza, this will
be an interesting change from the now rather stereotyped names of fossil
penguins based on classical roots. There are, of course, larger African birds,
but ‘big bird’ is appropriate because the type-species of Dege is larger than that
of Inguza and also larger than the living African penguin, Spheniscus demersus.
There seems to be no simple Swahili word for ‘penguin’ and in that language a
penguin is designated descriptively, for example, as ndege ya nchi za baridi,
approximately ‘cold country bird’. |
Dege is arbitrarily considered masculine in taxonomic usage.
Type-species
Dege hendeyi sp. nov.
Included species
Type only.
Known distribution
Langebaanian latest Miocene/early Pliocene in the Quartzose Sand Member
and perhaps the Pelletal Phosphorite Member of the Varswater Formation near
Langebaanweg.
Diagnosis
Tarsometatarsus short and stout. Medial intermetatarsal foramen present,
relatively proximal and small, plantar opening more radial than in Inguza or
Aptenodytes and Pygoscelis but less medial than in Spheniscus or most other
Recent penguins. Medial calcaneal ridge not entire on known specimens but
apparently weakly developed. Humerus with strongly bipartite tricipital fossa,
dorsal part deeper but smaller, ridge between the two parts of the fossa parallel
to long axis of bone. Latissimus dorsi insertion small, circular, convex. Shaft
slightly bowed, not distinctly sigmoid, slightly wider distally than proximally.
Preaxial angle feeble or absent. Femur and tibiotarsus sphenisciform, without
marked peculiarities. (Figs 1-5.)
Discussion
Apart from size and proportions, the tarsometatarsus is especially distinc-
tive in the position and course of the medial intermetatarsal foramen (the inner
proximal foramen of Zusi 1975). The plantar opening is somewhat broken on
4 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 1. Dorsal and plantar views of Dege hendeyi holotype (partial
left tarsometatarsus, L28455) from Langebaanweg. (Twice natural
S1Ze.)
specimen L28455, holotype of the type-species, but seems clearly to have been
in a position unlike that in any other penguin known to me. Zusi (1975) and |
others have noted that this opening is on the medial side of a prominent calcaneal |
ridge in most Recent genera, but less medial and below a less prominent ridge |
in Aptenodytes and Pygoscelis. In Dege it is apparently in a position more or |
less intermediate between those two states. It is not known which, if either,
Fig. 2. Dorsal, ventral and posterior views of Dege hendeyi left
humerus (L55005) from Langebaanweg. (Natural size.)
A NEW GENUS OF LATE TERTIARY PENGUIN FROM LANGEBAANWEG 5)
Zoy
7
Y
7
Fig. 3. Distal view of Dege
hendeyi left humerus
(L55010) from Langebaan-
weg. (Iwice natural size.)
state is more primitive. The humerus is less distinctive and is within the rather
stereotyped penguin pattern, but in detail is not quite like that of any other
genus in which this part is known.
The only known penguins other than Inguza and Dege that may be of
comparable age are three specimens from Motunau Beach on the South Island
of New Zealand (Marples 1960; Simpson 1972). This Pliocene locality is about
10° farther south and almost 156° farther east than Langebaanweg, but that
alone does not necessarily preclude generic relationships. Some living genera
Fig. 4. Anterior and posterior views of Dege hendeyi left femur
(L28217) from Langebaanweg. (Natural size.)
6 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 5. Anterior view of Dege hendeyi right tibiotarsus (L5503) from Langebaanweg.
(Natural size.)
have comparably wide ranges. However, the known Langebaanweg and
Motunau fossil penguins are quite different. Known parts of two of the Motunau
penguins are not generically distinguishable from the living genera Pygoscelis
and Aptenodytes and are referred to those genera as extinct species. The humerus
of P. tyreei can be compared with Jnguza and Dege and the tarsometatarsus of
A. ridgeni can be similarly compared as can other parts of living Pygoscelis and
Aptenodytes. The diagnoses of Jnguza and Dege include distinctions from
Pygoscelis and Aptenodytes that are reasonably construed as of generic rank.
The third Motunau genus, Marplesornis, can be compared mainly on the basis
of a not quite perfect humerus, which differs from both /nguza and Dege in
having an extraordinarily expanded and somewhat concave latissimus dorsi
insertion and from Dege in having the shaft distinctly more expanded distally.
Dege hendeyi sp. nov.
Etymology
For Dr Q. B. Hendey, who supervised collecting of these and many other
fossils at Langebaanweg and who has done so much research on the geology
and fauna of that deposit.
Holotype
L28455, left tarsometatarsus with most of metatarsals II and III, lacking
metatarsal IV* and proximal articulation. From Quartzose Sand Member.
Hypodigm
Holotype and the following. From Quartzose Sand Member: L22985,
fragment of left tarsometatarsus with most of distal end of metatarsal III;
128456, fragment of right tarsometatarsus with distal ends of metatarsals III
and IV; L13154, right femur nearly complete; L25028, left femur nearly com-
plete; L25807, right femur nearly complete; L28216, right femur nearly com-
plete; L28217, left femur complete; L28222, left tibiotarsus complete. From
Quartzose Sand Member or bed 3aN of Pelletal Phosphorite Member: L55004,
left humerus with proximal and distal ends imperfect; L55005, left humerus
with distal end imperfect; L55003, right tibiotarsus complete. From Quartzose
* The missing metatarsal IV was found and restored to the holotype after this study was
completed.
A NEW GENUS OF LATE TERTIARY PENGUIN FROM LANGEBAANWEG i/
Sand Member or bed 3aS of Pelletal Phosphorite Member: slightly damaged
proximal end of right humerus; L55010, well-preserved distal end of left
humerus; L3656, left femur with proximal and distal ends slightly abraded.
Known distribution
As for the genus.
Diagnosis
Only known species of the genus. Measurements as in Tables | and 2.
TABLE |
Measurements of specimens of Dege hendeyi.
(Specifications of measurements are given in the text.)
Tarsometatarsus - °- °: ° d
Holotype 23018: - =: -: L270
Humerus a b Cc d
IL SSS 8 oo a6!) 12,8 14,0 —
ILSSOOS 8 8 eR Eos) 13,4 14,4 —
ILSSOI@ © 9 0 6 oe <6 == == == 20,3
Tibiotarsus a b
HESS OOS wed os eel ee 1 O6;5 16,0
ILDBWAD, 8 9S BF sg NS 15,3
TABLE 2
Statistics on femora of Dege hendeyi.
(Specifications of variates and symbols of statistics are given in the text.)
Variate N OR x S Vv
a at * eG 70,4-79,5 PS S4E130 317092 4,22+1,22
De eh eS 17,3-18,6 18,16+0,25 0,56+0,18 3,88 +0,97
Ges et, 5 (5,117.9 16,96-+0,50 1,11-40,35 6,57+2,08
Discussion
Inguza and Dege are distinct genera, not necessarily more closely related
to each other than to some other penguins, but they occur together and sorting
or preliminary identification can most easily be made by the difference in size
of their type-species. Comparable measurements of those species are given in
Table 3.
As noted above, some of the specimens of Dege hendeyi may have come
from the Pelletal Phosphorite Member, which overlies the Quartzose Sand
Member and must be to some degree younger in age. Hendey (1976) has sug-
gested that the differences may be appreciable and that further studies of the
enlarged collection from the Pelletal Phosphorite Member may reveal some
faunal difference, although this has not yet been clearly established. In the
material here studied, it happens that specimen L3656, the only femur that
may be from the Pelletal Phosphorite Member, is the largest of the six femora
referred to Dege hendeyi. The difference is not great enough to warrant any
taxonomic distinction, and as the matter now stands the whole lot could well,
and probably does, represent a single, not even particularly variable species.
8 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
TABLE 3
Comparative dimensions of Dege hendeyi and Inguza predemersus.
(Specifications of variates and symbols of statistics are given in the text.)
Variate Species N OR xX
Tarsometatarsusd + °- ° Dege hendeyi 1 — 16,5
Inguza predemersus 1 — W257
jalumnens @ 2 9 2 9 9 D. hendeyi y} 68,5—69,0 68,75
I, predemersus 2 57,5-59,0 58,25
DD, Po fore Ba) ene as D. hendeyi D, 12,8-13,4 13,10
I. predemersus 6 8,6-10,0 9,35
Che RES ed cons D. hendeyi 2, 14,0-14,4 14,20
I. predemersus 5 10,0-11,7 10,98
(7 kee Me Melk ei D. hendeyi 1 — 20,30
I. predemersus 4 17,8-19,3 18,60
leGAI G9 8. 8 8) 9 9 D. hendeyi 6 70,4—79,5 153
I. predemersus 3 59,8-62,3 61,20
Da ae Naea ae Cp ae eis D. hendeyi 5 17,3-18,6 18,16
I. predemersus 2 13,9-14,4 14,15
(Nigh ga See Bia S027 Ay D. hendeyi 5 15,1-17,9 16,96
I, predemersus 4 13,3-14,5 13,78
All the penguin bones from this deposit are dissociated, but they fall into
two non-overlapping size groups and the ratios of measurements of non-
homologous bones are similar to those of associated bones in Recent species and
in the few fossil species in which associated bones have been found. It is highly
probable that the known Langebaanweg specimens do represent just two
species and are correctly sorted by size.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
As in previous studies of South African fossil and Recent penguins, I am
greatly indebted to the South African Museum and to Dr Q. B. Hendey who
arranged the loan of the fossil specimens, provided the field data on them, and
reviewed the manuscript of this paper. Study was carried out at the Simroe
Foundation and with support from the Department of Geosciences of the
University of Arizona, Tucson, U.S.A.
The illustrations were supplied by the South African Museum.
REFERENCES
HENDEY, Q. B. 1974. The late Cenozoic Carnivora of the south-western Cape Province.
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 63: 1-369.
HENDEY, Q. B. 1976. The Pliocene fossil occurrences in ‘E’ Quarry, Langebaanweg, South
Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 69: 215-247.
HENDEY, Q. B. 1978. The late Tertiary Hyaenidae from Langebaanweg, South Africa, and
their relevance to the phylogeny of the family. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 76: 265-297.
Marp tes, B. J. 1960. A fossil penguin from the later Tertiary of North Canterbury. Rec.
Canterbury Mus. 7: 185-195.
Simpson, G. G. 1971. Fossil penguin from the late Cenozoic of South Africa. Science 171:
1144-1145.
A NEW GENUS OF LATE TERTIARY PENGUIN FROM LANGEBAANWEG 9
SIMPSON, G. G. 1972. Pliocene penguins from North Canterbury, New Zealand. Rec. Canter-
bury Mus. 9: 159-182.
Simpson, G. G. 1975. Notes on variation in penguins and on fossil penguins from the Pliocene
of Langebaanweg, Cape Province, South Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 69: 59-72.
Zusi, R. L. 1975. An interpretation of skull structure in penguins.* In: STONEHOUSE, B., ed.
The Biology of Penguins: 59-86. London and Basingstoke: Macmillan.
* This study also refers to postcranial bones and classification of Recent penguins.
|
:
|
}
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the International code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb.
nov., syn. nov., etc.
An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name (and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific name must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
not acceptable.
In describing new Species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-—A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
e.g. *... the Figure depicting C. namacolus ...’; *. . . in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...’
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. Du Toit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’ Gea ase fs
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively. :
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
GEORGE GAYLORD SIMPSON
A NEW GENUS OF LATE TERTIARY PENGUIN
FROM LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA
VOLUME 78 PART 2 APRIL 1979
OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN
~ MUSEUM
CAPE TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 « 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes...’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes...’
“As described (Smith 1969a, 1969b; Jones 1971)’
‘As described (Haughton & Broom 1927)...’
“As described (Haughton et al. 1927)...’
Note: no comma separating name and year
Dagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, b, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list o,
scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BULLOUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P.—H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140.
FiscHerR, P.-H., DuvAL, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. gén. 74: 627-634.
Koun, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
Konn, A. J. 19606. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull. Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4): 1-51.
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 78 Band
April 1979 April
Part 24 Deel
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTHERN AFRICA
LOWER CRETACEOUS AMMONITES, INCLUDING
A NEW BOCHIANITID GENUS, FROM
UMGAZANA, TRANSKEI
By
HERBERT CHRISTIAN KLINGER
&
WILLIAM JAMES KENNEDY
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na beskikbaarheid
van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
1, 2(1-3, 5-8), 3(1-2, 4-5, 8, t.-p.i.), 5(1-3, 5, 7-9),
6(1, t—p.i.), 7(1-4), 8, 91-2, 7), 10(1-3),
11(1-2, 5, 7, t.-p.i.), 15(4—5), 24(2), 27, 31(1-3), 32(5), 33
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae na die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 908407 69 6
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The Rustica Press, Pty., Ltd., Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg,
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTHERN AFRICA
LOWER CRETACEOUS AMMONITES, INCLUDING A NEW
BOCHIANITID GENUS, FROM UMGAZANA, TRANSKEI
By
HERBERT CHRISTIAN KLINGER
South African Museum, Cape Town
&
WILLIAM JAMES KENNEDY
Geological Collections, University Museum, Oxford
(With 5 figures)
[MS. accepted 19 December 1978]
ABSTRACT
The Umgazana Formation, outcropping at the mouth of the Umgazana River, south of
Port St Johns, Transkei, southern Africa, has yielded a small but distinctive ammonite fauna
consisting of Neohoploceras sp. and abundant bochianitids referred to a new genus and species,
Umegazaniceras thieuloyi, together with a specimen of Bochianites cf. renevieri (Ooster, 1860).
The association dates the unit as Upper Valanginian, and contemporaneous with the better-
known Uitenhage Formation of South Africa.
CONTENTS
PAGE
Introduction Bape" S52. moa 11
Systematic palaeontology Sea? sstet: 12
Acknowledgements . .... . 18
INGIGREMCESHiyy ae peed | tenes ie ils 18
INTRODUCTION
The term Umgazana Formation is applied to the small outcrop of Lower
Cretaceous sediments exposed on the Umgazana (Mngazana) River, a little
to the south of Port St Johns, Transkei, southern Africa (Rogers & Du Toit
1909; Du Toit 1912, 1920, 1954; Haughton 1969; Truswell 1967). Lithologies
present are predominantly dark greenish conglomerates with some bands of
coarse sandstone and grit. Occasional limestone lenticles yield invertebrate
macrofossils, listed by previous authors as Baculites, Pseudomelania, Trigonia
and Thetironia. The following plants are recorded: Onchiopsis, Clado-
Phlebis, Nilssonia, Dictyozamites and Otozamites. The flora indicates the
Umgazana Formation to be the equivalent of the better known Uitenhage
Formation, and Cooper (1974) suggested the sequence to be of uppermost
Valanginian date.
Recent micropalaentological investigations by McLachlan ef al. (1977)
suggest a Hauterivian/Valanginian date, whilst their samples yielded abundant
11
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 78 (2), 1979: 11-19, 5 figs.
12 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ammonites, including a bochianitid assemblage unlike that known from the
Uitenhage Formation, or, indeed, anywhere else. The forms present are identified
as:
Neohoploceras sp. indet.
Umgazaniceras thieuloyi gen. et sp. nov.
Bochianites cf. renevieri (Ooster, 1860)
Together these confirm the previous Upper Valanginian dating of the
Umgazana Formation
SYSTEMATIC PALAEONTOLOGY
Family Bochianitidae Spath, 1922
Subfamily Bochianitinae Spath, 1922
Genus Umgazaniceras nov.
Type species
Umgazaniceras thieuloyi sp. nov. Upper Valanginian, Umgazana, Transkei,
southern Africa.
Etymology
From the Umgazana River, the type locality.
Diagnosis
Bochianitids with well-developed dorsolateral and ventrolateral clavi linked
by simple or looped ribs and striae with intercalated ribs and striae between.
Sutures rather simple for the subfamily.
Umegazaniceras thieuloyi sp. nov.
Figs 1-2, 3A—D, 4-5
Holotype
SAM-PCT5702 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. From the
Umgazana River, Transkei, southern Africa. Umgazana Formation, Upper
Valanginian.
Paratypes
SAM-—PCT5695-5701, 5703-5, 5709-5710 from the same locality and
horizon as above.
Etymology
The species is named for Dr J. P. Thieuloy of Grenoble, who gave the
authors much valuable advice in connection with this work.
Diagnosis
As for genus.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTHERN AFRICA
a
Fig. 1. Umgazaniceras thieuloyi gen. et sp. nov.
A-C. Holotype, SAM-—PCT5702, lateral, ventral and dorsal views. x 3. D-E. Paratype
SAM-PCTS700, lateral and dorsal views. x 3. F-H. Paratype SAM-—PCT5704, lateral,
ventral and dorsal views. x 3,1. I-K. Paratype SAM-—PCT5709, lateral, ventral and dorsal
views. X 4,6.
14 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Description
The shell is small, probably not exceeding 150 mm in length in the present
material. The whorl section in the early stages of growth is ovoid, higher than
wide (Fig. 2A), but eventually becomes subtriangular in intercostal section
with a rounded venter and a flattened dorsum (Fig. 5). In some specimens,
however, such as SAM-PCT5696 (Fig. 3A—C), the whorl section remains
rounded up to large diameters.
At the very smallest diameter preserved, 1,5 mm (Fig. 1I-K), the flanks
and dorsum appear devoid of ornament, whilst the venter bears faint convex
striae. With increasing diameter, small auricular clavi appear at the dorso-
lateral shoulder, together with smaller clavi situated at the inner ventrolateral
shoulder and directed obliquely inwards in an apertural direction. Weak,
prorsiradiate lateral striae connect the dorsal and ventral clavi across the flanks,
dorsum and venter.
The remaining specimens are all adult. Ornament is very variable, but
basically follows the following pattern: the dorsal clavi are auricular, situated
at the dorsolateral shoulder and may protrude laterally to a considerable extent.
They are connected over the dorsum by looped ribs. On the flanks the ventral
part of the dorsal clavi merge rapidly into prorsiradiate, narrow and often
poorly defined ribs, which in turn connect to the ventral clavi situated at the
inner ventrolateral edge. The ventral clavi point obliquely inwards in an aper-
tural direction, as in the juvenile stage. The abapical parts of the clavi are con-
nected across the venter by forwardly curved, low folds, and the apical ends by
straight to concave folds, thus forming a distinct, looped pattern over the
venter.
Apart from the clavi and connecting ribs, fine intercalatory striae may
occur, as in the holotype (Fig. 1A—C), and riblets may also appear as a series
of bundled striae (Figs 1F—-H, 3A—C). In the majority of specimens the ornament
in the adult stage is prominent (Fig. 2B-D, H-L). One of the specimens,
SAM-PCT 5696 (Fig. 3A-C), has similar, but very much weakened ornament
at comparable size, and retains a rounded whorl section.
Specimen SAM-PCT 5695 (Fig. 3D) has the aperture preserved, with a
ventral hood ornamented by fine striae.
The suture is relatively simple with a very small umbilical lobe (U), trifid
lateral (L) and internal (I) lobes and bifid saddles (Fig. 4).
Discussion
The presence of distinct tubercles distinguishes Umgazaniceras thieuloyi
from all other bochianitids, and it occupies a unique position within the sub-
family Bochianitinae.
The simplicity of the sutures and small umbilical lobe (U) are reminiscent
of Baculina rouyana (d’Orbigny), but, as Wiedmann (1962) has successfully
Shown, generic separation based on sutural complexity alone is difficult to
Maintain.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTHERN AFRICA 15
Fig. 2. Umgazaniceras thieuloyi gen. et sp. nov.
A. Paratype SAM-PCT5706, view of septal face, stereopair. B-D. Paratype SAM-PCT5695,
lateral, ventral and dorsal views. x 2,5. E-G. Paratype SAM-PCT5703, lateral, ventral and
dorsal views. x 3,1. H-J. Paratype SAM-PCT5701, lateral, ventral and dorsal views. x 2,6.
K-L. Paratype SAM-—PCT5698, lateral and ventral views. x 2,7.
16
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 3. A-C. Umgazaniceras thieuloyi gen. et sp. nov. Paratype, SAM-—PCT5696, lateral,
ventral and dorsal views. x 2,1.
D. Umgazaniceras thieuloyi gen. et sp. nov Paratype, SAM-PCT5695. Specimen with part of
hooded aperture preserved. x 2,5.
E. Bochianites cf. renevieri (Ooster, 1860). SAM-—PCT5706. x 5.
F-H. Bochianites africanus (Tate) SAM—PCU5706, figured for comparison. x 1.
I. Neohoploceras sp. SAM-PCT5707. x 3 approx.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTHERN AFRICA 17
2mm
oO
Fig. 4. Umgazaniceras thieuloyi gen. et sp. nov. Suture line.
A specimen of the common Uitenhage form, Bochianites africanus (Tate,
1867) is illustrated for comparison as Figure 3F—H. The only other known
South African bochianitid, B. glaber Kitchin (1908: 181, pl. 8 (figs 20-21)), is
completely smooth, but is difficult to interpret, being monotypic and immature.
Genus Bochianites Lory, 1898
Bochianites cf. renevieri (Ooster, 1860)
Fig. 3E
Compare:
Baculites renevieri Ooster, 1860: 91, pl. 60 (figs 4-5)
Material
One fragment, SAM-—PCT5706 in the South African Museum.
Description and discussion
The single septate fragment differs from the remaining material in the
presence of a strong constriction and lack of ornament. It strongly recalls
Bochianites renevieri from the Upper Valanginian of Merligen, Switzerland,
and the authors compare it tentatively to this species.
Other comparable Bochianites species with distinct constrictions may be
B. weteringi Boehm (1904: 26, pl. 2 (fig. Sa—b), text-fig. 3); B. versteeghi Boehm
(1904: 27, pl. 2 (fig. 6a—c), text-fig. 4); and B. goubechensis Mandov (1971:
97, pl. 3 (figs 1-9)). The latter two species, however, both have relatively strong
ornament as compared to the Umgazana specimen. B. weteringi is very similar,
but difficult to interpret, being based on incomplete material.
[=
E
D Vo)
V °
Fig. 5. Umgazaniceras thieuloyi gen. et sp. noy. Whorl section.
18 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Family Berriasellidae Spath, 1922
Subfamily Neocomitidae Spath, 1924
Genus Neohoploceras Spath, 1939
Neohoploceras sp. indet.
Fig. 31
Material
One fragment only, SAM-—PCT5707, in the South African Museum.
Description and discussion
This small fragment of the venter of a strongly ribbed, normally coiled
ammonite with well-developed ventral tubercles, appears to be a Neohoploceras,
perhaps to be compared with the Uitenhage species N. subanceps (Tate) (1867:
150, pl. 7 (fig. 3a—b); Spath 1930: 151, pl. 13 (fig. 4a-c)). J. P. Thieuloy has
drawn the authors’ attention to the straight and sublinear ribbing on the venter,
which appears to be a significant feature of this genus.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
We are grateful to Mr I. R. McLachlan (SOEKOR, Johannesburg) for
putting this material at our disposal, and to Dr J. P. Thieuloy (Grenoble) for
providing much useful information and discussion. Thanks are due to Mr
N. Eden (South African Museum) for the photography of the specimens.
REFERENCES
Boerum, G. 1904. Beitrage zur Geologie von Niederlandisch-Indien. Die Stidkiisten der Sula-
Inseln Taliabu und Mangoli. 1. Grenzschichten zwischen Jura und Kreide. Palaeonto-
graphica suppl. 4: 11-46.
Cooper, M. R. 1974. The Cretaceous stratigraphy of South-Central Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus.
66: 81-107.
Du Torr, A. L. 1912. Geological Survey of part of the Transkei. Ann. Rep. Comm. Cape of
Good Hope (for 1911): 87-109.
Du Toit, A. L. 1920. The geology of Pondoland and portions of Alfred and lower Umzimkulu
Counties, Natal: Explanation of Cape Sheet 28 (Pondoland). Pretoria: Geological Survey
of South Africa.
Du Tort, A. L. 1954. Geology of South Africa. 3rd ed. London: Oliver & Boyd.
HAUGHTON, S. H. 1969. Geological History of Southern Africa. Johannesburg: Geological
Society of South Africa.
KiTcHIN, F. L. 1908. The Invertebrate Fauna and Palaeontological Relations of the Uitenhage
Series. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 7: 3-250.
Lory, P. 1898. Le Crétacé inférieur du Dévoluy et des régions voisines. Bull. Soc. geol. Fr. 26:
132-138.
MAnpov, G. 1971. Representants du genre Bochianites Lory, 1898 (Ammonoidea) dans les
dépéts du Crétacé inférieur en Bulgarie. Izv. Geol. Inst. Bulgar. Akad. Nauk, Ser. Paleont.
20: 91-107.
McLACHLAN, I. R., MCMILLAN, I. K. & BRENNER, P. 1976. Micropalaeontological study of
the Cretaceous beds at Mbotyi and Mngazana, Transkei, South Africa. Trans. geol. Soc.
S. Afr. 79: 321-340.
OostTER, W. A. 1860. Pétrifications rémarquables des Alpes Suisses. Catalogue des Céphalopodes
Fossiles des Alpes Suisses avec la déscription et les figures des espéces rémarquables. IV.
Genéve: Imp. H. Georg.
Pte OS
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTHERN AFRICA 19
Rocers, A. W. & Du Toit, A. L. 1909. An introduction to the geology of the Cape Colony.
London: Longmans, Green & Co.
SPATH, L. F. 1922. On Cretaceous Ammonoidea from Angola collected by Prof. J. W. Gregory,
DSc, F.R.S. Trans. R. Soc. Edinburgh 53: 91-160.
SPATH, L. F. 1924. On ammonites of the Speeton Clay and the subdivisions of the Neocomian.
Geol. Mag. 61: 73-89.
SPATH, L. F. 1930. On the Cephalopoda of the Uitenhage Beds. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 28: 131-157.
SPATH, L. F. 1939. The Cephalopoda of the Neocomian Belemnite Beds of the Salt Range.
Mem. geol. Surv. India, Palaeont. indica, n.s., 25: 1-154.
TATE, R. 1867. On some secondary fossils from South Africa. Q. J/ geol. Soc. Lond. 23: 139-174.
TRUSWELL, J. F. 1967. A critical review of stratigraphic terminology as applied in South Africa.
Trans. geol. Soc. S. Afr. 70: 81-116.
WIEDMANN, J. 1962. Unterkreide-ammoniten von Mallorca. 1. Lieferung: Lytoceratina,
Aptychi. Abh. math.-naturw. KI. Akad. Wiss. Mainz Jhrg. 1961 (1): 1-148.
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the International code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb.
nov., syn. nov., etc.
An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name (and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific name must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
not acceptable.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-—A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
e.g. *... the Figure depicting C. namacolus ...’; ‘. . . in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...’
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. Du Toit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’ i), Mtethics
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
HERBERT CHRISTIAN KLINGER
&
WILLIAM JAMES KENNEDY
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTHERN AFRICA
LOWER CRETACEOUS AMMONITES, INCLUDING
A NEW BOCHIANITID GENUS, FROM
UMGAZANA, TRANSKEI
OLUME 78 PART 3 APRIL 1979 ISSN 0303-2515
ye
‘OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN
MUSEUI
JAPE TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 « 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes...”
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes...’
‘As described (Smith 1969a, 19695; Jones 1971)’
‘As described (Haughton & Broom 1927)...’
‘As described (Haughton et ail. 1927)...’
Note: no comma separating name and year
Dagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, b, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list o,
Scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BULLOUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P.—H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100—140.
FiscHER, P.-H., DuvAL, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. gén. 74: 627-634.
Koun, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
Koun, A. J. 19606. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull. Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4): 1-51.
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 78 Band
April 1979 April
Part 2 Deel
A NEW SPECIES OF
MYOPHORELLA (BIVALVIA, TRIGONIIDAE) FROM
THE SUNDAY’S RIVER FORMATION,
SOUTH AFRICA
By
MICHAEL R. COOPER
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na beskikbaarheid
van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
1, 21-3, 5-8), 3(1-2, 4-5, 8, t.—p.i.), 51-3, 5, 7-9),
6(1, t.—p.i.), 701-4), 8, 91-2, 7), 10(1-3),
11(1-2, 5, 7, t.—p.i.), 15(4-5), 24(2), 27, 3101-3), 32(5), 33
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae na die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 908407 67 X
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The Rustica Press, Pty., Ltd., Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
A NEW SPECIES OF MYOPHORELLA (BIVALVIA, TRIGONIIDAE)
FROM THE SUNDAY’S RIVER FORMATION, SOUTH AFRICA
By
MICHAEL R. COOPER
Department of Geology, University of Oxford*
(With 2 figures)
[MS. accepted 22 December 1978]
ABSTRACT
The genus Myophorella Crickmay is recorded for the first time from southern Africa with
the description of M. oosthuizeni sp. nov. from Upper Valanginian strata of the Sunday’s
River Formation.
CONTENTS
PAGE
Introduction: <- = > « <= 21
SWRIBTIAITIES 2 9 9 9 I
SUMTIIEIAT 9 AG)
Acknowledgements: - - : 26
IRNGUGRSNGSS 9 HS)
INTRODUCTION
The family Trigoniidae comprises a long-ranging group of bivalves which
first appeared in the Upper Triassic and are today represented by a solitary
genus, Neotrigonia, which is restricted to subtropical to temperate waters off
the coast of Australia.
Although some workers have subdivided the family into a number of sub-
families (Van Hoepen 1929; Skwarko 1963) this concept has been rejected by
other workers (Cox 1969). The great diversity of forms within the Trigoniidae
suggests that the family may usefully be split into a number of subfamilies.
However, the latter categories are typically phylogenetic concepts and, at
present, very little evolutionary data have been presented to justify many of
the suggested subdivisions.
The genus Myophorella Bayle (in Bayle & Zeiller 1878) first appeared in
the Middle Jurassic (middle Lias) and finally became extinct during the Lower
Cretaceous (Aptian), attaining its acme during the late Jurassic, at which time
it attained a virtually cosmopolitan distribution.
SYSTEMATICS
Order TRIGONIOIDA Dall, 1889
Superfamily TRIGONIACEA Lamarck, 1819
Family Trigoniidae Lamarck, 1819
Genus Myophorella Bayle, 1878
Type species
Trigonia nodulosa Lamarck, 1801; by subsequent designation of Crickmay
(1932).
* Present address: Queen Victoria Museum, Salisbury, Rhodesia.
Di
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 78 (3), 1979: 21-27, 2 figs.
22. ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Discussion
Cox (1969) included Myophorella (Promyophorella), M. (Haidaia), Scapho-
trigonia, Clavotrigonia and Clavitrigonia as junior subjective synonyms of
Myophorella s.s., whilst Pseudomyophorella is considered a subgenus, dis-
tinguished by possessing radial ribs on the area. Scaphitrigon is based on a
publisher’s error of the genus Scaphogonia.
Myophorella (Myophorella) oosthuizeni sp. nov.
Fig. 1
Material
Five specimens in the collection of Mr R. Oosthuizen of Zwartskraal,
Prince Albert.
Holotype
RO 300 (SAM-PCUS5941) is designated as holotype, the remaining speci-
mens are paratypes.
Etymology
For Mr Roy Oosthuizen, whose keen interest and diligent collecting has
contributed greatly towards an understanding of the fossiliferous deposits of
southern Africa.
Type locality
Zwartkops brick quarry, Port Elizabeth, in the sediments of the Sunday’s
River Formation, and thus of late Valanginian age.
Diagnosis
A late Valanginian species of Myophorella characterized by an unorna-
mented escutcheon; regular, large, obliquely clavate tubercles on the inner and
marginal carinae; fine, transverse liration of the area; the absence of tubercles
defining the median longitudinal furrow of the area; flank costae which arise
either at right angles to, or directed posteriorly so as to form an acute angle
with, the marginal carina; the anterior set of costae are strongly curved, so as
to terminate mostly along the anterior and anteroventral margin of the com-
missure; there is a break in the regularity of tuberculation of those costae
terminating along the anteroventral commissure; the flanks are finely lirate.
Description
The shell is small, trigonally ovate, with the valves moderately inflated,
and somewhat produced posteriorly. The umbones are moderately incurved and
situated about one-fifth of the shell length from the anterior margin. The
escutcheon is large, lanceolate, and extends almost the entire length of the
dorsal margin of the shell. The inner carina is marked by regular, large, obliquely
clavate tubercles increasing in size posteriorly, as well as converging posteriorly.
NEW SPECIES OF MYOPHORELLA FROM SOUTH AFRICA 23
Fig. 1. Myophorella (Myophorella) oosthuizeni sp. nov.
A. Left valve of paratype. B-C. Interior and exterior views of left valve of paratype.
D-F. Anterior, lateral and dorsal views of the holotype, R0300 (SAM-PCU5941). x 1,5.
24 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
The area is trigonal, rather narrow, and ornamented by uniform, fine lirae
which show no sign of increasing in strength posteriorly. The area is divided
by a fine, but distinct, median longitudinal furrow which is situated much
closer to the inner carina than to the marginal carina. As with the inner carina,
the marginal carina is marked by a regular row of obliquely clavate tubercles
which, however, converge anteriorly. The posterior margin of the area is
abruptly truncate, slightly convex, and meets the dorsal margin at an angle
of about 110°. Each tubercle of the marginal carina gives rise to rather weakly-
developed flank ribs which, on the anterior half of the valves, curve strongly
forwards so as to terminate mostly along the anterior and anteroventral margins
on the commissure. From the marginal carina, the ribs are directed posteriorly,
only slightly so in the nepionic growth stages but strongly so in maturity, when
they meet the marginal carina at an angle of about 30°. The posterior set of ribs
is almost straight. All the ribs are ornamented with prominent tubercles which
are, in general, regularly spaced, although those ribs terminating along the
anteroventral commissure show a distinct break in tuberculation, as well as
some irregularities in their positioning. The entire surface of the flanks is
ornamented by prominent, fine, concentric lirae which follow the growth lines,
and are continuous with the lirae on the area.
Discussion
Amongst described species of Myophorella, M. oosthuizeni sp. nov.
undoubtedly shows closest relationships with M. alexandra Willey (1957: 77
(fig. 2a—c)) from the Berriasian of Antarctica. Myophorella alexandra differs in
having finely tuterculate inner and marginal carinae, and in that the transverse
lirae of the area strengthen posteriorly. Moreover, in maturity, the tubercles
of the marginal and inner carinae of M. alexandra become obsolete and are
replaced by lamella protuberances. The differences are not great but, because
of the different ages of the few known specimens of each species, are considered
to be of specific importance.
Myophorella dekaiboda Kobayshi & Tamura (1955: 95, pl. 6 (figs 6—-9))
from the Jurassic of Japan somewhat resembles the present species, but is based
upon poorly preserved internal moulds and composite internal moulds which
are not directly comparable with M. oosthuizeni sp. nov. The vastly different
ages and wide geographic separation suggests that they are specifically distinct.
Cox (1965) has recently described two species of Myophorella from the
Kimmeridgian of Tanzania, M. quennelli Cox (1965: 79, p. 12 (fig. 1)) and
M. kiwawaensis Cox (1965: 80, pl. 12 (fig. 2)), but neither warrants comparison
with the present form.
M yophorella kutchensis (Kitchin) (1903: 84, pl. 7 (fig 7-9)) (Fig. 2) resembles
the present species, but is more ovate in outline and not produced posteriorly
as much as M. oosthuizeni sp. nov. Moreover, the area is much wider in Kitchin’s
species, as well as being more coarsely lirate, whilst the tubercles of the marginal
carina do not appear to be obliquely clavate as in M. oosthuizeni.
NEW SPECIES OF MYOPHORELLA FROM SOUTH AFRICA 25
Fig. 2. Myophorella (Myophorella) kutchensis (Kitchin). The syntypes. After Kitchin (1903).
A.
Myophorella rupellensis (d’Orbigny) (Lycett 1872: 28, pl. 8 (fig. 4)),
M. ingens (Lycett) (1872: 24, pl. 8 (figs 1-3)), and M. corallina (d’Orbigny)
(Lycett 1872: 45, pl. 3 (figs 7-9, 11)) are all Jurassic species which differ
from M. oosthuizeni sp. nov. in lacking a tuberculate marginal carina and in
that the flank ribs are directed anteriorly from the marginal carina.
Myophorella mermodi (Chavan) (1952: 50, pl. 3 (fig. 5)) has a more ovate
outline than M. oosthuizeni, with flank ribs that are directed anteriorly from the
marginal carina and tubercles on the area, marking the median longitudinal
furrow.
Myophorella norberti (Chavan) (=Trigonia perlata Lycett (non Agassiz)
1872: 22, pl. 11 (fig. 3 only)) differs from the present species in the irregular
nature of the flank ribs and tubercles, and having finely tuberculate inner and
marginal carinae, as well as a raised rib marking the median longitudinal
furrow.
Myophorella clavellata (J. Sowerby) (Lycett 1872: 18, pl. 1 (figs 1-2)),
M. perlata (Agassiz) (Lycett 1872: 22, pl. 3 (figs 1-3)) and M. juddiana (Lycett)
(1872: 25, pl. 2 (fig. 6), pl. 4 (figs 5, 7)) are all Jurassic species which have a less
curved anterior margin to the shell, a subquadratic outline, and finely tubercu-
late carinae (as well as one marking the median longitudinal furrow).
Myophorella exotica (Méricke) (1895: 49, pl. 1 (fig. 9), pl. 6 (fig. 9)) is a
Bajocian species based upon composite internal moulds which may have
26 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
suffered slight distortion, and are thus difficult to compare. It differs, however,
in having a finely tuberculate marginal carina.
Myophorella australiana Skwarko (1963: 38, pl. 5 (figs 8-11)) from the
Aptian of Queensland differs from M. oosthuizeni sp. nov. in that the area and
marginal carina are irregularly tuberculate, whilst most of the ribs are straight
and terminate along the ventral commissure.
Myophorella alina (Contejean) (1859: 282, pl. 14 (figs 3-5)) is a Kim-
meridgian species with a more coarsely ribbed area and tubercles lining the
median longitudinal furrow, whilst the flank ribs are directed anteriorly from
the marginal carina. The younger M. bronni (Agassiz) (1841: 18, pl. 5 (fig. 19))
differs from M. oosthuizeni in much the same features.
Myophorella signata (Agassiz) (1841: 18, pl. 3 (fig. 8), pl. 9 (fig. 5)) differs
from M. oosthuizeni in having finely nodose carinae, including one marking the
median longitudinal furrow.
Myophorella goldfussi (Agassiz) (1841: 24) (=Lyrodon literatum Goldfuss
1834: 200, pl. 136 (fig. 5 only)), like M. oosthuizeni has obliquely clavate tubercles
lining the marginal carinae, but lacks the fine liration of the flanks seen in
M. oosthuizeni, and also has tubercles lining the median longitudinal furrow.
Myophorella polonica (Lebkichner) (1933: 60, pl. 4 (fig. 5)) lacks the fine
liration of the flanks seen in M. oosthuizeni, and also has coarser ribs on the
area. Myophorella trafalgarensis (Warren) (1932: 18, pl. 3 (figs 5-6)) is a Cal-
lovian species which shows the same general features of M. oosthuizeni, especially
in the nature of the flank ribs, but appears to lack tuberculate carinae.
Occurrence
Myophorella oosthuizeni is known only from the Upper Valanginian of
South Africa.
SUMMARY
The new species Myophorella oosthuizeni from the late Valangian Sunday’s
River Formation provides the first record of this genus from southern Africa.
It is most closely allied to M. alexandra Willey from the Berriasian of Antarctica.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
Once again I wish to extend my best thanks to Mr R. Oosthuizen for
making available to me the material in his collections.
REFERENCES
AGASSIZ, L. 1841. Mémoire sur les trigonies. Etudes critiques sur les mollusques fossiles.
Neuchatel.
BAYLE, E. & ZEILLER, R. 1878. Explication de la carte géologique de la France. Paris.
CHAVAN, A. 1952. Les pélécypodes de sablés astartiens de Cordebugle (Calvados) Schweiz.
palaeont. Abh. 69 (3): 1-132.
CONTEJEAN, C. 1859. Etude de l’etage Kimmeridien dans les environs de Montbeliard. Paris.
Cox, L. R. 1965. Jurassic Bivalvia and Gastropoda from Tanganyika and Kenya. Bull. Br.
Mus. nat. Hist. (Geol.) Suppl. 1: 1-213.
NEW SPECIES OF MYOPHORELLA FROM SOUTH AFRICA 27
Cox, L. R. 1969. Family Trigoniidae. In: Moorg, R. C. ed. Treatise on invertebrate paleontology.
Part N (1), Mollusca 6, Bivalvia. Lawrence: Geological Society of America, University of
Kansas Press.
Go.pruss, A. 1826-40. Petrefacta Germaniae tam ea quae in museo universitatis regiae borussiae
Friedericiae Wilhelminae rhenanae servandur. Dusseldorf.
Hoepen, E. C. N. VAN. 1929. Die krytfauna van Soeloeland. I. Trigoniidae. Paleont. Navors.
nas. Mus. Bloemfontein 1 (1): 1-38.
Kircuin, F. L. 1903. The Jurassic fauna of Cutch. The Lamellibranchiata. Genus Trigonia.
Mem. geol. Surv. India Palaeont. indica (9) 3 (2): 1-122.
KoBayASHI, T. & TAMURA, M. 1955. The Myophorellinae from North Japan. Studies on the
Jurassic trigonians in Japan. Part IV. Jap. J. Geol. Geogr. 26: 89-104.
LAMARCK, J. B. DE. 1801. Systéme des animaux sans vertebres. Paris.
LEBKUCHNER, R. 1933. Die Trigonien des siiddeutshen Jura. Palaeontographica 77: 1-119.
LycetT, J. 1872-1879. A monograph of the British fossil Trigoniae. Palaeont. Soc. (Monogr.)
1872: 1-52, 1874: 53-92, 1875: 93-148, 1877: 149-204, 1879: 205-245.
MorickE, W. 1895. Versteinerungen des Lias und UnterGdolith von Chile. Neues Jb. Miner.
Geol. Paldont. BeilBd. 9: 1-100.
SKWARKO, S. K. 1963. Australian Mesozoic trigoniids. Bull. Bur. Miner. Resour. Geol. Geophys.
Aust. 67: 1-42.
WARREN, P. S. 1932. A new pelecypod fauna from the Fernie Formation, Alberta. Proc.
Trans. R. Soc. Can. (3) 26 (4): 1-36.
WILLEY, L. E. 1975. Upper Jurassic and lowest Cretaceous Trigoniidae (Bivalvia) from south-
eastern Alexander Island. Bull. Br. Antarc. Surv. 41-42: 77-85.
¢
=
od
“y f .
— a .
%
Tip { ; .
: 7 s
a — % s = =
4
4 = Xe gn ;
» = 5 :
Ne)
= { :
d =
ie g
5 %
u&
RS 5 b ;
Pe i
=e 3
¢ :
e
f a
e x 7 . ;
a
| ) 2
} = .
ft
SS
‘ : —
Fy
%
= Bs FS a
i
=
;
: A :
‘ es
; = a
Y
=
x : :
3 a : |
= p i
; : 4
= a 2
= Re:
2 -
¢
u i 3 ,
oo .
Es
J
E,
. bs 5
/
\W
2 |
‘ = \
—— '
x x ey /
: | | |
- . |
ee 3 i
ie ;
a 7 ;
\
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the International code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb.
nov., syn. nov., etc.
An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name (and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific name must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
not acceptable.
In describing new Species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) . The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text _
e.g. *... the Figure depicting C. namacolus ...’; ‘. . . in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...’
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. Du Toit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but’ F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’ a
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively. ;
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
MICHAEL R. COOPER
A NEW SPECIES OF
MYOPHORELLA (BIVALVIA, TRIGONIIDAE) FROM
THE SUNDAY’S RIVER FORMATION,
SOUTH AFRICA
. TH AFRICAN |
OF THE SOU Bvinsaent
CAPE TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s) ;
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations. :
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 x 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 x 47 cm shouid not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes .. .’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes...’
“As described (Smith 1969a, 19696; Jones 1971)’
‘As described (Haughton & Broom 1927)...’
‘As described (Haughton et al. 1927)...’
Note: no comma separating name and year
Dagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, b, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list o,
scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BULLOUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P.—H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140.
FiscHER, P.-H., DuvAL, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. gén. 74: 627-634.
Koun, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
Kon, A. J. 19606. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull. Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4): 1-51.
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 78 Band
April 1979 April
Part 4 Deel
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND
NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA
A NEW GENUS AND SPECIES OF
TUBERCULATE DESMOCERATACEAN AMMONITE
FROM THE MZINENE FORMATION (ALBIAN)
By
WILLIAM JAMES KENNEDY
CLAUDE WILLIAM WRIGHT
&
HERBERT CHRISTIAN KLINGER
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na beskikbaarheid
van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad
OUT OF PRINT/ UIT DRUK
1, 2(1-3, 5-8), 3(1-2, 4-5, 8, t.-p.i.), 5(1-3, 5, 7-9),
6(1, t.-p.i.), 70-4), 8, 901-2, 7), 10(1—3),
11(1-2, 5, 7, t.—p.i.), 15(4-5), 24(2), 27, 31(1-3), 32(5), 33
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae na die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 908407 70 X
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The Rustica Press, Pty., Ltd., Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL,
SOUTH AFRICA
A NEW GENUS AND SPECIES OF TUBERCULATE
DESMOCERATACEAN AMMONITE FROM THE
MZINENE FORMATION (ALBIAN)
By
WILLIAM JAMES KENNEDY,
CLAUDE WILLIAM WRIGHT
Geological Collections, University Museum, Oxford
&
HERBERT CHRISTIAN KLINGER
South African Museum, Cape Town
(With 4 figures)
LMS. accepted 4 January 1979]
ABSTRACT
The low Middle Albian Mzinene Formation in its type area yields numerous specimens
of Umsinenoceras linguatuberculatum gen. et sp. nov., previously identified as Neosilesites
(Kennedy & Klinger, 1975) but probably a member of the Puzosiinae. It is closely related to
Feruglioceras Leanza, 1967, and resembles various Marshallitinae (Kossmaticeratidae).
CONTENTS
. PAGE
Introduction: 9). 29
Systematic description. . . 30
DISCUSSION “{2 =) =, 9. 3k 35
Acknowledgements. . . . 37
IReferencesta. ee ae ay)
INTRODUCTION
In a preliminary account of the stratigraphy and ammonite faunas of the
Zululand Cretaceous, Kennedy & Klinger (1975) recorded in provisional lists
from their division III of the Albian the genus ‘Neosilesites’, associated with a
diverse fauna indicating a low Middle Albian horizon. As a result of further
collecting of well-preserved specimens, this material has been found to represent
not a silesitid, but a new genus of Puzosiinae, allied to Feruglioceras Leanza,
1967, and an approximate homoeomorph of various Kossmaticeratids. The
species is described below as Umsinenoceras linguatuberculatum gen. et sp. nov.
29
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 78 (4), 1979: 29-38, 4 figs.
30 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
SYSTEMATIC DESCRIPTION
Superfamily DESMOCERATACEAE Zittel, 1895
Family Desmoceratidae Zittel, 1895
Subfamily Puzosiinae Spath, 1922
Genus Umsinenoceras nov.
Type species
Umsinenoceras linguatuberculatum gen. et sp. nov., low Middle Albian,
Zululand.
Derivation of name
Named after the Mzinene River, alternatively spelt Umsinene.
Diagnosis
Small, compressed, relatively evolute, with dense, fine, flexuous prorsi-
radiate ribs which may split across the ventrolateral shoulder. Venter flattened
with fine striae only during middle growth stages. Constrictions frequent in
middle and later growth, parallel with the ribs, prorsiradiate, interrupted over
the siphuncle on internal moulds. Ventrolateral clavi irregularly developed in
middle and later growth. Slight, sharp umbilical bullae sometimes present.
Suture deeply incised, with bifid saddles, asymmetrically trifid L and retracted U.
Occurrence
Low Middle Albian of Zululand.
Umsinenoceras linguatuberculatum sp. nov.
Figs 1-4
Holotype
BMNH C81275, from the Mzinene Formation, Albian III, locality 35,
cliff and stream sections extending over several hundred metres along the
Mzinene approximately, 1 200 m NE of the farm Amatis, north of Hluhluwe,
Zululand, 27°58'03”S 32°18’31”E. In the collections of the British Museum
(Natural History).
Paratypes
BMNH C81276-81298 and SAS A1363, A1372, A1413-4, from the same
horizon and locality, housed in the collections of the British Museum (Natural
History), and the Geological Survey (Pretoria).
Derivation of name
Latin lingua-, tongue, and tuberculatus -um, tuberculate, in reference to the
linguiform line of ribs and constrictions, combined with tubercles, on the
venter.
ai
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA
~
ee
Se
< Syate € _
Seep
aah. Ges ye * IE ooh
Gaal x:
>
A-D. Holotype BMNH C81275
D
Ca Bb Eb 2:
noy.
linguatuberculatum gen. et sp.
jE
inenoceras
E-G, Paratype C81283. H-J. Paratype C81282.
Fig. 1. Ums
32 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 2. Umsinenoceras linguatuberculatum gen. et sp. nov. A-C. Paratype BMNH C81279,
a body chamber. D-G. Paratype BMNH 281277, adult phragmocone with part of body
chamber. H-I. Paratype BMNH C81276, with preserved aperture. J-K. Paratype BMNH
C81278, preserving shell and septate tubercle (arrowed).
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 33
) J
Fig. 3. Umsinenoceras linguatuberculatum gen. et sp. nov. A-B, D. Paratype BMNH C81285.
C. Paratype BMNH C81287. E-H. Paratype BMNH C81281. I-K. Paratype BMNH
C81284. L-M. Paratype BMNH C81288. A-C, E-G, I-J, L-M x 2; D, H, K x 1.
34
Dimensions
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
All dimensions are in millimetres. D = diameter, Wb = whorl breadth,
Wh = whorl height, U = umbilical diameter.
Figures in parentheses are dimensions expressed as percentages of the total
diameter.
BMNH C81277 ..
Holotype
BMNH C81275 ..
BMNH C81280 ..
BMNH C81281
BMNH C81285 ..
D
46,5 (100)
26,4 (100)
24,8 (100)
22,2 (100)
20,0 (100)
Wb
11,2 (24)
8.0 (30)
7,2 (29)
TOAD
6,3 (32)
Wh
16,8 (36)
9,3 (35)
8.4 (34)
7,4 (33)
6,4 (32)
Wb: Wh
0,67
0,86
0,86
0,97
0,98
U
18,6 (40)
9,2 (35)
8.5 (34)
8,3 (37)
7,8 (39)
Fig. 4. Umsinenoceras linguatuberculatum gen. et sp. nov. A. External suture of paratype
BMNH C81277. B. Paratype C81280. Both x 6.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 335)
Description
The earliest stages of development are revealed by BMNH C81288; these
show the coiling to be relatively involute up to a diameter of 6 mm, with a
shallow umbilicus, a low, rounded umbilical wall and a broadly rounded whorl
section. Internal moulds appear smooth but the shell, where preserved, bears
fine, dense, flexuous ribs. By a diameter of 10 mm the coiling is more evolute.
The umbilicus now comprises 25 per cent of the diameter and is shallow, with
a low, rounded wall. The whorl section is slightly depressed with an abruptly
rounded umbilical shoulder, flattened inner flanks, convergent outer flanks, an
abruptly and narrowly rounded ventrolateral shoulder and a flattened venter.
Ornament consists of fine, dense, prorsiradiate ribs, typically 60-70 per whorl;
these arise at the umbilical seam, strengthen across the wall and in some cases
bifurcate at the umbilical shoulder. They sweep forwards across the inner flank,
and are feebly convex, sweeping backwards across the mid-flank. The ribs
either split in pairs, or a short intercalated rib appears on the outer third of the
flanks, where all ribs are concave, sweeping forwards across the shoulders. The
ribs disappear on the flattened venter, where the shell bears only faint delicate
striae, projected in a tongue-like extension. The ribs are strong and wire-like
on the shell but the ornament of the internal moulds is very feeble.
Constrictions first appear at a diameter of 13 to 16 mm. On the shell these
are deep, narrow, flexuous and prorsiradiate and are both followed and pre-
ceded by a strengthened rib. On the mould the constrictions are broader and
pass across the venter with little diminution in depth, being projected parallel
to the growth striae. The spacing of constrictions is variable; in BMNH C81280
there are six in a half whorl at a diameter of 24 mm; in BMNH C81284 the same
number occupy a whole whorl.
As size increases, irregularly spaced ventrolateral nodes appear. On moulds
they are blunt and clavate; where shell is present (e.g. BMNH C81278) it is
clear that the node represents the base only of a tiny septate, finger-like, round-
topped horn. These clavi commonly develop on a thickened rib or two or three
of the long ribs may link with them.
Three specimens, BMNH C81276-8, show the compressed, flat-sided adult
body chamber. Here the ribs and striae are irregularly developed, prorsiradiate
and strongly concave rather than flexuous, the venter becomes somewhat
rounded, and is crossed by occasional ribs and constrictions which project
forwards in a long, narrow tongue.
The suture line (Fig. 4) is deeply incised, with a large, asymmetrically bifid
E/L, deep L asymmetrically trifid, LU, asymmetrically bifid, and U distinctly
retracted.
DISCUSSION
There are some similarities between Umsinenoceras and late members of
the Silesitidae such as Neosilesites Breistroffer and Parasilesites Imlay. However,
like all silesitids, these have a simpler, less incised suture with projected, not
36 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
retracted umbilical elements, and lack ventral tubercles. The Barremian Silesites
itself has oval whorls and ribs which cross the venter. Moreover, in all Silesitidae
the ribs branch, if at all, high up the sides, not from the umbilical tubercle.
Feruglioceras Leanza, 1967, type species F. piatnitzkyi Leanza, from the
Sanmartinoceras patagonicum Zone (probably Upper Aptian (see Leanza 1970:
258; Thomson 1974: 43)) of the Lago San Martin Formation of Patagonia,
seem to be the closest described genus to Umsinenoceras. (Note: In 1967 Leanza
(1967: 156) established Feruglioceras with F. piatnitzkyi sp. nov. as type and
sole species. He differentiated his three specimens from Pseudohaploceras at
the generic level and (1967: 157) at the specific level from ‘Silesites’ desmo-
ceroides Stolley (1912: 7) with which Bonarelli (1921: 22) and, following him,
Feruglio (1936) and Piatnitzky (1938) had misidentified them. In the authors’
view this satisfies Article 13(a)(i) of the I.C.Z.N. Rules in respect of the names
piatnitzkyi and Feruglioceras.) It is characterized by its compressed subtabulate
whorl section, frequent flexuous constrictions separated by extremely sharp,
fine, irregularly branching ribs, fifteen or more between constrictions. Feruglio-
ceras is probably derived from Pseudohaploceras by increase in closeness,
fineness and flexuousness of ribs. In comparison, Usinenoceras has lower and
somewhat weaker ribs, becoming feebler and more distant on the body chamber,
and developing prominent ventrolateral tubercles, but it resembles Feruglioceras
closely in its subtabulate venter, degree of evolution, sinuous ribs branching
in bundles from fine umbilical tubercles, and the frequent constrictions parallel
to the ribs.
There are considerable similarities between Umsinenoceras and various
members of the Kossmaticeratidae. This family is currently divided into sub-
family Marshallitinae Matsumoto, 1955, ranging probably from the Upper
Aptian (?Hulenites from Japan (see Obata 1967: 67; Matsumoto, Kanmera &
Sakamoto 1968: 145)) to Cenomanian and perhaps Turonian (Matsumoto
1955, 1956), and subfamily Kossmaticeratinae, ranging from Upper Turonian
to Maastrichtian. Marshallitinae apparently evolved from a compressed
puzosiine form by increased compression, a tendency to flatten and lose ribs
on the venter, and increasingly prorsiradiate constrictions. In the earliest form,
Hulenites Matsumoto, 1955, the constrictions do not yet truncate the ribs
behind them, as is characteristic of most Kossmaticeratidae.
Hulenites (Upper Aptian to Upper Albian) is more compressed and involute
than Umsinenoceras, with a much smaller umbilicus. The ribbing is fairly similar
as are the constrictions, but Hulenites does not have the smooth tabulate venter
of the adult shell nor the ventrolateral tuberculation of Umsinenoceras. Marshal-
lites Matsumoto, 1955, which ranges from Cenomanian to Lower Turonian, is
still more high-whorled, compressed and involute, and the constrictions clearly
truncate the ribs. It resembles Umsinenoceras in the fine umbilical tubercles,
but the ribs are not weakened on the venter. Holcodiscoides Spath, 1922, from
the Turonian of southern India, resembles Umsinenoceras in being evolute with
flat sides and having ventrolateral tubercles, but it is much further removed
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA ay)
from the ancestral puzosiiforme type. It has almost square whorls with recti-
radiate to slightly prorsiradiate, nearly straight ribs, and prorsiradiate con-
strictions, all crossing the venter nearly transversely.
Other members of the Marshallitinae, Eomadrasites Matsumoto, 1955, with
irregular strong umbilical, ventrolateral and siphonal tubercles, Eogunnarites
Wright & Matsumoto, 1954, with depressed whorl section and olcostephanoid
ribbing, and Mikasaites Matsumoto, 1956, with fine ribbing crossing the venter
transversely and distinct siphonal tubercles, are all readily distinguished from
Umsinenoceras.
In view of the resemblance between Feruglioceras and Umsinenoceras on
the one hand, and Aulenites and Marshallites on the other, the question arises
whether the former two genera should be placed in the Marshallitinae. The
general shell form, ribbing and relatively simple suture with moderately retracted
suspensive lobe would all fit in the Kossmaticeratidae, but there are distinct
contrary indications. Umsinenoceras does not have the most characteristic
feature of the Kossmaticeratidae, i.e. constrictions that truncate the ribs.
Moreover, Marshallitinae do not have such strongly projected ventral ribbing
as do Feruglioceras and Umsinenoceras. The sutures do not help in deciding.
Those of Marshallites itself are much more incised and complex and, indeed,
more puzosiiforme than those of Umsinenoceras, although later Kossmaticera-
tinae may have simpler sutures, like those of the new genus.
On balance, it appears to us that Umsinenoceras is closely related to
Feruglioceras, and an offshoot of Pseudohaploceras or an allied Southern
hemisphere genus that was independent of, though in some ways similar to, the
Northern hemisphere Hulenites and Marshallites line. If this is so it would be
misleading to place Feruglioceras and Umsinenoceras in the Marshallitinae,
and it is in the authors’ view better to retain them for the time being in the
Puzosiinae.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
We are grateful to Dr I. Hayami, Tokyo, Dr M. K. Howarth and Mr D.
Phillips of the British Museum (Natural History), and the staff of the Geological
Collections, University Museum, Oxford, and the South African Museum,
Cape Town, for their help in many ways, and to Professor T. Matsumoto,
Kyushu University, who commented on an earlier draft of the paper. The
financial assistance of the Trustees of the Sir Henry Strakosch Bequest, the
National Environmental Research Council, and Wolfson College, Oxford, are
gratefully acknowledged.
REFERENCES
BONARELLI, G. 1921. In: Bonarelli, G. & Nagéra, J. J. Observaciones geoldgicos en las imme-
diaciones del Lago San Martin (Territorio de Santa Cruz). Boln Dir. gen. Minas Geol.
Hidrol., B. Aires (B) 27: 1-39.
FERUGLIO, E. 1936. Palaeontographica Patagonica. Pt. 1. Memorie Inst. geol. miner. Univ.
Padova 11: 1-381.
38 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
KENNEDY, W. J. & KLINGER, H. C. 1975. Cretaceous faunas from Zululand and Natal, South
Africa. Introduction, Stratigraphy. Bull. Br. Mus. nat. Hist. (Geol.) 25: 263-315.
LEANZA, A. F. 1967. Anotaciones sobre los fosiles jurasico-cretacicos de Patagonia austral
(coleccion Feruglio) conservados en la Universidad de Bologna. Act geol. lilloana 11:
121-188.
LEANZA, A. F. 1970. Ammonites nuevos 0 poco conocidos de Aptiano, Albiano y Ceno-
manino de los Andes australes con notas acera de du posicion estratigrafica. Revta Asoc.
geol. argent. 25: 197-261.
Matsumoto, T. 1955. Family Kossmaticeratidae from Hokkaido and Saghalien. Jap. J.
Geol. Geogr. 26: 115-165.
Matsumoto, T. 1956. Further notes on the Kossmaticeratids from Hokkaido. Jap. J. Geogr.
27: 173-187.
MATSUMOTO, T., KANMERA, K. & SAKAMOTO, H. 1968. Notes on two Cretaceous Ammonites
from the Tomochi Formation of Kyushu. Jap. J. Geol. Geogr. 39: 139-148.
OBATA, I. 1967. Lower Cretaceous Ammonites from the Miyako Group. Trans. Proc. palaeont.
Soc. Japan (n.s.) 66: 63-72.
PIATNITZKY, A. 1938. Observaciones geoldgicas en el Oeste de Santa Cruz (Patagonia). Boln
Ints petrol. 165: 45-85.
THomson, M. R. A. 1974. Ammonite faunas of the Lower Cretaceous of south-eastern Alex-
ander Island. Br. Antarct. Surv. Sci. Rep. 80: 1-44.
SPATH, L. F. 1922. On the Senonian ammonite fauna of Pondoland. Trans. R. Soc. S. Afr. 10:
113-147.
STOLLEY, E. 1912. Ueber einige Cephalopoden aus der Unteren Kreide Patagoniens. Arkiv.
Zool. 7: 13-18.
ZITTEL, K. A. VON. 1895. Grundziige der Palaeontologie. Munich & Leipzig.
WRIGHT, C. W. & Matsumoto, T. 1954. Some doubtful ammonite genera from Japan and
Saghalien. Mem. Fac. Sci. Kyushu Univ. (D) 5: 107-134.
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the Jnternational code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb.
nov., syn. nov., etc.
An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name (and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific name must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
not acceptable.
In describing new Species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-—A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) . The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
> 6
e.g. *... the Figure depicting C. namacolus ...’; ‘. . . in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...’
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. Du Toit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
“Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’ ah
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
WILLIAM JAMES KENNEDY
CLAUDE WILLIAM WRIGHT
&
HERBERT CHRISTIAN KLINGER
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND
NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA
A NEW GENUS AND SPECIES OF
TUBERCULATE DESMOCERATACEAN AMMONITE
FROM THE MZINENE FORMATION (ALBIAN)
: OLUME 78 PART 5
507.68
ANNALS
OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN
as
KUM
CAPE TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References ;
{i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 « 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes...’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. i6) describes...’
‘As described (Smith 1969a, 19696; Jones 1971)’
‘As described (Haughton & Broom 1927)...’
‘As described (Haughton et al. 1927)...’
Note: no comma separating name and year
Dagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, b, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list o,
Scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BULLOUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P.-H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140.
FiscHER, P.-H., DuvaL, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. gén. 74: 627-634.
Konn, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
Konn, A. J. 19606. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull. Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4): 1-51.
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 78 Band
April 1979 April
Part 5 Deel
DISCOVERY OF THE ORIENTAL LATRINE FLY
CHRYSOMYIA MEGACEPHALA (FABRICIUS)
ALONG THE SOUTH-WESTERN COAST OF
SOUTH AFRICA
By
A. J. PRINS
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town 8000
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na beskikbaarheid
van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad 8000
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
1, 2(1-3, 5-8), 3(1-2, 4-5, 8, t.—p.i.), 51-3, 5, 7-9),
6(1, t—p.i.), 711-4), 8, 911-2, 7), 10(1-3),
11(1-2, 5, 7, t.—p.i.), 15(4-5), 24(2), 27, 31(1-3), 32(5), 33
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae na die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 908407 66 1
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The Rustica Press, Pty., Ltd., Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
DISCOVERY OF THE ORIENTAL LATRINE FLY CHRYSOMYIA
MEGACEPHALA (FABRICIUS) ALONG THE SOUTH-WESTERN COAST
OF SOUTH AFRICA
By
A. J. PRINS
South African Museum, Cape Town
(With 5 figures)
LMS. accepted 4 January 1979]
ABSTRACT g
While investigating the biology and life histories of certain Diptera infesting decaying
seaweed and organic matter along the shore, Chrysomyia megacephala was discovered during
March 1978 in association with Lucilia sericata in a dead sea-gull at Ysterfontein.
It could have reached the coast either as a mature fly or as an immature stage by drifting
ashore from passing ships.
Adult and immature stages are described and compared with those of the related Chry-
somyia chloropyga. Third stage larvae of these two species differ only slightly, but differences
between the male genitalia are fairly conclusive. Both immature and adult stages are quite
different from those of L. sericata.
It was not possible to determine the length of the larval life, but pupal stages lasted 4 days
at room temperature.
CONTENTS
PAGE
Introduction’, 2). ) ae 39
Discussigi: =) 40
Description of stages . . . 41
Biology: fem tee cee ree ee 47
Acknowledgements . : 47
INGIGISIGES “eg me EIS 47
INTRODUCTION
While investigating the biology and life histories of certain Diptera
frequenting and infesting decomposing seaweed and organic matter along the
coast and shores of the southern and western Cape, the author made an
important discovery, namely the occurrence of the oriental latrine fly Chry-
somyia megacephala (Fabricius) in South Africa.
As this species of Chrysomyia has never before been found in South Africa,
it is important that certain observations made on the material at the author’s
disposal, its life history, imago, larval and pupal stages, should be recorded to
enable its future identification and separation from the related and known
South African species of Chrysomyia and those of the genus Lucilia.
The oriental latrine fly, also known as the Indian Bazaar bluebottle, is
widely distributed in the Far East, including Australasia. Although it occurs
in the Malagasy Region, it was unknown in Africa until its recent discovery
in Ghana and Senegal during 1977 (Kurahashi 1978). However, dead sea-gulls
collected at Ysterfontein beach during March 1978 produced about six maggots
38)
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 78 (5), 1979: 39-47, 5 figs.
40 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
of this species from which three adult flies were reared. These maggots were in
association with those of the green blowfly (common green-bottle) Lucilia
sericata (Meigen) which formed the main constituent of this population.
Several further attempts to collect more specimens along this coast from Milner-
ton to Saldanha were in vain. Despite the isolation of this discovery, it was
considered important enough to give a brief description of the stages that were
found for comparison with the related C. chloropyga (Wiedemann) and with
L. sericata and to attempt a possible explanation of the fly’s appearance at
Ysterfontein.
METHOD
Maggots that had been collected from dead sea-birds found on the beaches
along the west coast from Milnerton to Elands Bay were sorted into different
groups according to the size and shape of the posterior spiracles. They were
then placed into glass jars containing a pupation medium of clean, damp beach
sand. Their natural food was supplied as far as possible and the jars were covered
with gauze cloth to prevent the adults from escaping. Slides were made of the
genitalia and the drawings were made by means of a camera lucida.
DISCUSSION
Ships from the Far East en route to Europe pass the west coast of South
Africa in the vicinity of Dassen Island at an average distance of about 10 to
13 km from the shore. Ordinary house-flies have been found to travel about
33 km (Oldroyd 1964), and Hindle (1914: 311) even states, ‘After a careful
examination of all our results we can state definitely that flies tend to travel
either directly against or across the wind’. He states further (Hindle 1914: 321),
‘Flies may travel against the wind, being attracted by any odours it may convey
from a source of food’. It is, therefore, possible that blowflies on a passing ship
could have reached the shore and survived long enough to find a suitable
breeding medium.
C. megacephala is a necrophagous species (Patton 1922) with an apparently
long life-span. According to Wijesundara (19575) the mean duration was 57 days
at a room temperature of 24 to 29°C and a relative humidity ranging from
72 to 100 per cent, a condition which is similar to that along our west coast.
The average percentage humidity, recorded by the Department of Transport
in the Langebaan Road area during November to March for the period 1975 to
1977, varied from 60 to 70 per cent. This ability, together with a fairly short
larval life of a little more than 3 to about 5 days (Wijesundara 1957a) prob-
ably contributed to its presence at Ysterfontein. Surface drift could also
account for its presence, as species of the warm-water plankton of the Indian
Ocean have often been found on the beaches north-west of Cape Town. It is
also a well-known fact that the seeds of the legume Mucuna gigantea quadrialata
from East Africa are sometimes washed up on the beach at Lambert’s Bay
(Muir 1932, 1934). Water of the warm Agulhas current mixed with cold Atlantic
DISCOVERY OF CHR YSOMYIA MEGACEPHALA IN SOUTH AFRICA 4]
water is often pushed round the Cape of Good Hope (Isaac 1937), the penetra-
tion being at maximum during the summer and autumn and is ‘aided by the
South East Trade winds’ (Shannon 1966) and may even reach as far north as
32°S (Shannon 1966; Schell 1968). The presence of this surface water around
Dassen Island will inevitably result in the drifting ashore near Ysterfontein of
infested refuse or debris thrown overboard from a ship passing this area during
the late summer, especially trawlers which often sail very close to the shore.
DESCRIPTION OF THE STAGES
IMAGO (Fig. 1A—C)
Metallic greenish with narrow blackish crossbands on the posterior borders
of the abdominal segments, rather similar to C. chloropyga both in size and
appearance, but lacking the JL. marks on the presutural area of the meso-
notum. Genal area and genal hairs of the flies collected were of a definite golden
yellow. Antennal segments reddish, the arista brown. Anterior thoracic spiracle
blackish-brown. (In all the other South African species of Chrysomyia found
in decaying birds along the coast, the spiracles are white or light coloured.)
The silky hairs on the sternopleuron are dark to almost blackish, especially in
the male; in both C. chloropyga and C. albiceps the hairs are pale to almost
white.
The males are easily separated from the females, and from those of other
South African species belonging to this genus, by the sharply demarcated large
upper and smaller lower facets of the compound eyes (Fig. 1C). They are also
easily separated from the males of the other species by the rounded anterior
borders of the head when seen from above (Fig. 1B), the parafrontalia not
protruding (it is protruding in the other South African species).
As in C. chloropyga only two vertical bristles are present in the males
(Fig. 1B-D), but they are much shorter in C. megacephala. In both the above
species the prostigmatic bristles are present, but absent in C. albiceps which, in
addition, has four verticals, both in the males and females. L. sericata, which
also has prostigmatic bristles and two verticals in the case of the males, may
easily be separated from Chrysomyia species by the more strongly developed
acrosticals on the presutural area of the mesonotum, especially in the males.
Genitalia also differ.
In the male genitalia of C. megacephala the cerci and paralobi of the
epandrium (Fig. 2E) differ from those of C. chloropyga (Fig. 2B), especially the
paralobi which have much broader bases. This is easily seen in the mounted
specimens. The phallosome has broad membranal lobi in both C. megacephala
(Fig. 2F-G) and C. chloropyga (Fig. 2C-D), the theca (not visible in the draw-
ings) is small in both, the phallus elongated and sclerotized, the harpes much
longer in C. megacephala than in C. chloropyga and also closer together, and
the vesicae (as in C chloropyga) situated further towards the apex between the
lobi. In L. sericata the harpes (Fig. 2H) are long and display almost the same
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
42
*“S[BOIIOA— A ‘eI[eyUOIeIed— Iq UOT;
oY} Woy P JO peoH “A “oAOqe WOT, P jo prox * “‘Bsddosocjys vidwosdayD “A-C “WwOI 9Y} WOT P Jo peazy *d ‘oAO0ge WOY P Jo prox] ‘gq
*‘pjoydaavsau vidwoskayD ‘D-V *{ ‘314
<
4 fe pd ;
Aa
Kus
hori — baer Si i convrrmnaselllUOe eT ee
— SLA eo
DISCOVERY OF CHRYSOMYIA MEGACEPHALA IN SOUTH AFRICA 43
Fig. 2. Male genitalia.
A-D. Chrysomyia chloropyga. A. Cerci and paralobi (living specimen). B. Cerci and para-
lobi (slide). C. Phallosome (slide). D. Apical part of Phallosome from side.
E-G. Chrysomyia megacephala. E. Cerci and paralobi (slide by Dr Zumpt). F. Phallosome
(slide). G. Apical part of Phallosome from side. c—cercus, hp—harpes, m—membranal
lobus, p—paralobus, Ph—phallus.
H. Lucilia sericata. Apical part of Phallosome from the front.
44 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
pattern as in C. megacephala, although they are further apart when seen from
above and the broad lobi are absent.
LARVA (Fig. 3A—F)
The various larval instars have been described by Patton (1922a, 19225),
Wijesundara (1957), and Zumpt (1965). During the recent surveys only third
instar maggots which were almost inseparable from those of C. chloropyga
were collected.
In specimens that were examined, the dorsal outline of the labial sclerites or
mouth hooks of the cephalopharyngeal skeleton (Fig. 3C) when seen from the
side is widely convex, meeting the superior basal face in a somewhat rounded
Fig. 3.
A-C. Chrysomyia megacephala. A. Full-grown maggot from side. B. Posterior part of maggot
showing the spiracles. C. Cephalo-pharyngeal skeleton.
D-E. Lucilia sericata. D. Full-grown maggot from side. E. Posterior part of maggot showing
the spiracles.
F. Chrysomyia chloropyga. Cephalo-pharyngeal skeleton.
DISCOVERY OF CHRYSOMYIA MEGACEPHALA IN SOUTH AFRICA 45
angle. In C. chloropyga the dorsal surface is more straight and posteriorly even
slightly concave and meets the superior basal face in a somewhat raised and
more acute angle (Fig. 3F); this appeared to be the only difference between
the two species. Zumpt (1965: 90) maintains that the distance between the
posterior peritremes may serve to distinguish the larvae of C. megacephala from
C. chloropyga; however, the few maggots of C. megacephala examined differ
considerably in this character. In the sample made the peritremes are separated
by one-third to four-sevenths of this diameter in C. megacephala and by three-
eighths to five-ninths the diameter in C. chloropyga. Separation of the two species
by means of this characteristic therefore seemed impossible. They are, how-
ever, easily distinguished from the larvae of L. sericata which has closed peri-
tremes (Fig. 3E).
S32 S Ch
= SSR
sys AN y
A x EN
SAN |
ESV
Fig. 4. A, C, E. Puparia from above. B, D, F. Posterior parts of puparia showing the pro-
jections and spiracles.
A-B. Chrysomyia chloropyga. C-D. C. megacephala. E-F. Lucilia sericata.
46 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
PUPARIUM (Figs 4A-F, 5A-C)
Brown to mahogany brown and finely and transversely striate with very
short, brown respiratory horns (Fig. 4C). The posterior projections round the
stigmal plates small to almost obsolete, the ridge bearing the projections not
so well marked as in specimens of C. chloropyga that were examined. Posterior
spiracles only slightly protuberant. Pupae found vary from 8,6 to 9,3 mm in
length. In C. chloropyga the pupae are usually brown after pupation but soon
become dark-brown to almost black, otherwise they are similar to those of
C. megacephala except that the anterior apex is more triangularly shaped
(Fig. 4A) and the posterior spiracles much more protuberant. The posterior
projections are usually better developed and the spinules on the anterior part
of the body also much stronger in C. chloropyga. In L. sericata (Figs 4E-F, 5A)
the transverse striations on the body are very fine and sometimes even obsolete
and the posterior projections usually inconspicuous to very small. The posterior
Fig. 5. Puparia from the side.
A. Lucilia sericata. B. Chrysomyia megacephala. C. C. chloropyga.
DISCOVERY OF CHRYSOMYIA MEGACEPHALA IN SOUTH AFRICA 47
end of the puparia is rounded in this case and the posterior spiracles are flush
with the surface.
BIOLOGY
The life history of this fly is described by Wijesundara (1957a, 1957b) who
gives the mean duration of the whole cycle in Ceylon from egg to adult as
8 days and 12 hours of which 100 hours are occupied by the pupal stage. It was
impossible to determine the larval life from the specimens collected as they
were nearly mature, but the pupal stage lasted four days at a room temperature
of 29°C, the flies emerging long before Lucilia in which case the pupal stage was
7 to 8 days.
According to Zumpt (1965) the larvae may become facultative parasites
in man and animals.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
I wish to express my gratitude to Dr A. J. Hesse, formerly of the South
African Museum, for his advice and encouragement regarding the contents of
this manuscript and to Dr F. Zumpt of the South African Institute for Medical
Research for his comments and for identifying the flies.
I am very grateful to my wife for advice and support and to Miss H. Rae
for typing the manuscript. Special thanks to Dr V. B. Whitehead, of the South
African Museum, for recommendations, and to Mr G. Avery, also of the South
African Museum, for collecting the various birds.
REFERENCES
HINDLE, E. 1914. The flight of the house fly. Proc. Camb. phil. Soc. 17: 310-313.
Isaac, W. E. 1937. South African coastal waters in relation to ocean currents. Geogr! Rev. 27:
651-664.
KURAHASHI, H. 1978. The oriental Fly: Chrysomyia megacephala (Fab.) newly recorded from
Ghana and Senegal, West Africa. Kontyn, Tokyo 46: 432.
Murr, J. 1932. The beach drift of South Africa. J. Bot. Soc. S. Afr. 18: 5-10.
Muir, J. 1934. The correlation of arrival sites of alien seeds with ocean currents. S. Afr.
geogr. J. 17: 13-18.
OLDROYD, H. 1964. The natural history of flies. London: Wiedenfeld and Nicolson.
PATTON, W. S. 1922a. Some notes on Indian Calliphorinae Part III. Chrysomyia megacephala
Fab. (Dux Esch), the common Indian bluebottle whose larvae occasionally cause
cutaneous myiasis in animals and Chrysomyia nigriceps sp. nov., the common bluebottle
of the Nilgiris. Indian J. med. Res. 9: 555—560.
PATTON, W. S. 19226. Some notes on Indian Calliphorinae Part VI. How to recognise the
Indian Myiasis producing flies and their larvae, together with some notes on how to breed
them and study their habits. Indian J. med. Res. 9: 635-653.
SCHELL, I. I. 1968. On the relation between winds off South West Africa and the Benguela
Current and Agulhas Current penetration in the South Atlantic. Dt. hydrogr. Z. 21:
109-117.
SHANNON, L. V. 1966. Hydrology of the South and West coasts of South Africa. Investl Rep.
Div. Sea Fish. S. Afr. 58: 1-62.
WIJESUNDARA, D. P. 1957a. The life history and bionomics of Chrysomyia megacephala (Fab.).
Ceylon J. Sci. (B) 25: 169-185.
WIJESUNDARA, D. P. 19575. On the longevity of the adult of Chrysomyia megacephala (Fab.)
under controlled humidity. Ceylon J. Sci. (B) 25: 187-192.
ZuMPT, F. 1965. Myiasis in Man and animals in the old world. London: Butterworths.
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the International code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb.
nov., syn. nov., etc.
An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name (and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific name must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861:
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
not acceptable.
In describing new Species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.: ;
Holotype
SAM-—A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) . The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
)
e.g. . the Figure depicting C. namacolus .. .’; . in C. namacolus (Fig. 10) .
(b) The ene of prefixed surnames in all languages, hen used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. Du Toit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
“Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
A. J. PRINS
DISCOVERY OF THE ORIENTAL LATRINE FLY
CHRYSOM YIA MAGACEPHALA (FABRICIUS)
ALONG THE SOUTH-WESTERN COAST OF
SOUTH AFRICA
VOLUME 78 PART 6 MAY 1979 ISSN 0303-2515
507.68
|
|
|
ANNALS
OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN >
MUSEUM
CAPE TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 « 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes...’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes...’
‘As described (Smith 1969a, 1969b; Jones 1971)’
‘As described (Haughton & Broom 1927)...’
‘As described (Haughton et a/. 1927)...’
Note: no comma separating name and year
Dagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, b, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list o,
scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BULLOUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P.-H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140.
FiscHer, P.-H., DuvAL, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. gén. 74: 627-634.
Koun, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
Koun, A. J. 19606: Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull. Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4): 1-51.
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 78 Band
May 1979 Mei
Part 6 Deel
CRETACEOUS TRIGONIIDAE
(MOLLUSCA, BIVALVIA) FROM THE
BRENTON FORMATION, KNYSNA
By
MICHAEL R. COOPER
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na beskikbaarheid
van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
1, 2(1-3, 5-8), 3(1-2, 4—5, 8, t.-p.i.), 5(1-3, 5, 7-9),
6(1, t.—p.i.), 711-4), 8, 9(1-2, 7), 10(1-3),
11(1-2, 5, 7, t.—p.i.), 15(4—-5), 24(2), 27, 3101-3), 32(5), 33
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae na die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 908407 72 6
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The Rustica Press, Pty., Ltd., Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
CRETACEOUS TRIGONIIDAE (MOLLUSCA, BIVALVIA)
FROM THE BRENTON FORMATION, KNYSNA
By
MICHAEL R. COOPER
Department of Geology, University of Oxford*
(With 12 figures)
[MS. accepted 22 February 1979]
ABSTRACT
The trigoniid fauna from the Brenton Formation at Knysna is described, and two new
species, Steinmanella kensleyi and Pterotrigonia savagei, are erected. The age of the fauna is
discussed and considered to support a late Valanginian age for the Brenton Formation.
CONTENTS
PAGE
Introduction . : , : . « 49
Geology k ; ; : nom Eel
Systematics . : ; ? a ei
Age of the fauna . j 3 s 163
Summary : : : : 5, OS
Acknowledgement ; : =) 66
References . : ; ; . 66
INTRODUCTION
Strata assigned to the Enon Formation of the Uitenhage Group crop out
as a small outlier at Knysna, resting unconformably upon sandstones of the
Ordovician Table Mountain Group (Fig. 1). Long regarded as Cretaceous,
these sediments were recently assigned a Jurassic age (Dingle & Klinger 1972;
Klinger et al. 1972). More recent information (Beer 1972; Stapleton & Beer
1976; McLachlan et al. 1976), however, would seem to confirm the early
Cretaceous determination.
Fossils were first recorded from the Enon Formation of the Knysna-—
Plettenberg area in 1899 when Schwarz listed an Ammonites sp., Trigonia sp.
and Gervillia sp., but without mentioning a locality. In 1906, Schwarz recorded
a Trigonia sp. from Brentford Farm, Knysna, while Kitchin (1908), in his
extremely important monograph of the Cretaceous invertebrate faunas of the
Uitenhage basin, listed the following species collected by A. W. Rogers in
1905 from Brentford, Knysna: Trigonia holubi? sp. nov. (young individual),
Acanthodiscus sp. and Belemnites sp. In 1909, Rogers recorded the following
invertebrate fossils from Brentford or, as it is now known, Brenton-on-Lake:
Trigonia rogersi Kitchin, Nautilus sp., Ptychomya complicata (Tate) ‘or a shell
like it’, Perna sp., Pentacrinus sp. and Cidaris spines. Schwarz (1915) was the
* Present address: Queen Victoria Museum, Salisbury, Rhodesia.
49
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 78 (6), 1979: 49-67, 12 figs.
50 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
so
(e)
Fig. 1. Locality map, with the outcrop of the
Brenton Formation hatched and arrowed.
1—Table Mountain Sandstone, 2—Enon
conglomerate. After Dingle & Klinger (1972).
first systematically to describe a fauna from these beds when he recorded the new
species Trigonia kitchini (= T. rogersi Rogers non Kitchin), Perna brentonensis
and P. theseni.
In his description of some ammonites from the Sundays River Formation,
Spath (1930) referred the ammonite recorded by Kitchin (1908) to Distoloceras
sp. and the belemnite to Hibolites sp.
Dingle & Klinger (1972) gave the first detailed description of the Brenton
Formation, including measured sections and a review of the older literature,
as well as describing an ostracod assemblage to which Dingle assigned a low
Upper Jurassic age (with strong Callovian affinities). Klinger et al. (1972)
redescribed the ammonite recorded by Kitchin (1908) and Spath (1920),
assigning it to Hybonoticeras aff. hildebrandti (Beyrich). .
More recently, however, detailed studies of the foraminifera (Beer 1972;
Rigassi & Dixon 1972; Stapleton & Beer 1976; McLachlan et al. 1976), ostra-
cods (Stapleton & Beer 1976; McLachlan et al. 1976), nannofossils (Stapleton
& Beer 1976) and palynomorphs (Stapleton & Beer 1976) have all been taken
to indicate a Cretaceous, and more specifically, a Neocomian age.
Although not yet recorded from the Brenton Formation, Megatrigonia
(Megatrigonia) cf. conocardiiformis (Krauss) occurs in sandstones interbedded
in Enon conglomerates at Robberg (Du Toit 1954; Cooper 1974). The latter
deposit, recently formally termed the Robberg Formation (Rigassi & Dixon
1972), is related by Cooper (1974) to the same marine transgression that
deposited the Brenton Formation.
CRETACEOUS TRIGONIIDAE FROM THE BRENTON FORMATION 3)
GEOLOGY
McLachlan et al. (1976) gave the following stratigraphic succession through
the Brenton Formation, from above downwards:
(iv) Unit I —1-2 m of grey, unfossiliferous silty shale.
(iii) Unit IT —0,15-1 m of hard, coarse-grained, conglomeratic sandstone rich
in shell debris.
(ii) Unit WI—About 15 m of unfossiliferous grey mudstone with sandy to
gritty and sometimes pebbly layers.
(i) Unit IV—A highly fossiliferous, soft grey shale yielding fossiliferous cal-
careous nodules. This unit is at least 6 m thick.
According to McLachlan et al. (1976), units III and IV have yielded all
the megafossils recorded by previous authors. However, the present collecting
has shown Jotrigonia cf. vau (Sharpe), Isognomon sp., Pterotrigonia savagei
sp. nov. and probably P. kitchini, together with cidaroid spines, oysters, reptilian
and fossil wood to be present in unit II. Unit IV has yielded abundant Stein-
manella kensleyi sp. nov., I. theseni, I. brentonensis and a ‘Nautilus’ sp., together
with numerous small, undetermined bivalves. The ammonite described by
Klinger et al. (1972) is preserved in a nodule and almost certainly comes from
this unit.
The prefix SAM refers to specimens housed in the collections of the South
African Museum, Cape Town, AM to specimens in the Albany Museum,
Grahamstown, and RO to specimens in the collections of R. Oosthuizen of
Zwartskraal, Prince Albert.
SYSTEMATICS
Family Trigoniidae Lamarck, 1819
Subfamily Megatrigoniinae van Hoepen, 1929
Genus Jotrigonia van Hoepen, 1929
Type species Jotrigonia crassitesta van Hoepen, 1929
Totrigonia cf. vau (Sharpe)
Figs 2-3
Compare
Trigonia vau Sharpe, 1856: 194, pl. 22 (fig. 5). Kitchin, 1908: 110, pl. 6 (figs 1-3).
Material
A single abraded specimen in the South African Museum with recrystallized
test preserved, from unit II.
Description
The specimen is a poorly preserved right valve, but shows the chevrons
on the flanks so typical of this genus. The anterior limb of the chevron is very
narrow and directed obliquely across the flanks, while the posterior limb is
2 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 2. Jotrigonia cf. vau (Sharpe).
Right valve. x1.
broad and thick and directed strongly upwards (dorsally). The umbo is slightly
recurved and situated about one-quarter of the shell length posteriorly. The
marginal and inner carinae are not developed at the growth stages observed,
while the area is ornamented by very faint growth striae.
Discussion
The Brenton example is closest to I. vau (Sharpe) (Fig. 3), and may well
be conspecific; only the poor preservation of the Brenton specimen prevents
the author from uniting them. ‘Trigonia’ dubia Kitchin (Kitchin 1903) from the
Oomia Beds of Kutch, southern India, closely resembles the present form, but
differs in having the anterior limbs of the chevrons parallel to the concentric
growth lines and not oblique as in J. vau.
Iotrigonia stowi (Kitchin) (Fig. 4) from the Sundays River Formation
differs from J. vau in being more produced both posteriorly and anteriorly,
and with a different sculpture pattern on the anterior portion of the flanks.
Other South African species of Jotrigonia are I. crassitesta van Hoepen
(1929: 7, pl. 2 (figs 4-5), pl. 3 (figs 1-2)) (of which I. inconstans van Hoepen is
a probable synonym) and J. haughtoni Rennie (1936: 340, pl. 41 (figs 1-4)),
but none is liable to be confused with the present species.
Fig. 3. Jotrigonia vau (Sharpe). Right valve of SAM-3976.
x1. This is the original of the specimen figured by Kitchin
(1908).
CRETACEOUS TRIGONIIDAE FROM THE BRENTON FORMATION 53
Fig. 4. lotrigonia stowi (Kitchin).
The holotype, after Kitchin (1908). x1.
Subfamily Pterotrigoniinae van Hoepen, 1929
Genus Prerotrigonia van Hoepen, 1929
Type species Prerotrigonia cristata van Hoepen, 1929
Discussion
Nakano (1974) considers the subfamily Pterotrigoniinae to include the
following taxa: Pterotrigonia (Pterotrigonia), P. (Rinetrigonia), Scabrotrigonia,
Acanthotrigonia (Acanthotrigonia) and A. (Metacanthotrigonia). However,
within contemporaneous species populations there are intermediates between
Pterotrigonia and Rinetrigonia and between Acanthotrigonia and Scabrotrigonia.
Moreover, it is frequently difficult to place a species within any one of these
genera/subgenera, and subsequently the author prefers to follow Cox (1969)
in recognizing only P. (Pterotrigonia) and P. (Scabrotrigonia), to which may now
possibly be added P. (Metacanthotrigonia).
Pterotrigonia (Pterotrigonia) etheridgei kitchini (Schwarz)
Fig. 5
Trigonia rogersi Rogers (non Kitchin), 1909: 130.
Trigonia kitchini Schwarz, 1915: 120, pl. 4 (figs 2-4). Pringle, 1960: 89.
non Trigonia kitchini Stoyanow, 1949: 82, pl. 14 (figs 4-10).
Material
The holotype, AM 3884, and a topotype example, SAM-—D3067, are the
only known specimens. Both retain recrystallized test and their preservation
suggests that they may be from unit II at Brenton.
Description
The holotype shell is strongly inflated anteriorly and rostrate posteriorly.
The umbones are strongly incurved and situated very close to the anterior
face of the shell.
54 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 5. Pterotrigonia (Pterotrigonia) etheridgei kitchini (Schwarz). Dorsal, anterior and lateral
views of the holotype, AM 3884. x1.
The flanks are ornamented by prominent ribs which, in the anterior set,
are flexuous and curve forwards so as to terminate along the anterior and
anteroventral commissure. The posterior set is straight, but there is no clear
distinction between the two sets of ribs. Except for a few rather prominent
tubercles at the ventral end of the two ribs terminating along the anteroventral
margin, discrete tubercles are absent.
The area is bordered dorsally by a distinct inner carina and ventrally by
a prominent marginal carina in the early stages, but both these features weaken
with maturity. The area is ornamented only by concentric growth striae. The
escutcheon is broad, concave, lanceolate, probably extending much of the length
CRETACEOUS TRIGONIIDAE FROM THE BRENTON FORMATION 35)
of the dorsal margin of the shell, and is ornamented by irregular, closely spaced,
transverse costellae which are finely serrated and more or less normal to the
dorsal commissure.
Discussion
‘Trigonia’ kitchini closely resembles ‘Trigonia’ etheridgei Lycett (1875:
127, pl. 27 (figs 1-3)) from the lowermost beds of the Atherfield Clay on the
Isle of Wight, and thus of earliest Aptian age. It differs from Lycett’s species
only in having more transverse costellae on the escutcheon, and in having a
few ventral tubercles on only two, not four, ribs. Schwarz’s species is also of
somewhat older age. However, the differences are so slight that the writer has
no hesitation in regarding the two species as conspecific but, until the intra-
specific variations in both populations are known, the slight differences are
regarded as of subspecific value because of the somewhat different ages and the
wide geographic separation of P. etheridgei and P. kitchini.
This species cannot be confused with any other South African form, but
is most closely allied to P. (P.) knighti (Pringle) (1960: 90, pl. 1 (figs 1-3)) from
the Sundays River Formation (late Valanginian). It differs in lacking coarse
tuberculation along the whole length of the flank ribs.
Pterotrigonia savagei sp. nov. differs from P. etheridgei kitchini in being
much less inflated anteriorly, more rostrate posteriorly, and with less strongly
incurved umbones. There are also distinct, discrete tubercles along the ribs
of the anterior set in P. savagei, while the transverse costellae ornamenting the
escutcheon of P. savagei diverge anteriorly.
‘Trigonia’ kitchini Stoyanow (1949) is preoccupied by Schwarz’s name and
consequently requires a new name. The Arizonan species appears to be a
Buchotrigonia closely allied to several other species from the same region and,
until population studies are undertaken to determine the range of intraspecific
variation amongst these forms, it seems unwise to propose a new specific name.
In view of the vast age difference, P. (P.) evansana (Meek) (Jones 1960:
436, pl. 59 (figs 6-7, 12, 15), pl. 60 (figs 1-11)) from the Coniacian to Lower
Campanian of western North America bears a remarkable homoeomorphic
resemblance to the present species (compare especially Jones 1960, pl. 60
(figs 6, 9)).
Pterotrigonia (Pterotrigonia) savagei sp. nov.
Fig. 6
Material
Four fragmentary specimens in the South African Museum, and eight
examples in the collection of R. Oosthuizen. All retain recrystallized test.
Holotype
RO 375 (SAM-PCK 5927) is designated as the holotype, the remaining
examples are paratypes.
56 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 6. Pterotrigonia (Pterotrigonia) savagei sp. nov. A. The holotype RO 375 (SAM-PCK
5927). x1. B. RO 375. x2. C-E. Paratypes in the collection of R. Oosthuizen. C. RO.
495—A (SAM-PCK 5929). D. RO 495-B (SAM-PCK 5930). E. RO 496 (SAM-PCK 5931). x 1.
Type locality
Brenton-on-Lake, Knysna. Unit II.
Ftymology
For Dr N. M. Savage of the University of Oregon, Eugene, whose
enthusiasm and keen interest did much to further the author’s palaeontological
career.
Diagnosis
A species of Pterotrigonia characterized by the weak inflation of the valves,
the prominent inner carina during the early growth stages, the numerous well-
developed flank ribs in which the tuberculate anterior set curves strongly
forwards so as to terminate along the anterior and anteroventral margins of
the shell. The posterior set of flank ribs are almost straight and finely serrated.
Area ornamented only with growth striae and a prominent median longitudinal
furrow. Escutcheon with finely serrated, closely spaced costellae which diverge
anteriorly.
CRETACEOUS TRIGONIIDAE FROM THE BRENTON FORMATION >)//
Description
The shell is weakly inflated anteriorly and strongly produced posteriorly.
The umbones are moderately incurved and are situated a short distance
posteriorly from the gently convex anterior margin. The nepionic stages are not
clearly visible on any of the specimens, although there appear to have been
concentric ribs on the flanks at this stage.
The flanks are ornamented with prominent ribs which are clearly divisible
into an anterior and posterior set. The anterior set are crowded along the
marginal carina (becoming more distantly spaced ventrally), from which they
extend almost straight downwards before curving strongly forwards to terminate
along the anterior and anteroventral margins. The ribs are initially finely
serrated but immediately they start to curve forwards they thicken markedly
and develop distinct tubercles. The posterior ribs are finely serrated throughout
their length.
The area is ornamented only by transverse growth striae, while a deep,
prominent median longitudinal furrow is present at the largest observed size
(the holotype). The escutcheon is narrow, lanceolate, extending virtually the
whole length of the dorsal margin of the shell. It is ornamented with closely
spaced transverse ridges, serrated by the growth lines, which diverge anteriorly
from the dorsal commissure.
Discussion
The present species is closest to P. (P.) rogersi (Kitchin) (Fig. 7) from the
Lower Cretaceous (late Valanginian) of the Uitenhage basin. It differs, however,
Fig. 7. Pterotrigonia (Pterotrigonia) rogersi (Kitchin).
Lateral view of the holotype (SAM-—12954) in the
South African Museum. x1.
58 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
in being less inflated than P. rogersi, with more clearly demarcated anterior
and posterior sets of ribs, while the anterior set curves more strongly forwards
than in the Uitenhage example, and is more densely ribbed at a comparable
growth stage. .
Pterotrigonia jubata van Hoepen (1929: 11, pl. 4 (figs 7-10)) bears a super-
ficial resemblance to P. savagei, but differs in being more strongly inflated
anteriorly, more rostrate posteriorly and much higher, while the costellae
ornamenting the escutcheon diverge posteriorly in Van Hoepen’s species.
Moreover, P. jubata is of much younger age (late Albian) and probably does
not bear separation from the European P. aliformis (Parkinson).
Pterotrigonia savagei also bears a superficial resemblance to Megatrigonia
conocardiiformis (Krauss) (Kitchin 1908: 119, pl. 7 (figs 2-4)), from which it
may be distinguished by its small size, finely tuberculate ribs, prominent inner
carina and ornamented escutcheon.
Subfamily Myophorellinae Kobayashi, 1954
Genus Steinmanella Crickmay, 1930
Type species Trigonia holubi Kitchin, 1908
Discussion
Four subgenera are currently recognized within Crickmay’s genus; these
are S. (Steinmanella), S. (Yeharella), S. (Setotrigonia) and S. (Litschkovitrigonia).
Cox (1969) diagnosed Steinmanella s.s. as follows: ‘Oblong to subtrigonal; area
with strong irregular transverse ridges invading posteroventral part of the flank
in some species; flank costae concentric near umbo, but oblique and tuberculate
on most of the surface where they are either all continuous or become broken
up and irregular anteriorly and ventrally.’
In S. (Yeharella) the carinae and transverse ridges are effaced across the
area, while in S. (Setotrigonia) the flank costae extend on to the area, with a
tendency for the carinae to become obsolete. In S. (Litschkovitrigonia) the
nepionic growth stages are ornamented with V-shaped ribs which extend on to
the area, while the later growth stages are more densely ribbed and with much
weaker transverse ridges across the area. According to Cox (1969), Steinmanella
is a wholly Cretaceous genus, and the Brenton species to be described below
clearly belongs to this genus.
Steinmanella (Steinmanella) kensleyi sp. nov.
Fig. 8
Trigonia holubi? sp. nov. (young individual) Kitchin, 1908: 224.
Material
This species is abundant in the grey clays of unit IV of the Brenton Forma-
tion, but is extremely friable, so much so that of scores of fragmentary valves
collected, only one complete specimen has been obtained. All the material
retains recrystallized test.
59
CRETACEOUS TRIGONIIDAE FROM THE BRENTON FORMATION
5
I.
—PCK 5293
Fragmentary r
A-C
2.219
aS
1S ee
wYUNns
S Cham
soos
0.09
re
aQs > 5
SOLES
+
G7 Go X
(98) apt
reeOnrs on on
LS oe s
(cD) Sat
se _ee
ast BS
—<ao €'s
oO L >
Elo sae
iS)
S) op
fa SIs
3)
fey
oS
s
S
i sp. nov.
. Card
Dorsal view of a paratype
Spots! ad
"S 00 N+
La aN
Yo DO OO
wine sn
e4A SM
SO) 35 O
Slate: ta
8 5 oS
SZQES
Soyo
Seo 3
™ n
BE Oke
D)
Soe ae
Syst 3
Ses
Sac ?
S>8
5) eS 5
w OS gj
ANGECa
esa
° (DV a)
co OD MH
SY
Ou, TO)
Jae; ) sy [ey
60 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Holotype
The original of the specimen figured in Figure 8A—C, in the R. Oosthuizen
Collection, RO 377 (SAM-PCK 5928), is designated as holotype. Paratype and
abundant topotype material is housed in the South African Museum (SAM-—
PCK 5922-5924).
Type locality
Brenton-on-Lake, Knysna. Unit IV.
Etymology
For Dr B. F. Kensley of the Smithsonian Institution, Washington, who
assisted in collecting much of the material.
Diagnosis
A moderately small species of Steinmanella in which the anterior margin
is abruptly truncate, vertical, with terminal umbones, and the posterior broadly
rounded. The thick flank costae are ornamented with coarse tubercles and
curve forwards so as to terminate mostly along the anterior margin of the valve.
Description
Shell moderately small, longer than high, massive, subtrigonal in outline,
with weakly inflated valves. The anterior margin is abrupt, perpendicular, with
weakly incurved terminal umbones.
The nepionic stage of the area is ornamented by prominent costae which
are continuous with those on the flank, but soon break up to form three rows
of tubercles—the ventral row corresponds with the marginal carina, the central
row lies just below (ventral) the median longitudinal furrow and delimits the
dorsal margin of the area, while the dorsal row corresponds with the inner
(escutcheon) carina. Posteriorly, the central and dorsal rows of tubercles
elongate to form prominent, irregular, transverse ridges, between which are
intercalated additional costae. At large sizes, the median longitudinal furrow
is very indistinct and marked only by a slight fold in the ribs crossing the area.
The escutcheon is moderately narrow and long, about two-thirds of the
dorsal shell length, and is ornamented with irregular rows of anteroposteriorly
elongated tubercles of uneven height. These rows of tubercles diverge at a small
angle from the dorsal commissure and posteriorly are seen to be continuous
with the transverse ridges across the area. The ligament pit is lanceolate and
extends for about one-third of the length of the escutcheon.
In the nepionic stages, the flank ornament comprises well-developed,
concentric, nodular costae which weaken considerably on the flattish anterior
face of the valves, and are entirely effaced prior to reaching the anterior com-
missure. With growth, the costae weaken while the tubercles strengthen so as
to dominate the ornament. The flank costae tend to be slightly narrower than
the interspaces separating them, and most of them curve forwards so as to
CRETACEOUS TRIGONIIDAE FROM THE BRENTON FORMATION 61
terminate along the anterior margin of the shell. The flanks are ornamented
with very fine growth striae which cut obliquely across the ribbing.
The teeth are typically trigoniid. The central tooth of the left valve is
very prominent and robust, while the anterior tooth is weakly developed, thin,
lath-like, and is directed almost vertically downwards. The prominent anterior
tooth of the right valve is directed vertically downwards, and is supported on a
thickened ledge of shell. The posterior tooth is weakly developed, lath-like,
and meets the anterior tooth at an angle of about 60°.
Discussion
This species most closely approaches Steinmanella mamillata (Kitchin)
(Fig. 9) from the Oomia Group of Kutch, southern India. Kitchin’s (1903)
species differs from S. kensleyi, however, in having a more quadrate outline,
while most of the flank ribs terminate along the ventral margin of the shell.
This distinction is confirmed by topotype material in the British Museum
(Natural History). The differences are not great, but, in view of the greater age
of the Indian species (Uppermost Tithonian or Berriasian), they are considered
sufficient for specific separation.
The Brenton species is a close homoeomorph of the Aptian ‘Trigonia’
bronni Agassiz, as is indicated by a specimen in the collections of the South
African Museum (D1622) (Fig. 10), from Perte-du-Rh6ne, France. The French
species has, however, a more convex anterior margin, twice as many tubercles
in the marginal carina than there are flank ribs (in S. kensleyi they are almost
equal), a more prominent median longitudinal furrow, and lacks the coarse
tuberculation of the escutcheon seen in S. kensleyi. Moreover, the transverse
Fig. 9. Steinmanella (Steinmanella) mamillata (Kitchin). The holotype
from the uppermost Tithonian or Berriasian of southern India.
After Kitchin (1903). x1.
62 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 10. Myophorella bronni (Agassiz). Left valve of SAM-—D1622,
from the Aptian of Perte-du-Rh6ne, France. x1.
ridges across the area of 7. bronni are far more weakly developed than in the
Brenton species.
Steinmanella neuquensis (Burckhardt) (Fig. 11) also bears a close general
resemblance to S. kensleyi. It differs, however, in lacking the fine concentric
ribbing of the nepionic stages seen in the latter species, and in lacking the
prominent tuberculation of the escutcheon. Furthermore, this Lower Cretaceous
(Berriasian) South American species lacks the rows of tubercles demarcating
the marginal and inner carinae, and the median longitudinal furrow of
Fig. 11. Steinmanella neuquensis (Burckhardt). The holotype
from the Berriasian of Argentina. After Burckhardt (1903).
xO F/a:
CRETACEOUS TRIGONIIDAE FROM THE BRENTON FORMATION 63
S. kensleyi, while Burckhardt’s species also has finer, more prominent transverse
ridges across the area, which extend noticeably on to the flanks.
Steinmanella holubi (Kitchin) (Fig. 12) is a lower Cretaceous (late
Valanginian) species which closely approaches S. kensleyi, but differs in being
much larger, with a more quadrate outline, and in having most of the flank
costae terminating along the ventral margin of the shell. Steinmanella herzogi
(Goldfuss), S. hennigi (Lange) and S. transitoria (Steinmann) are all Neocomian
forms which differ so greatly from the present species as not to warrant
comparison.
Fig. 12. Steinmanella (Steinmanella) holubi (Kitchin). The holotype from the uppermost
Valanginian of south-east Africa. After Kitchin (1908). x1.
AGE OF THE FAUNA
The marine succession at Brenton-on-Lake, Knysna, is of very limited
thickness and unless there is considerable condensation, which has not been
detected, it seems most unlikely that more than one stage is involved.
The ostracod fauna recorded by Dingle (in Dingle & Klinger 1972) came
from unit IV of the Brenton succession and was considered to have strong
64 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Callovian affinities, although the fauna was entirely new and hence such a
determination can be regarded only as tentative. However, McLachlan et al.
(1976) have recently revised the ostracod fauna which, together with the
foraminifera, has been shown to have many species in common with the Sundays
River Formation and is considered, therefore, to be of uppermost Valanginian
age. This determination was supported by the studies of Stapleton & Beer
(1976) who, on the basis of 50 species of palynomorphs, 5 species of calcareous
nannofossil and 12 species of foraminifera, were led to correlate the Brenton
Formation with the upper part of the Sundays River Formation, thereby
suggesting a late Valanginian age. In addition to this, the presence of the
foraminifera Lagena hauteriviana hauteriviana Bartenstein & Brand and Tristix
acutangulus (Reuss) had led Beer (1972) to suggest an Hauterivian age for the
Brenton Formation, whilst the presence of Marginulina constantia (Cushman)
and Citharina cf. cristellarioides (Reuss) were used by Rigassi & Dixon (1972)
to suggest a Cretaceous age for this unit.
Bate (1975) has recently described a Middle Callovian ostracod fauna
from the Mandawa Anticline of Tanzania which supposedly includes two of
the Brenton species, viz. Cytherella knysnaensis Dingle and Cytherelloides
brentonensis Dingle. However, the Tanzanian record of C. brentonensis is based
upon a single specimen which was said to differ from the holotype in lacking
marginal dentition and it was perhaps premature, therefore, to assign it, without
reservation, to Dingle’s species. As regards species of Cytherella, Bate (1975)
considered the carapace outline to be the most diagnostic feature, yet, in the
author’s opinion, C. mandawaensis Bate (1975, pl. 1 (figs 3-9)) is as close to the
holotype of C. knysnaensis as is the example of C. knysnaensis figured by Bate
(1975). Consequently, the writer is inclined to treat the above determinations
with some scepticism.
From within a nodule, presumably from unit IV, came the ammonite
referred by Kitchin (1908) to the Lower Hauterivian genus Acanthodiscus and
by Spath (1930) to the Valanginian-Hauterivian genus Distoloceras. Klinger
et al. (1972), however, assigned this specimen to Hybonoticeras aff. hildebrandti
(Beyrich), for which they assigned a late mid-Kimmeridgian age, a determina-
tion surely influenced by Dingle’s ostracod work.
The trigoniid fauna described herein is a typically Cretaceous assemblage,
with neither Steinmanella nor Pterotrigonia being known prior to the uppermost
Tithonian or Berriasian and, in view of the recent microfaunal evidence, pro-
vides strong support for a late Valanginian age for the Brenton Formation.
This is enhanced by the presence of Jotrigonia cf. vau (Sharpe), a species known
only from the uppermost Valanginian of the Uitenhage basin. Moreover,
Pterotrigonia etheridgei (Lycett) is known only from the Neocomian to Aptian
of southern England and also indicates a Cretaceous age for the Brenton
Formation. It is perhaps also significant that the Robberg Formation, the
deposition of which was related (Cooper 1974) to the same transgression that
deposited the Brenton Formation, has yielded Megatrigonia cf. conocardiiformis
CRETACEOUS TRIGONIIDAE FROM THE BRENTON FORMATION 65
(Krauss) a species also known from the Sundays River Formation, although
in this respect it should be noted that Da Silva (1966) has also recorded this
species from the Jurassic of Mozambique and it is, therefore, long-ranging.
At present, the only problem as regards a late Valanginian age for the
Brenton Formation and direct correlation with the Sundays River Formation
is the determination of the ammonite fragment. This specimen is entirely septate
and represents about one-quarter of a whorl which, according to Klinger et al.
(1972), shows the following features: “The whorl section is slightly depressed,
subpolygonal. Simple primary ribs bear umbilical and large ventrolateral nodes
from which ribs bifurcate or trifurcate and cross the venter with a distinct
concave-adoral arch. An impression of the venter of the previous whorl is
impressed in the dorsum of this fragment and shows a deep, fairly broad
siphonal groove bordered by beaded keels.’
A possibly significant feature of this fragment, not mentioned by Klinger
et al. (1972), is the two subparallel simple ribs at the adoral end of the fragment
which have the appearance of the parabolic ribs which border constrictions in
many species of ammonite. The genus Neohoploceras was introduced by Spath
(1939: 105) for: ‘rather inflated Neocomitids, with deep constrictions and rib-
bundles, starting from umbilical tubercles and bearing lateral tubercles higher
up, also single ribs without tubercles between, and specialized ribs, preceding
the constrictions, and tuberculate each side of the smooth or grooved siphonal
line. The lateral tubercle may disappear on outer whorl. Suture line fairly
simple, with asymmetrical first lateral lobe.’
This generic diagnosis covers almost every feature shown by the Brenton
ammonite fragment and, in view of the fact that Neohoploceras is a characteris-
tic and abundant ammonite in the Upper Valanginian of Madagascar, as well
as its occurrence in the Sundays River Formation, viz. Neohoploceras subanceps
(Tate), together with the microfaunal and trigoniid evidence, the writer con-
siders the determination of Klinger et al. (1972) to be incorrect. This fragment is
best referred to, therefore, as Neohoploceras sp.
It would seem, therefore, that the Brenton and Robberg formations are
further deposits whose deposition can be related to the late Valanginian episode
of eustatic transgression (Cooper 1974, 1977).
SUMMARY
The trigoniid fauna from the Brenton Formation is described and fully
corroborates recent microfaunal evidence for a Cretaceous age for the Brenton
Formation. Although the trigoniids cannot be used precisely to date the deposit,
the presence of Jotrigonia cf. vau (Sharpe) in the Brenton Formation and
Megatrigonia cf. conocardiiformis (Krauss) in the Robberg Formation, the
deposition of which was considered to be coeval with sedimentation of the
Brenton Formation (Cooper 1974), certainly supports the late Valanginian age
suggested by microfaunal evidence. The presence of the Kimmeridgian ammonite
Hybonoticeras is considered to be based upon the misidentification of the late
66 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Valanginian genus Neohoploceras. Two new species, Steinmanella kensleyi
and Pterotrigonia savagei, are described, and the macrofaunal list from the
Brenton Formation now reads:
Steinmanella (Steinmanella) kensleyi sp. nov.
Pterotrigonia etheridgei kitchini (Schwarz)
Pterotrigonia savagei sp. nov.
Totrigonia cf. vau (Sharpe)
Isognomon theseni (Schwarz)
Isognomon brentonensis (Schwarz)
Neohoploceras sp.
Hibolites sp.
‘Nautilus’ sp.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
I am grateful to Dr B. F. Kensley and Mrs J. Hosford for their help in the
field, and to Dr N. J. Morris of the British Museum (Natural History) for
showing me material in that museum and for reading the manuscript. My
special thanks go to Mr R. Oosthuizen of Zwartskraal, Prince Albert, to whose
diligent collecting I owe much of the material described here.
REFERENCES
BaTE, R. H. 1975. Ostracods from Callovian to Tithonian sediments of Tanzania, East Africa.
Bull. Br. Mus. nat. Hist. (Geol.) 26: 163-223.
Beer, E. M. 1972. Note in: Ann. geol. Surv. Pretoria 9: 25.
BURCKHARDT, C. 1903. Beitrage zur Kenntniss der Jura- und Kreideformation der Cordiilere.
Palaeontographica (B) 50: 1-144.
Cooper, M. R. 1974. The Cretaceous stratigraphy of south-central Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus.
66: 81-107.
Cooper, M. R. 1977. Eustacy during the Cretaceous: its implications and importance.
Palaeogeogr. Palaeoclima. Palaeoecol. 22: 1-60.
Cox, L. R. 1969. Family Trigoniidae. In: Moorg, R. C., ed. Treatise on invertebrate paleontology
Part N (1), Mollusca 6, Bivalvia. Lawrence: Geological Society of America, University of
Kansas Press.
DINGLE, R. V. & KLINGER, H. C. 1972. The stratigraphy and ostracod fauna of the Upper
Jurassic sediments from Brenton, in the Knysna outlier, Cape Province. Trans. R. Soc.
S. Afr. 40: 279-298.
Du Torr, A. L. 1954. The geology of South Africa. Edinburgh: Oliver & Boyd.
HOoEPEN, E. C. N. vAN. 1929. Die krytfauna van Soeloeland. I. Trigoniidae. Paleont. Navors.
nas. Mus. Bloemfontein 1: 1-38.
Jones, D. L. 1960. Pelecypods of the genus Prerotrigonia from the west coast of North America.
J. Paleont. 34: 433-439.
Kitcuin, F. L. 1903. The Jurassic fauna of Cutch. The Lamellibranchiata. Genus Trigonia.
Mem. geol. Surv. India Palaeont. indica 9 3(2): 1-122.
KircHIN, F. L. 1908. The invertebrate fauna and palaeontological relationships of the
Uitenhage Series. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 7: 21-225.
KLINGER, H. C., KENNEDY, W. J. & DINGLE, R. V. 1972. A Jurassic ammonite from South
Africa. Neues Jb. Geol. Paldont. Mh. 11: 653-659.
LycetTrT, J. 1872-1879. A monograph of the British fossil trigoniae. Palaeontogr. Soc. [Monogr.):
1-52 (1872); 53-92 (1874); 93-148 (1875); 149-204 (1877); 205-245 (1879).
McLACHLAN, I. R., BRENNER, P. W. & MCMILLAN, I. K. 1976. The stratigraphy and micro-
palaeontology of the Cretaceous Brenton Formation and the PB-A/1 well, near Knysna,
Cape Province. Trans. geol. Soc. S. Afr. 79: 341-370.
CRETACEOUS TRIGONIIDAE FROM THE BRENTON FORMATION 67
NAKANO, M. 1974. Rinetrigonia and its allies. J. Sci. Hiroshima Uniy. (C) 7: 101-111.
PRINGLE, J. A. 1960. A new species of Trigonia from the Sunday’s River Beds of the Uitenhage
Series, Cape Province. Ann. Natal. Mus. 15: 89-92.
RENNIE, J. V. L. 1936. Lower Cretaceous Lamellibranchia from northern Zululand. Ann. S. Afr.
Mus. 31: 277-391.
Ricassi, D. A. & Dixon, G. 1972. Cretaceous of the Cape Province, Republic of South Africa.
Ibadan Univ. Conf. on Afr. Geol. 1970: 513-527.
RoceErs, A. W. 1909. Notes on a journey to Knysna. Rep. geo!. Commn Cape Good Hope
1908: 130-134.
SCHWARZ, E. H. L. 1906. Geological survey of the coastal plateau in the division of George,
Knysna, Uniondale and Humansdorp. Rep. geol. Commn Cape Good Hope 1905: 47-94.
SCHWARZ, E. H. L. 1915. New Cretaceous fossils from Brenton, Knysna. Rec. Albany Mus.
3: 120-126.
SHARPE, D. 1856. Description of fossils from the secondary rocks of Sundays River and
Zwartkops River, South Africa. Trans. geol. Soc. Lond. (2) 7: 193-215.
SILvA, G. H. DA. 1966. Sobre a ocorréncia do Juradssico marinho no norte de Mocambique.
Revta Estud. ger. Univ. Mogambique 3(2): 61-68.
SPATH, L. F. 1930. On the Cephalopoda of the Uitenhage Beds. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 28: 131-157.
SpaTH, L. F. 1939. The Cephalopoda of the Neocomian Belemnite Beds of the Salt Range.
Mem. geol. Surv. India Palaeont. indica n.s. 25: 1-154.
STAPLETON, R. P. & BEER, E. M. 1976. ‘Upper Jurassic’ sediments of South Africa. Nature,
Lond. 264: 49.
SToyANow, A. 1949. Lower Cretaceous stratigraphy in southeastern Arizona. Mem. geol.
Soc. Am. 38: 1-169.
YEHARA, S. 1923. Cretaceous Trigoniae from southwestern Japan. Jap. J. Geol. Geogr. 2: 59-84.
yal
7
= ~
A
- a ee r
7
F ?
= =. f ‘ ‘
, g ie : oa >
a \ = 7 Ss ;
: ;
x ? ~ y =
~ ) ‘
~ ) | |
2 a ; :
. E i
R y |
i a b : .
on ; .
| | = re 2
-. ? |
a . #
R
4 i
x Ls ic
{ v {
4 y te . ,
| A=
4 it
; S
> y ;
: : : ; i ic
Le \
: =a c
. \ ;
ee { \ ‘ f :
. 5
; ~ 1 Up
1 } i
L \ : |
~. ; |
t i o ‘ :
Y \ Ve : |
5 : {
: i j : |
= ie \
( E
st ;
; er
‘ C : |
| ¢ \
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the Jnternational code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb.
nov., syn. nov., etc.
An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name (and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspeeies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific name must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
not acceptable.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-—A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
9
e.g. “... the Figure depicting C. namacolus ...’; ‘. . . in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...’
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. Du Toit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
MICHAEL R. COOPER
CRETACEOUS TRIGONIIDAE
(MOLLUSCA, BIVALVIA) FROM THE
BRENTON FORMATION, KNYSNA
VOLUME 78 PART 7 JUNE 1979 ISSN 0303-2515
OF THE SOUTH AFRIC
~~ MUSEUM
|CAPE TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
N
. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order) i
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively. .
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 x 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes...’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes...’
“As described (Smith 1969a, 1969b; Jones 1971)’
‘As described (Haughton & Broom 1927)...’
‘As described (Haughton et al. 1927)...’
Note: no comma separating name and year
Dagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, b, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list o,
scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BULLOUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P.-H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140.
FiscHER, P.-H., DuvAL, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. gén. 74: 627-634.
Koun, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
Konn, A. J. 19606. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull. Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4): 1-51.
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 78 Band
June 1979 Junie
Part 1 Deel
INDICATOR COPEPODS AND OIL YIELD
FLUCTUATIONS IN PELAGIC FISH IN
THE BENGUELA CURRENT SYSTEM
By
A. H. B. DE DECKER
&
D. J. COETZEE
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
beskikbaarheid van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
1, 2(1-3, 5-8), 3(1-2, 4-5, 8, t.—p.i.), 5(1-3, 5, 7-9),
6(1, t-—p.i.), 70-4), 8, 91-2, 7), 10(1-3),
11(1-2, 5, 7, t.—p.i.), 15(4-5), 24(2), 27, 31(1-3), 32(5), 33
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 908407 73 4
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The Rustica Press, Pty., Ltd., Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
INDICATOR COPEPODS AND OIL YIELD FLUCTUATIONS IN
PELAGIC FISH IN THE BENGUELA CURRENT SYSTEM
By
A. H. B. DE DECKER
South African Museum, Cape Town
&
D. J. COETZEE
Sea Fisheries Branch, Walvis Bay*
(With 4 figures)
[MS. accepted 7 March 1979]
ABSTRACT
The decline in the catches of the South West African pelagic fishery is paralleled by a
declining trend in the oil yield (i.e. the ratio, fish oil to fish meal). Depressions in the oil yield
show inverse correlation with the southward extension over the South West African shelf of a
warm, saline water mass carrying the neritic copepods Temora turbinata and Euterpina
acutifrons. In the region of north-west deflection of the Benguela waters, T. turbinata can be
carried seaward over distances exceeding 250 nautical miles off shore.
Although fragmentary, the environmental data point towards a strong influence of abiotic
factors on the abundance and condition of the available pelagic stocks.
CONTENTS
PAGE
Introduction#, & 2: . sal. /e “ « . 69
Material and methods MOY a rae ORs gale Val
Results
Temora turbinata as an indicator . . . 73
Oil yield fluctuations ca Aad tS
Conclusions as 9s bale kw es 8s OTS
LNA TOISAS 5 6 «6 o o o o 0 Lhe
RCLERCINICES Ae ese ae oe Ain Se Bea eS
INTRODUCTION
Based initially on the pilchard (Sardinops ocellata), the South West African
pelagic fishery once ranked among the most important in the world. From the
middle sixties onward, a few short-lived depressions were experienced and from
1970, after the anchovy (Engraulis capensis) had become a regular component
of the catches (up to 27% in 1970, increasing to 41% in 1973, according to
official statistics), the total pelagic landings at Walvis Bay showed as spectacular
a decline as their rise had been in the early sixties. Such a succession of events is
not unique in the history of fisheries.
* Present address: Dept. of Nature and Environmental Conservation of the Cape Province,
Cape Town.
69
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 78 (7), 1979: 69-79, 4 figs.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
70
"eOLIpY YINOG punosle vyoulqan] * J, JO UOTNGIAYSIpP :josUT
‘BOLIFW ISOM YINOG pue YINOG puNoIe HJHUIGIN] DAOWAT, JO IOUSIINIIO PUL SiO}VM sdBJINS JO WeIdeIp S/L ‘I ‘3d
(°%,) ALINIIWS J9V4SYNS
08'Se 09'SE O7'SE Oz'SE O0’SE os‘7€
000 Ol <
000 01-0001
0001-001
TNWH Yad SON
(9) BUNLVYAdN'L SO 39V4UNS
Oo”V IN3SaV
~
N
@ 1Ssvoo 1SV3 VS
WV YANVE SVHINOV
7L6\ ®
6S6| @
VOId¥sV MS
-82
INDICATOR COPEPODS AND FISH OIL FLUCTUATIONS 1
The first serious alarm shook the local fisheries circles in 1963, when the oil
yield of the pilchard missed its annual winter peak and stayed at minimum levels
throughout the fishing season. Apart from this low oil yield, survey data revealed
greatly reduced gonad development, virtual absence of eggs in the usual
spawning grounds and abnormally high water temperatures and salinities. The
plankton showed notable differences in density distribution and species
composition from what Untertiberbacher (1964) had observed during a year-
round monthly survey of the same area in 1961-2. Stander & De Decker (1969)
attempted an interpretation of these physical and biological changes, using in
the latter category what little is known about the biogeography of copepods in
the south-eastern Atlantic.
Subsequent plankton studies in South West African waters indicated a
correlation between the distribution and abundance of the copepod Temora
turbinata and the annual oil yield cycle of the pelagic fish landings at Walvis Bay.
These findings are the subject of the present report.
Temora turbinata is a neritic epipelagic copepod of tropical and subtropical
waters of the Atlantic and Indo-Pacific where it is widespread and often
predominant inshore. It has a wide salinity and temperature tolerance, but does
not appear to subsist at temperatures below 15°C (Bradford 1977). Its distri-
bution along the Atlantic coast of Africa is well documented through the work
of a number of planktologists whose respective survey localities are spaced
along the entire western coastline of the continent. An account of most of these
contributions has been published by Thiriot (1977).
It appears to be present nearly everywhere in inshore waters, except where
upwelling prevails, especially along the south-western and north-western coast.
The contrast between the copepod assemblages in a habitat where T. turbinata
predominates and one where it is excluded through upwelling is well illustrated
by the examples of the Angolan neritic facies (Neto & De Paiva 1966) and the
Walvis Bay area (Untertiberbacher 1964). In the former, 73% of the planktonic
copepods consisted of Oithona nana (37%), T. turbinata (22%) and Euterpina
acutifrons (14%), whereas the latter had 48% composed of Centropages
brachiatus (18%), Calanoides carinatus (15°%) and Metridia lucens (15%).
The full range of salinity and temperature records for 7. turbinata around
southern Africa is presented in Figure 1, based on the authors’ unpublished
data. The copepod adapts to the complete range of salinities prevailing in the
various neritic environments encountered around the subcontinent, in tempera-
tures between 14° and 28°C. Higher temperatures were not recorded in the
neritic zone and it is, therefore, questionable whether 28°C is the upper limit
for T. turbinata.
MATERIAL AND METHODS
The data discussed here were obtained from the following sources.
1. Survey Area A (see Fig. 2: April 1959). Nine quarterly surveys of a
240 nautical mile wide belt stretching from the Cape of Good Hope to Kunene
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
P
‘(PL6I-S96I 1OJ OBVIOAR = UT] poop)
soyojes o13ejod UI SuOT}eNIONY pysié [IO “| ‘VJOUIGAnN] DAOWAT, JO DUIIINIDO PUL SOUT[BYOSI 9deJING “YW “7 “BI
7L6) 1IUdv \EL6l HOUVN\ ZZ61 TYdV LZ6L AVW €961 AVW 6S61 IlddV
AVE
SIAIWM
Pi cele
c /
7'SE - --
‘Se ——
9'SE
(ey IVS
IN} | @@e@
YSAIY
JNSNNM
INDICATOR COPEPODS AND FISH OIL FLUCTUATIONS 73
River mouth (17°S) in January, April, July, October 1959, and January 1960,
but to Ambrose Bay only (21°S) in April, July, October 1960, and January 1961.
On these cruises, plankton was collected by means of a N70 net hauled vertically
from 100 m to the surface—or bottom to surface where the sounding was less
than 100 m. A total of 168 samples was examined.
2. Survey Area B (see Fig. 2: May 1963). Nineteen monthly surveys of a
90 nautical mile wide coastal belt between 21° and 24°S. The samples collected
between April 1961 and March 1962 were studied by Untertiberbacher (1964)
and those from December 1962 to August 1963 by Stander & De Decker (1969).
The method of collection was the same as in Area A, and a total of 475 samples
was examined.
3. Survey Area C (see Fig. 2: April 1972 to April 1974). A coastal belt of
50-70 nautical miles wide surveyed in the early seventies at irregular intervals
and with varying station grids. The part stretching northward from Walvis Bay
was examined for zooplankton taken on the following cruises: January, April,
June, August and October 1972, and April 1974. A WP2 net was hauled
vertically from a maximum depth of 200 m to the surface. A total of 108 samples
was examined.
4. Statistics on pelagic fish landings at Walvis Bay and monthly oil yields
from 1950 to 1977, except during closed seasons.
Areas A and C were surveyed by the Division of Sea Fisheries (later styled
Sea Fisheries Branch, Cape Town), and Area B by the Marine Research
Laboratory, Walvis Bay.
The plankton samples were examined under a stereomicroscope for
identification and counting of species. Bulky samples were split to a convenient
aliquot by means of a Folsom splitter, but the whole sample was then scanned
for species not represented in the aliquot. The samples examined are housed in
the plankton collections of the Sea Fisheries Branch, Cape Town.
Salinities in Areas A and B were estimated by the Knudsen method, in
Area C by inductive salinometer, using water samples obtained with a Nansen
Petterson bottle, which also provided the temperature readings.
RESULTS
Temora turbinata as an indicator
Although present in less than 5 per cent of the samples, 7. turbinata drew
the attention of both the present authors independently by its way of appearing
suddenly in large numbers in a few samples, each time in the north of the
Survey areas. There is an indication of seasonality (January to May) which
agrees reasonably with the peak of abundance of this species in Angolan waters
(Neto & De Paiva 1966) and with the season of greatest activity of the Angola
Current (Kuderski 1967).
74 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
The occurrences can be summarized as follows:
Jan. 59 Apr. ’59 May ’63 Apr.’72 Apr. ’74
Samples with 7. turbinata 5 13 l 2 15
Total of specimens ae 32 853 | 6 174 400
N-limit of survey e 17°S 17°S DS) 19°S 20°S
S-limit of 7. turbinata .. 19°S DS) 21°S 20°S 228
The numbers of specimens caught on each occasion cannot be compared,
due to the great differences in size and station spacing of the survey areas.
Salinity sections soon revealed that 7. turbinata follows the 35,4%, isohaline
as it moves south and eastward into areas normally occupied by less saline
waters typical of the Benguela system (Stander 1964). The waters with salinities
in excess of 35,4%, have a T/S diagram agreeing closely with that of the inshore
station on the Angolan shelf off Lucira (13°51’S) monitored daily over a 4-year
period (Berrit & Dias 1977) and fall within the range found in Baia Farta
(12°36’S) by Neto & De Paiva (1966) and further south by Nimann (1953).
A plankton feature emphasizing the connection between Angolan shelf
water and the saline water spreading 7. turbinata over the whole width of the
survey areas, is the presence of another dominant copepod of the Angolan shelf,
Euterpina acutifrons. This species was unusually abundant in April 1974, when
a total of 12 300 specimens was found at 14 stations distributed in a similar
pattern to the 174 400 T. turbinata collected during that month. (Note: incidental
attention only was given to E. acutifrons in the present context, because the
likelihood of escapement of this small animal through the 200 ~m meshes
introduces an unknown bias in the catches. The Oithonas in our samples were
not identified to species, therefore the presence or absence of Oithona nana, the
most common copepod in Angola, has not been established.)
During the extensive surveys of January and April 1959, 7. turbinata was
found scattered offshore as far as the most distant stations, i.e. over 200 nautical
miles beyond the shelf edge (Fig. 2). Very few instances could be found in
literature where this neritic organism occurred at significant distances beyond
the shelf. One is in the region of Dakar, where the Canaries Current curves
away from the continent, with concomitant coastal upwelling: here Khromov
(1973) found T. turbinata spread as far as 150 nautical miles offshore on one
occasion. Another is in the Tasman Sea, where Bradford (1977) found it in large
numbers in a sample taken 555 km (300 nautical miles) from the Australian
coast in the path of a zonal jet originating from the East Australian Current.
In a third example (from the authors’ unpublished data), T. turbinata hugs the
east coast of South Africa to East London, then fans out over the Agulhas Bank
before spreading into the open Atlantic to about 35°S, 10°E (i.e. 360 nautical
miles west of the Cape of Good Hope) but also follows the southward branch
of the Agulhas Current as far as 43°S (i.e. 600 nautical miles due south of the
Cape, staying all the way in salinities exceeding 35,45%, and temperatures over
20°C (Fig. 1: inset).
INDICATOR COPEPODS AND FISH OIL FLUCTUATIONS
12 13 14
Cape Cross
1 — 500 =| 5000 = 15000 Via > 60000
500 = 1500 15000 = 30000
1500 — 5000 GE 30000 - 60000
Fig. 3. Distribution of Temora turbinata (numbers/net haul) during April 1974.
15
76 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM |
The obvious indicator quality of T. turbinata may prove of practical value
to physical and fisheries oceanographers in their attempts at interpreting the
dynamics of the zone of interaction between the westward-curving Benguela
Current and the water masses confronting it (Elizarov 1967; Kuderski 1967;
Kornilova 1967; Moroshkin et al. 1970; Filippov & Kolesnikov 1971).
Oil Yield Fluctuations
In spite of an unfortunate lack of continuity and uniformity in environ-
mental monitoring of the South West African waters, especially during the
critical years immediately before and during the decline of the pelagic fishery,
the fragmentary data available show a parallelism between the environmental
events and the vicissitudes of the pelagic stocks.
Arguing that the oil content of a fish gives a good indication of its physio-
logical condition, Schiilein (1976) has presented a diagram of the monthly oil
yields of the pelagic fish landed at Walvis Bay between 1961 and 1974, later
expanded to 1950-77 (pers. comm.). The oil yield is given as the ratio fish oil/
fish meal (w/w), and plotted against the background of the average monthly oil
yield for the period 1965-74. Excerpts from this diagram are used in Figure 2 to
illustrate the correlation between the position of the isohalines, the presence/
absence of 7. turbinata and the oil yield in a number of cases.
During the oil yield depression of 1963 (Stander & De Decker 1969),
already mentioned in the introduction, the height of the anomaly was charac-
terized by a strong haline front (35,4-35,6%,) lying just inside the northern limit
of the survey area in about 21°S. This front stood nearly vertically throughout
the upper 50 m, separating a core of 20°C from Benguela water of 15°C and less.
One single specimen of T. turbinata was found to the north of the front and over-
looked in the discussion by Stander & De Decker, for obvious reasons. The
174 400 Temora found south of 20°S in April 1974 at 15 stations were a more
obtrusive element (Figs 2-3), which caused us to compile all available records
on T. turbinata in South West African waters and on thermohaline conditions
in the area north of the latitude of Walvis Bay, regardless of the availability of
concomitant plankton data.
During that April 1974 survey, the 35,4%, isohaline reached as far south as
22°S, with that of 35,6%, following in 21°20’S—no frontal condition by local
standards. Two months earlier, however, in February, a strong front had
suddenly appeared between 19°10’ and 19°30’S, bundling the isohalines from
35,4 to 35,9%,, the 35,4%, isohaline reaching the shore in 20°S. In March the
off-shore front had progressed southward to 23°S over nearly the whole width
of the survey area, reaching the coast in 22°S. At the northern limit of the
survey, Cape Frio (18°S), the near-shore salinity was 35,7%,. No plankton
samples were available from February or March and our April samples were
taken during the receding phase of the saline intrusion. The oil yield in 1974 was
nearly as catastrophic as in 1963.
1971 and 1972 were on the lean side as far as oil yield is concerned. No
INDICATOR COPEPODS AND FISH OIL FLUCTUATIONS Ti
-—Om
E
OO ES —————— ee
20
40
6S61 Ilu¥dV Syo4it
S 61
T. turbinata were found in the two cruises of
1971 —May and August. In May the inner shelf
was reached by the isohalines 35,4%, in 21°S,
35,5% in 19°S and 35,6%, in 18°S. In August
salinities in excess of 35,4%, were confined to
the latitude of about 17°S. In 1972, when
plankton was collected on five cruises between
January and October, T. turbinata was found
only in April in very small numbers at two off-
shore stations. In April the 35,4%, isohaline did
not advance far beyond 20°S and in August a
front involving the isohalines 35,5 to 35,9%,
stood offshore between 20° and 21°S, the
35,4%, isohaline reaching the shore in 21°S.
1973 stands out as the last year with a good
oil yield. No plankton samples were available,
but salinities in excess of 35,4%, did not affect
Wl6l WUdY $02
S WZ
y ie ee
-—— 75 MILES ——+
the inner shelf significantly further south than Fig. 4. Vertical sections of
19°S. This situation closely resembles the con- salinity for April 1959 and
April 1974.
ditions prevailing in April 1959, i.e. a year with
a good oil yield, although 7. turbinata was
present in significant numbers over a large area in the north (Fig. 2) but did not
extend over the shelf beyond 19°S. The vertical sections in Figure 4 illustrate the
difference in near-shore haline structure between a favourable year (1959) and
an unfavourable one (1974).
78 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
The disastrous year 1974 was followed by three more years with minimal
oil yield resembling that of 1963. Unfortunately, neither hydrological nor
planktological data were available to the authors for that period.
CONCLUSIONS
To sum up, it appears that the yearly oil cycle of the available pelagic
stocks in the South West African fishing ground correlates inversely with the
volume and southward advance over the inner shelf of a water mass with salinities
in excess of 35,4%,, which is related to, or identical with, the Angola Current.
This water is marked by the presence of the copepod Jemora turbinata—at least
during the first half of the year.
According to Schiilein’s above-mentioned oil yield diagram for the period
1950-77, 13 consecutive years (1950-62) exceeded the 1965-74 oil yield average,
with the only exception of 1957 which was slightly depressed. Then came the
1963 debacle followed by a spectacular upsurge in 1964, when an all-time record
yield was reached. The subsequent 13-year period was marked by a steady
decline, interrupted by peak years in 1968-70 and 1973, and ending with the
4 consecutive years of minimum yield mentioned above.
This downward trend of the oil yield (which cannot be explained to its full
extent by the advent of the less oil-rich anchovy) is paralleled by the dramatic
decline of the pelagic catches mentioned in the introduction. To look for a
reason for this parallelism falls beyond the scope of the present communication.
It is often difficult to establish to what extent the decline of a fishery is due to
(over)fishing or to environmental change. In the present instance, however, it
seems clear that the environment has played a primary role in the decline, its
effects being aggravated by an exploitation policy that did not take the environ-
mental stress into account.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The help of Miss E. L. McArdell in the preparation of the illustrations is
gratefully acknowledged.
REFERENCES
BerRIT, G. R. & Dias, C. A. 1977. Hydroclimatologie des régions cétiéres de I’Angola,
Description des variations saisonniéres 4 Lobito et Lucira. Cah. ORSTROM, Océanogr.
15 (2): 181-196.
BRADFORD, J. M. 1977. Distribution of the pelagic copepod Temora turbinata in New Zealand
coastal waters, and possible trans-Tasman population continuity. N.Z. J] mar. freshw. Res.
11: 131-144.
EvizAroyv, A. A. 1967. Some results of oceanic research in fisheries areas off South West
Africa. Oceanology 7: 344-347.
Fitippoy, E. A. & KOLEsNIKoV, G. I. 1971 (Origin of southward components in the Benguela
Current system). Trudy AtlantNIRO 33: 42-49.
KuHromoy, N. S. 1973 (Distributional features of some dominant copepod species in zones
where the northern subtropical circulation of the Atlantic comes in contact with the
coasts). In: Bonitation of the World Ocean 4: 81-112 (Trudy VNIRO, 84).
KorRNILOVA, G. M. 1967 (Characteristics of the plankton of the fishing grounds of the Eastern
Atlantic in the spring of 1961). Mater. Konfer. Result. okeanol. Issled. Atlant. Okeane,
AtlantNIRO: 158-171.
INDICATOR COPEPODS AND FISH OIL FLUCTUATIONS 79
KUDERSKU, S. K. 1967. (Hydrology of the shelf waters off the South West African coast and its
influence on the distribution and behaviour of certain commercial fish). Mater. Konfer.
Result. okeanol. Issled. Atlant. Okeane, AtlantNIRO: 199-209.
MoROSHKIN, K. V., BUBNov, V. A. & BULATov, R. P. 1970. Water circulation in the Eastern
South Atlantic. Oceanology 10: 27-37.
NETO, T. S. & Paiva, I. DE. 1966. Ciclo anual do zooplancton colhido na Baia Farta em 1960.
Notas mimeogr. Cent. Biol. aquat. trop. 2: 1-62.
NUMANN, W. 1953. Campanhas em Angola. Estudos de quimica e fisica do meio marinho.
Trab. Miss. Biol. marit. 1: 33-66.
SCHULEIN, F. H. 1976. The relationship between recruitment and oil yields from pelagic fish.
Paper presented at the First Interdisciplinary Conference on Marine and Freshwater
Research in Southern Africa, Port Elizabeth, 5-10 July 1976. Mimeographed, 15 pp.
STANDER, G. H. 1964. The Benguela Current off South West Africa. Invest] Rep. mar. Res.
Lab. S.W.Afr. 12: 1-43.
STANDER, G. H. & DE Decker, A. H. B. 1969. Some physical and biological aspects of an
oceanographic anomaly off South West Africa in 1963. Invest] Rep. Div. Sea Fish.
Cape Town 81: 1-46.
TuirRIoT, A. 1977. Peuplements zooplanctoniques dans les régions de remontée d’eau le long
du littoral atlantique africain. Docum. sci. Centre Rech. océanogr. Abidjan 8: 1-72.
UNTERUBERBACHER, H. K. 1964. Zooplankton studies in the waters off Walvis Bay with special
reference to the Copepoda. Invest] Rep. mar. Res. Lab. S.W.Afr. 11: 1-42.
| slleribesaieiinast taser ndeeranetaglaeaalines
ee
a
Fo
uv
——
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the /nternational code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, €.g. gen. NOV., Sp. Nov., comb.
nov., syn. nov., etc.
‘An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name (and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a suvsravent user of
a scientific name must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed i in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
a 14-15A
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, : 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, nese: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.., :
Leda bicuspidata;> Nickles, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
not acceptable.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-—A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) . The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
9
e.g. *... the Figure depicting C. namacolus ...’; ‘...in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...’
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. Du Toit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary —
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
A. H. B. DE DECKER
&
D. J. COETZEE
INDICATOR COPEPODS AND OIL YIELD
FLUCTUATIONS IN PELAGIC FISH IN
THE BENGUELA CURRENT SYSTEM
VOLUME 78 PART 8 JUNE 1979
OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN
“MUSEUM
CAPE TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations. ;
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 « 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes...’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes...’
‘As described (Smith 1969a, 1969b; Jones 1971)’
‘As described (Haughton & Broom 1927)...’
‘As described (Haughton ef al. 1927)...’
Note: no comma separating name and year
Dagination indicated by colon, nct p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, b, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list o,
Scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BULLOUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P.—H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140.
FiscHER, P.-H., DuvAL, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. gén. 74: 627-634.
Konn, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
Konn, A. J. 19606. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull. Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4): 1-51.
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 78 Band
June 1979 Junie
Part 8 Deel
NEW SECTIONS IN THE VARSWATER
FORMATION (NEOGENE) OF LANGEBAAN ROAD,
SOUTH-WESTERN CAPE, SOUTH AFRICA
By
R. V. DINGLE
A. R. LORD
&
Q. B. HENDEY
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town 8000
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
beskikbaarheid van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad 8000
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
1, 2(1-3, 5-8), 3(1-2, 4-5, 8, t.-p.i.), 51-3, 5, 7-9),
6(1, t.—p.i.), 711-4), 8, 91-2, 7), 10(1-3),
11(1-2, 5, 7, t—p.i.), 15(4-5), 24(2), 27, 31(1-3), 32(5), 33
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 908407 75 0
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The Rustica Press, Pty., Ltd., Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
NEW SECTIONS IN THE VARSWATER FORMATION (NEOGENE)
OF LANGEBAAN ROAD, SOUTH-WESTERN CAPE, SOUTH AFRICA
By
R. V. DINGLE
Department of Geology, University of Cape Town
A. R. LoRD
Department of Geology, University College, London
&
Q. B. HENDEY
South African Museum, Cape Town
(With 6 figures and 1 table)
LMS. accepted 8 March 1979]
ABSTRACT
Recent excavations in the phosphate mine at Varswater Quarry, Langebaan Road, have
exposed horizons in the late Miocene/early Pliocene Varswater Formation higher than any
previously recorded. These sections are measured and their lithologies described. They consist
of approximately 6 m of interbedded phosphatic sands and phosphate rock, with a non-
phosphatic sand layer near the top. The whole sequence is unconformably overlain by
Quaternary sands and soils. Although the phosphate rock layers are shown to be laterally
impersistent, they locally reach thicknesses of up to 2 m, and represent the most impressive
phosphate rock units so far recorded from the Neogene rocks of the western Cape. Previous
definitions of the Varswater Formation and the supposedly underlying ‘Saldanha Formation’
are reconsidered, and the lithostratigraphic type sections of the latter at Hoedjiespunt are
remeasured. It is concluded that the original definition of the Saldanha Formation, as a
lithostratigraphic unit distinct from the Varswater Formation, cannot be demonstrated with
present data, and that the use of the term ‘Saldanha Formation’ be discontinued.
CONTENTS
PAGE
Introduction . . : : : : ' p : . : OD
The sedimentary sequence exposed in the New Varswater Quarry 83
Pleistocene. ; : : : : ; : 3 ; SESS
Latest Miocene/early Pliocene . : ; : . : =e LOO
Upper Varswater Formation , : ‘ ; : oS
Lower Varswater Formation : f : F : . 88
Discussion. : A : : : : é : ; : . 89
Acknowledgements ‘ : : : : : : ‘ : eu?
References : ; F : : : 2 : 2 j : OZ
81
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 78 (8), 1979: 81-92, 6 figs, 1 table.
82 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
INTRODUCTION
The Neogene deposits of the south-western Cape rest on Precambrian
rocks and are most noteworthy for the occurrence of authigenic phosphate rock
and pelletal phosphate sand, as well as for an almost uniquely rich vertebrate
fauna. Both phosphates and vertebrate fossils are most common in the Saldanha—
Langebaan area (Fig. 1), but the Neogene sediments of this region still lack a
precise stratigraphy, despite numerous publications dating from Du Toit (1917)
onwards. The most commonly used sequence at present is that described by
Tankard (1974, 1975a), who divided the succession into two formations with
type sections at Hoedjiespunt (Saldanha Formation) and the New Varswater
Quarry at Langebaan Road (Varswater Formation). These formations have
been provisionally dated by Tankard (1974, 1975a) as Miocene and Pliocene
respectively.
St Helena
@ Vredenburg
@ New
Varswater Quarry 33°S
Saldanha
Hopefield
18°E
Fig. 1. Location of New Varswater Quarry and outcrops at
Hoedjiespunt. FQ—Fishing Quay, B—Bomgat.
a
NEW SECTIONS IN THE VARSWATER FORMATION 83
The Saldanha Formation is poorly exposed and even the stratotype (Fig. 3
here; Tankard 1975a, fig. 2) at Bomgat, Hoedjiespunt, is ambiguous, consisting
of bedded phosphate rock resting on granite and overlain by phosphatic
sediment containing rounded boulders and cobbles of granite with Early
Quaternary shell sediments above. The upper phosphatic horizon appears to be
reworked, although no large phosphate fragments occur in it or in the Quaternary
sediments. Neither upper nor lower boundaries of the Saldanha Formation can
be recognized in a continuous sedimentary sequence and there is no evidence
as to age other than stratigraphic position between a Precambrian granite and
Quaternary sediments. On the opposite, northern side of Hoedjiespunt behind
the ‘Sea Harvest’ factory a thin, irregular, discontinuous phosphatic horizon
can be recognized between Quaternary sediments and granite, with thin
phosphatic veins up to 2 m long infilling joints in the granite (Fig. 3). In the
New Varswater Quarry, Tankard (1975a: 260) records the Saldanha Formation
as consisting of 1-1,5 m of phosphatic, often conglomeratic, sandstone resting
on a soft, silty clay and with the Varswater Formation resting on top with slight
angular unconformity. All offshore occurrences of phosphatic rock were
included within the Saldanha Formation (Tankard 1975a: 262).
The Varswater Formation is well exposed at the New Varswater Quarry,
Langebaan Road, as a result of mining operations for phosphate (Fig. 2).
Pelletal phosphate sands with interbedded phosphate rock bands overlie
fluviatile and estuarine clays, sands and carbonaceous sediments and these
deposits contain one of the richest late Tertiary vertebrate faunas in the world
(see for example Hendey 1976). This sequence, which is of latest Miocene and/or
early Pliocene age (Hendey 19785), is overlain unconformably by Quaternary
aeolian sands and calcretes. The sections revealed by many years of commercial
activity have not been accurately recorded and the complex facies relationships
of the sediments are inadequately understood. Recent cessation of mining makes
publication of some record a matter of urgency as the quarry exposure can only
deteriorate. When Tankard (1974) discussed the Varswater Formation, using
this quarry as stratotype, the sequence we now record was obviously not
available to him, in particular the extensive development of phosphate rock was
not apparent.
THE SEDIMENTARY SEQUENCE EXPOSED IN THE
NEW VARSWATER QUARRY
Here notes based on field observations are given to supplement Figures 3
and 4 which show details of the succession. Note that the terminology is
generalized and has no genetic implications; the term ‘phosphate rock’ is used
here for a lithified, phosphate-rich sediment and ‘phosphate sands’ for
unconsolidated or compacted sands with phosphate grains or pellets. No
distinction is drawn between the Hoedjiespunt ‘microsphorite’, in Tankard’s
(1975a) nomenclature, and the phosphate rocks in the New Varswater Quarry
which are lithified phosphate sands.
84
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
900
Metres
Fig. 2. Aerial photograph of the New Varswater Quarry showing location of numbered exposures in Figures 3 and 4.
NEW SECTIONS IN THE VARSWATER FORMATION 85
PLEISTOCENE
Layers A—-C. Bedded calcretes (Layers A, C) separated by a dark-brown
soi! (Layer B).
Layer D. Thick greenish or olive, well-sorted, calcareous quartz sand;
strongly cross-bedded in lower 2,5 m while upper 2,9 m contains numerous
calcite-filled tubes up to 10 cm diameter.
Layer E. Soft, well-sorted, light reddish-brown ‘soil’; contains numerous
terrestrial gastropods. The junction of Layers D and E is conformable and
grades over a short interval (2-5 cm). The lower boundary of Layer E, the local
base of the Quaternary, is strongly unconformable on the Varswater Formation
and is an erosional surface with numerous small swallow holes. Layer E is
discontinuous and varies greatly in thickness.
The Pleistocene succession as a whole is penetrated by numerous long
calcite veins which run from the calcretes at the top down into the underlying
Varswater Formation. The veining is associated with a late stage of calcite
diagenesis, which has also left numerous delicate lace-like structures in the soft
sediments of Layers D and E and is the source of the bulk of the calcite matrix
in Layer A of the Varswater Formation.
LATEST MIOCENE/ EARLY PLIOCENE
For convenience the Varswater Formation is divided into an upper,
phosphatic part (= Pelletal Phosphorite Member of Tankard (1974) and others)
and a lower, essentially non-phosphatic part (= Quartzose Sand Member,
Gravel Member (Hendey 1976), and beds below (Tankard 1975)). The Upper
Varswater Formation contains pelletal phosphate throughout, whereas the
Lower Varswater Formation is phosphate-free apart from the Gravel Member
which consists of a phosphatic gravel and sandstone.
Upper Varswater Formation
Layer A. Phosphate-rich horizon, typically with a massive, discontinuous,
basal phosphate rock unit with ‘nodules’ usually 10-30 cm across. This layer is
not reworked. The upper, main part of Layer A consists of a mixture of thinly
bedded iron-stained phosphate rock and thinly bedded porcellanous calcrete
with a matrix of porous calcareous material which was introduced during the
Quaternary via the veins referred to above. The porcellanous calcrete appears to
be secondary and the product of weathering prior to, or during deposition of
Quaternary Layer E, i.e. it is also a Quaternary feature.
Layer B. A white, greenish-white or yellowish quartz sand, locally sub-
divided by a thin, impersistent layer of small, highly irregular nodules of
quartz-rich black ‘phosphate’. Immediately beneath the basal phosphatic rock
of Layer A, the white sands of Layer B are highly ferruginous and mottled
orange or orange-brown. Beneath the median black ‘phosphate’ layer the sands
(i.e. top horizon seen at Locality 2) are more yellow in colour and contain small
86 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
New Varswater Quarry, Langebaan Road
calcrete
phosphate rock
pelletal phosphate sand (rich/poor)
non-phosphatic sand
clays, silts, peats, sands
bone accumulation
bivalves QL quarry level
(latest Mioceneyearly Pliocene)
Pleistocene
‘Saldanha Fm. measured
VARSWATER FM.
granite
5
fishing quay
Hoedjiespunt
Fig. 3. Measured sections in the New Varswater Quarry, Langebaan Road. Location of
numbered exposures is shown on Figure 2. Insert shows exposures in the Hoedjiespunt area
of Saldanha Bay—note the occurrence of phosphate-rich veins in the upper part of the granite
in the fishing quay exposures. The Bomgat sequence is the stratotype for Tankard’s ‘Saldanha
Formation’. Vertical scales in metres.
NEW SECTIONS IN THE VARSWATER FORMATION 87
quantities of pelletal phosphate. The sands of Layer B are fairly compacted and,
especially in the upper half, contain greenish ?clay-rich clasts. The base of
Layer B is iron-stained an orange colour, and locally develops hard nodules.
Layer C. A compacted, reddish-brown, fairly well-sorted sand (medium
sand size) of pelletal phosphate and quartz, with occasional vertebrate fossils.
Several phosphate rock units are developed, some of which can be traced as
continuous layers for + 300 m, but most are laterally discontinuous and
many vary in thickness from a few centimetres to over a metre within distances
of 3-4 m. Individual phosphate rocks have a high quartz content and have
clearly developed in situ by progressive lithification of the pelletal phosphate
sand. The rock units are distinctly bedded and lower surfaces of bedding planes
are typically wrinkled and nodose. No evidence of penecontemporaneous
erosion of upper surfaces of phosphate rock bands was observed.
Layer D. Yellowish or white friable sand with a relatively low pelletal
phosphate content. This layer locally contains very abundant, sometimes well-
preserved vertebrate remains which, from field relationships, appear to be
concentrated in two river channels. At one locality (Locality 5) a 0,9 m thick
lens of phosphate rock is developed immediately below the junction of Layers C
and D and vertebrate remains are concentrated on the upper surface and are
banked in a channel against the western edge of this lens (Fig. 4). From field
relationships which no longer exist, Hendey (1976) observed that Layer D
grades laterally into a complex of sands, clays and carbonaceous silts (D2)
me ee LS
He bone
0 X
accumulation 0
Fig. 4. Sketches of exposures showing distribution of phosphate rock units (shown black) in
the upper part of the New Varswater Quarry.
A. A composite section along the north-western wall of the quarry. Numbers are localities in
Figure 2. X marks position of the section shown in Figure 4B which is approximately
normal to the plane of the sketch.
B. Detail of exposure in unit C,. This is located at site 6 in Figure 2.
Scales in metres.
88 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
(Fig. 5) which he interpreted as intertidal flat, marsh and flood plain sediments.
The upper part of Layer D is typically a deep yellowish colour (iron-stained ?)
and locally shows an erosional contact with Layer C.
Lower Varswater Formation
Layer E. Only the uppermost part of facies E (Fig. 3) can now be clearly
observed. This is a fine-grained soft white quartz sand (E1). Field relationships,
previously observable in the quarry, suggested to Hendey (1976) the situation
shown schematically in Figure 4 (El to E3). The presence of a river channel (E4)
is inferred.
Layer F. Locally visible in the quarry in dumps from excavations and one
undisturbed exposure, and consists of a rounded cobble gravel of brown
phosphatic rock with marine invertebrates, sharks’ teeth and other vertebrate
SW NE
Pleistocene
A-C
Varswater Fm.
(phosphatic)
upper
phosphatic)
BAL
MYN/\
RS
ae
ee -—
Ss -—
7
= fu
\
\
~
m
i
s (o)
= ¢€
Lh > a
o ©
<= STILLS PRP OIDE SES MRR SF
5 3 ©
“OW 3 G
$52 clays, peats, sands & silts
OS =
MS ats SSS Se = a
Fig. 5. Schematic relationship of the various facies in the New Varswater Quarry, not to scale.
The lower part (units E-G) is taken approximately along a north-west/south-east traverse, and
the existence of the river channel E, is inferred. Numbers 1, 2, and 3 portray the successive
northerly shift in the inferred river channel up the sequence.
A-—C— phosphatic sands and phosphate rock.
D,—phosphatic sands, D,—peats and clays, D,;—river channel sands with accumulation
of vertebrate fossils, D,—earlier position of river channel.
E,—quartzose sands, E,—peats and clays, E;—intertidal clays, E,—inferred earliest
position of river channel.
F—phosphate rock, locally brecciated and reworked.
G—various clays, peats, sands and silts not exposed in Quarry (from boreholes quoted by
Tankard 19755).
NEW SECTIONS IN THE VARSWATER FORMATION 89
remains. According to Birch (1977: 227) this is the top of a locally brecciated and
waterworn phosphatic sandstone unit. Beneath Layer F Tankard (1975),
fig. 4.1) has recorded a further c. 20 m of sands and clays, none of which is
presently visible.
Although many of the field and age relationships are not always clear, the
schematic arrangement (Fig. 5) of two river channels overlying the quartz sand
of Layer E is supported by the vertebrate fossils, which demonstrate an
evolutionary sequence from Layer E to Unit D4 to Unit D3. This relationship
can be accounted for by postulating a shift of the river course northwards with
time, i.e. D3 is younger than D4, and both are younger than E.
DISCUSSION
The measured sections described here extend the stratotype section of the
upper part of Varswater Formation of Hendey (1974) upwards to include a
thick sequence of phosphate sands and rock. A composite sequence for the
Varswater Formation based on the authors’ sections, previous field observations
(Q.B.H.) and borehole data (Tankard 19755) is shown in Figure 6 and Table 1.
The essential features are: an upper sequence of phosphate-rich sands and
phosphate rock and their lateral equivalents (clays, sands and carbonaceous
sediments), and a lower sequence of essentially non-phosphatic sediments
(clays, sands and carbonaceous sediments) which is subdivided by an eroded
and brecciated phosphate rock.
It is obvious that the phosphate rock layers in the upper part of the
succession have formed by in situ lithification of the pelletal phosphate sands
and that the only proven allochthonous phosphate sediment in this sequence is
the Gravel Member. We see no evidence to support the claim that the pelletal
phosphate is allochthonous, although the penecontemporaneous lithification of
the rock layers (as indicated by the bone banks against the lee of a phosphate
rock lens; Fig. 3, Locality 5) means that hard phosphate would have been
available for erosion and reworking. From field observations, and the age of the
vertebrate faunas, it is clear, therefore, that the phosphate rock units in the
Varswater Formation as seen in the New Varswater Quarry were not formed
contemporaneously, i.e. the formation of the phosphate rocks in Layer C
post-dates the vertebrates in the Layer C, whereas the phosphate rock in Layer D
pre-dates the vertebrate remains in the abutting river channel, and Layer F was
formed before Layer E was deposited.
Our observations necessitate some modification of Tankard’s (1974, 1975a)
subdivision of the Neogene sediments of the Saldanha—Langebaan area into two
formations. In the first place, it is not possible to correlate the stratotype of the
Saldanha Formation with any horizon in the sequence in the New Varswater
Quarry, and a Miocene age for the phosphatic rocks in the Hoedjiespunt and
‘Sea Harvest’ factory exposures has not been demonstrated. In addition,
palynological determinations in the peat samples in lithological units E, and G
Suggest to Coetzee (1978 and pers. comm.) an age not older than Early Miocene
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
90
ANAOOITd
a
uolewWIO, eyuepleg = “Wy Teg
939 SAID AIS SHUCID
JOQUIDJ| [OAPI
JOquIs|
‘Tes pod Ieseg
(o1eydsoyd-uou
Aj[erjyu9sso)
JOquis|] JOARID YOvog
wy
JOVEMSIC A
JOQUIOJA
pueg 9s0z}1eNndO
[@AIO}UL OUT,
(§ Be) Joquoyyl
s10ydsoyd [¥12][9d
[eAJOVUT OUT,
pues |[erAnyy JOMO'T
:
(oneydsoyd)
TOquis||
‘wy
NOILVWaOd AALVMSUVA
NOILVNYOA YALVMSAUVA
o}10ydsoug
ee cas
18)]19d JOJCMSIVA
(N b¢) JoquIsyy
sysoydsoyd [219] [9d Jedd
Vv
Areuroyengdy Areusoyend) Areusoyengd
(PSLOI “vL6I) Preyuey, (08161) SopueHy soded sty],
‘(OSL6L “pL6l) preyuR], pue (08/6) AopusfH JO osoy} YIM poredwioo Joded yuasoid Jo souonbes s1ydeisye.Ns
| Iavy,
<
>
re)
N
$
-j
to
ms
hy
©
a
=
a
©
Zz
ANAOO!MId ATAVA / ANAOOIN LSALVT
NEW SECTIONS IN THE VARSWATER FORMATION 91
plant invertebrate vertebrate
fossils fossils fossils
no
not not not evidence
recorded recorded recorded of age
not not
recorded recorded
latest
abundant : Miocene
or early
Pliocene
pollen rare to
abundant abundant
(E2) (E1,E2)
not
recorded
Formation
-
a
dl
o
3
wn
re
G3
>
no
Ilen evidence
po not not
gbundart recorded recorded of age
in peats
Fig. 6. Composite geological column for the New Varswater Quarry succession, and a
summary of the vertebrate fossil occurrences.
for the Lower Varswater Formation, which is consistent with a late Miocene/
early Pliocene age for the Upper Varswater Formation vertebrate faunas
(Hendey 19785). It may be noted that to the west of the New Varswater Quarry
granite basement is overlain by a sequence of clays and sands from which
phosphatic rock layers are absent below the main ore body (Visser & Schoch
1973, fig. 6). Secondly, it is apparent from Tankard’s (1975a) publication that
the Saldanha Formation has been erected as a convenience to accommodate all
phosphate rock-bearing horizons in the western Cape (for instance, all the
offshore phosphatic rocks are placed in the Saldanha Formation because they
are phosphatic rocks; 1975a: 262). Such a scheme is clearly no longer viable
now that it has been shown that thick phosphate rock units occur in the upper
part of the Varswater Formation. This does not mean that Miocene phosphatic
rocks do not occur offshore, as Siesser (1978) has demonstrated that they do,
but it does mean that the relationship between the onshore Miocene (Saldanha
Formation) and latest Miocene/early Pliocene (Varswater Formation) sediments
as suggested by Tankard (1974, 1975a) cannot yet be proven.
92 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
We are indebted to Chemfos Ltd for access to the New Varswater Quarry
and to the South African Navy for permission to visit Hoedjiespunt. Research
support from the Council for Scientific and Industrial Research (R.V.D. and
Q.B.H.) and the British Petroleum Company Ltd (A.R.L.) is gratefully
acknowledged. Dr John Rogers and Mr D. Salmon of the Geological Survey of
South Africa are thanked for assistance and discussion in the field. We are
indebted to the South African Air Force for providing us with the aerial
photographs of the New Varswater Quarry.
REFERENCES
Bircu, G. F. 1977. Phosphorites from the Saldanha Bay region. Trans. R. Soc. S. Afr. 42 (3/4):
223-240.
CoeETZEE, J. A. 1978. Climatic and biological changes in south-western Africa during the late
Cainozoic. Palaeoecology of Africa 10.
Du Torr, A. L. 1917. Report on the phosphates of Saldanha Bay. Mem. geol. Surv. S. Afr.
10: 1-38.
HENDEY, Q. B. 1974. The late Cenozoic Carnivora of the south-western Cape Province.
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 63: 1-369.
HENDEY, Q. B. 1976. The Pliocene fossil occurrences in ‘E’ Quarry, Langebaanweg, South
Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 69: 215-247.
HENDEY, Q. B. 1978a. The age of the fossils from Baard’s Quarry, Langebaanweg, South
Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 75: 1-24.
HENDEY, Q. B. 19785. Late Tertiary Hyaenidae from Langebaanweg, South Africa, and their
relevance to the phylogeny of the family. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 76: 265-297.
SIESSER, W. G. 1978. Age of phosphorites on the South African continental margin. Mar.
Geol. 26: M17—M28.
TANKARD, A. J. T. 1974. Varswater Formation of the Langebaanweg—Saldanha Bay area,
Cape Province. Trans. geol. Soc. S. Afr. 77: 265-283.
TANKARD, A. J. T. 1975a. The Marine Neogene Saldanha Formation. Trans. geol. Soc. S. Afr.
78: 257-264.
TANKARD, A. J. T. 19756. The Late Cenozoic History and Palaeoenvironments of the coastal
margin of the south-western Cape Province, South Africa. Unpublished Ph.D. thesis,
Rhodes University.
VIssER, H. N. & ScHocu, A. E. 1973. The Geology and Mineral Resources of the Saldanha Bay
area. Mem. geol. Surv. S. Afr. 63: 1-150.
\
a=)
oy
ei
. = { Wy
s
Se s
A i
ue =
Be) a
; 2 bes
\ 1
i =
5
i
F oe ae
.
2 2
My
i
rt
| {
;
‘ :
: D en
P it
ia 2 ;
‘qv
r
(
1 Fi y 4 =
: 3
oy
7 7 ip
2
Z
7
i) . -
) at i
> ” =
a Z f
™ i a
i} , ea jes i
| 2
: “ Fe
) ae )
aA ac t {
[ — e ,
| ; = } a %
Tee
i f = s
~ - - . ?
: th > a) 8)
' Ww y) 0
1 a we = = = ai
i =
} = =
i i oh
if ; Ss
i
©
i =
} ; j =
nd TE Vs
ah J a
‘ | a a
[= rok ~
& ;
x x rs
. = i
1
— =
5
+I
) : > 33 :
fy > 2 -
+ y -
a - =
n ;
L a
\ :
- f
2 ee
A. ¥ ‘
= ue
~ a
it
— = N
a
q
;
ee '
te
\\
z f Z ;
= ‘
3 & a
r
i \ me
be a /
ma = is
~
i
f ig =
= ba ‘
x j
<
i
: ‘
¥ e a
u 7
%
= aed
~~ ¥ e
, ? -
Lat os f
~
fi =)
=i i
‘s in]
y
i : h j Kone ha
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the /nternational code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb.
nov., syn. nov., etc.
An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name (and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific name must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
)
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
- Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50. |
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: i, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: Lat 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861:
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 63, fig. 301; 1955: 110, Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
* comma separates author’s name and year
semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
not acceptable.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-—A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
9
e.g. “... the Figure depicting C. namacolus ...’; ‘. .. in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...’
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. Du Toit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
R. V. DINGLE
A. R. LORD
&
Q. B. HENDEY
NEW SECTIONS IN THE VARSWATER
FORMATION (NEOGENE) OF LANGEBAAN ROAD,
SOUTH-WESTERN CAPE, SOUTH AFRICA
OF THE SOUTH AFRIC
—— MUSEU
KUM
CAPE TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 x 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes...’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes .
“As described (Smith 1969a, 19695; nae ey
“As described (Haughton & Broom Se
‘As described (Haughton et al. 1927).
Note: no comma separating name and: year
Dagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, b, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list oa,
scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BULLOUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P. —H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140.
FiscHerR, P.-H., DuvAL, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. gen. 74: 627-634.
Konn, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
KOHN, A. J. 19606. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull. Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4): 1-51.
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 78 Band
June 1979 Junie
Part 9 # Deel
Oy, . ¢
S S
Alig, : ahs
VID" No Bf
A NEW SPECIES OF DEEP-WATER PALINURID
LOBSTER (CRUSTACEA, DECAPODA, PALINURIDAE)
FROM THE EAST COAST OF SOUTHERN AFRICA
By
Por. BERRY
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
beskikbaarheid van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad
OUT OF PRINT, / UIT DRUK
nance Sy 79), CLD, 5 tea, SL, 5, 7).
6(1, t.-p.i.), 701-3), 8, 9(1-2), 10(1),
INGD, 5, 7, isos)), QAO, D7, HAD, 28
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 908407 74 2
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The Rustica Press, Pty., Ltd., Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
OO
A NEW SPECIES OF DEEP-WATER PALINURID LOBSTER
(CRUSTACEA, DECAPODA, PALINURIDAE) FROM THE
EAST COAST OF SOUTHERN AFRICA
By
P. F. BERRY
Oceanographic Research Institute, Durban
(With 3 figures and 1 table)
[MS. accepted 20 March 1979]
ABSTRACT
Palinustus unicornutus sp. nov. is described. Of the three previously known species it is
morphologically most similar to Palinustus truncatus A. Milne Edwards (1880) from the Lesser
Antilles in that it possesses a distinct median spine or rostrum on the anterior margin of the
carapace instead of the submedian arrangements of the other species. Palinustus mossambicus
Barnard (1926) was originally recorded from only slightly further north on the east coast of
southern African (Mozambique), but there appears to be an error in the locality cited.
CONTENTS
PAGE
Introduction . : ; ; : = 293
Systematic Section : i ; 42938
Discussion : : ; ‘ f 7 OF
Acknowledgements : ’ : 5
References : : F : 5 . 99
INTRODUCTION
The genus Palinustus comprises the following three species: Palinustus
truncatus A. Milne-Edwards (1880) from Cariacou, Lesser Antilles, Palinustus
mossambicus Barnard (1926) from Mozambique, south-western India and the
Sulu Sea and Palinustus waguensis Kubo (1963) from Japan. Recently two adult
female specimens were obtained from deep water off the east coast of southern
Africa and named Palinustus unicornutus sp. nov. This alludes to the distinctive
median spine or rostrum on the anterior margin of the carapace.
SYSTEMATIC SECTION
Palinustus unicornutus sp. nov.
(Figs 1-2)
Material available
Holotype: SAM-—-A15880, in the South African Museum, Cape Town.
Ovigerous 9; c.1. 48 mm, t.1. 142 mm. Captured in a lobster pot, September
1976, due east of Boteleur Point, Natal (approximately 26°57’S 32°58’E).
Depth 390 m.
93
Ann. §. Afr. Mus. 78 (9), 1979: 93-100, 3 figs, 1 table.
=
=)
Q
N
=)
=
Z
<
iS)
(a4
fa
<
an
=
=)
e)
N
jaa)
x
ln!
fy
e)
WN
4
<
Z
Zz
<
tus sp. nov. Dorsal view of holotype. Scale = 20 mm.
lnustus unicornu
Fig. 1. Pal
A NEW SPECIES OF DEEP-WATER PALINURID LOBSTER 95
Paratype: SAM-A15881, in the South African Museum, Cape Town.
1 9; c.l. 44 mm, t.1. 134 mm. Captured in a lobster pot, January 1977 off
Park Rynie, Natal (approximately 30°19’S 30°56’E). Depth 305 m.
Other specimens examined
Palinustus truncatus; holotype from Cariacou; Museum of Comparative
Zoology, Harvard University. Palinustus mossambicus; holotype from Mozam-
bique; South African Museum (SAM-A10684). Palinustus sp. incomplete
specimen (carapace only) from the Sulu Sea; Western Australian Museum
(WAM 1-77).
Description of holotype
The supra-orbital processes are truncate distally with irregularly crenulated
margins. The inner margins each bear a single minute spine. Arising from the
outer margin is a single, large, forward-directed spine. Behind each process is a
row of four spines which extends posteriorly to the cervical groove. The frontal
margin of the carapace is distinctly convex and smooth except for a single strong
median spine or rostrum. The dorsal precervical carapace bears numerous
irregularly scattered spinules and four submedian pairs of larger spines
increasing in size and diverging posteriorly. Laterally in the precervical region
there is a series of three strong spines round the margin of the orbit. The upper-
most of these forms the first in a row of three prominent spines which extends
posteriorly along the lateral surface of the carapace. The cervical groove is only
distinct laterally. The postcervical dorsal carapace bears numerous scattered
spinules and a fine covering of setae. There is a converging series of larger
submedian spines which tend to be paired anteriorly and to become smaller and
more irregularly arranged posteriorly. The spines on the dorsolateral margins
of the postcervical carapace are tuberculate.
The eyes are large with constricted peduncles and reniform corneas.
The first abdominal segment has a rounded lateral process on each side
which overlaps the posterior margin of the carapace. There is an uninterrupted
transverse groove and an indication of a median carina on the posterior margin.
Segments 2—5 have an uninterrupted anterior transverse groove and a posterior
groove interrupted medially by a flattened, median carina. The posterior
margins of segments 4 and 5 show slight crenulations. The pleura of segments
3-6 each bear two strong spurs, the anterior one being larger and slightly
hooked. The sixth segment has a median elevated area with an asymmetrical
pair of small posteriorly-directed submedian spines. Towards the anterolateral
margins of the segment are elevations with two groups of three small posteriorly-
directed spines. The posterior margin of the sixth segment bears numerous
minute, irregular spines and four large ones.
The telson is elongate, rectangular and about twice as long as wide. The
calcified portion bears two lateral spines and three posteromedial spines, one of
which is distinctly smaller than the others. Anteriorly there is a transverse row
of four strong posteriorly-directed spines.
“WU OZ = 9[8Og ‘odAJOTOY JO MOIA [eIO}eT “AOU “ds snjnusoolun snjsnuyog “7 “Bi
=
12)
sa)
N
=)
=)
Z
<
12)
:
a
=)
O
N
ca}
a0)
HX
om
oe)
N
4
Z
<
A NEW SPECIES OF DEEP-WATER PALINURID LOBSTER 97
The antennular plate is smooth with well-developed lateral ridges on which
the stridulating organs slide. The antennules are very long and slender, the basal
segment being approximately equal to the carapace length, the second
0,25 x c.l. and the third 0,5 x c.l. The flagella are short. The antennal
peduncles bear numerous strong, forward-directed spines. The flagella are
incomplete but are stout and probably were not longer than about 3 x the
carapace length. They are armed with numerous short spines and are strongly
setose.
Pereiopods 1-4 and maxilliped 3 all have longitudinal rows of spines and
conspicuous, long, stiff setae, particularly distally. The fifth pereiopod is more
slender than the others, bears few spines or setae and is chelate.
The anterior three thoracic sterna each bear a pair of submedian spines;
the fourth bears a single median spine and the fifth lacks spines. The posterior
margin of the fifth segment bears six posteriorly-directed spinules.
The first abdominal segment bears a pair of slender, uniramous pleopods
and a pair of minute submedian tubercles. In segments 2—5 the pleopods are
biramous; on segment 2 both exopods and endopods are expanded, but the
endopods are slightly smaller. In segments 3—5 only the exopods are expanded,
the endopods are narrow, setose and modified as egg-carrying appendices.
The ventral margins of segments 2—5 are without spines while segment 6 has
one low median tubercle, one pair of low submedian tubercles and several other
indistinct tubercles.
The eggs are numerous and small (0,55 mm diameter) similar to the genus
Panulirus.
The overall colour of the carapace is pale pinkish-orange with some spines
dark-red. The colour of the abdomen is basically dark-orange on the elevated
areas and white in the grooves. The calcified portion of the telson and uropods
is pinkish-orange with the spines white. The uncalcified portions are pale
pinkish-orange. The legs and antennae have alternating bands of orange and
white. The antennules are uniformly pale orange. The yolk of the egg is yellow.
Description of paratype
The frontal margin of the carapace is similar to that of the holotype except
that the single, minute spinule on the inner margins of each supra-orbital process
is absent. The first pair of submedian postcervical spines is set wider apart than
the following pair, whereas in the holotype they are equidistant. In all other
respects the paratype closely resembles the holotype.
DISCUSSION
All three species of Palinustus described so far are very similar and have
been separated largely on the basis of differences in spination on the anterior
margin of the carapace and on the epistome (see Table 1 and Fig. 3).
P. unicornutus is closest to P. truncatus in possessing an enlarged median spine
on the anterior margin of the carapace and in the similar number and arrange-
98 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
POO Oe
Nira a C\ sunt!
rr! 7 i
D
Fig. 3. Sketches of the frontal margins of the carapace of: A. Palinustus mossambicus from
Mozambique. B. P. mossambicus from the Sulu Sea. C. Unidentified Western Australian
Museum specimen from the Sulu Sea. D. P. mossambicus from south-western India (after
George & George 1965). E. P. waguensis (after Kubo 1963). F. P. truncatus (after Gruvel 1911).
G. P. unicornutus.
ments of spines or tubercles on the anteromedian edge of the epistome. However,
the distinctly convex, smooth anterior margin of the carapace of P. unicornutus
is in marked contrast to the straight, irregularly spined margin of P. truncatus.
Barnard’s single juvenile of P. mossambicus has a simple arrangement of
two submedian spines on a smooth anterior margin of the carapace differing
notably from the irregular arrangement of four to five spines present in the
specimens assigned to P. mossambicus from the Sulu Sea by Holthuis (1946),
and the six regularly arranged spines in the specimen assigned to this species
from south-western India (George & George 1965). It must be pointed out that
the exact locality where Barnard’s specimen originated is not known as the
position he gives, 25°S 33°10’E (Barnard 1926), is incorrect, being on land.
The present specimens of P. unicornutus were taken off the Natal coast
during a brief but intensive period of deep-water experimental trap fishing by
commercial vessels on rocky substrate.
The specimen in the Western Australian Museum collection which is
incomplete, consisting only of the anterior portion of the carapace, was obtained
from the Sulu Sea. However, it differs from Holthuis’s specimens from the
Sulu Sea in having a more distinct pair of enlarged submedian spines on the
slightly convex anterior margin of the carapace.
A NEW SPECIES OF DEEP-WATER PALINURID LOBSTER 99
TABLE |
Differences in spination of the anterior margin of the carapace and of the epistome in Palinustus.
Sa Anterior margin of carapace Epistome
P. truncatus Straight; numerous irregular 5 tubercles on anteromedian
holotype submedian spines; 1 enlarged edge; large spine on antero-
(Cariacou) median spine. lateral corners.
Numerous minute spinules
on anteromedian edge, small
spine on anterolateral corners.
Straight: smooth except for
1 pair of large submedian
spines.
Barnard’s
P. mossambicus
(Mozambique)
Holthuis’s
P. mossambicus
(Sulu Sea)
Straight; 4-5 submedian As in Barnard’s specimen.
spines of different sizes.
Unknown (specimen
damaged).
Slightly convex; 1 large sub-
median pair of spines; 4 other
small irregularly arranged sub-
median spines.
Western Australian
Museum specimen
(Sulu Sea)
Convex; 6 submedian spines As in Barnard’s specimen.
of approximately equal size.
George & George’s
P. mossambicus
(South-western
India)
Straight; bifurcate spine on 3 tubercles on anteromedian
right side; 2 spines on left side; edge; no spines on antero-
no median spine. lateral corners.
P. waguensis
(Kubo 1963)
(Japan)
5 (holotype) to 7 (paratype)
spines on anteromedian edge;
small spines on anterolateral
corners.
P. unicornutus Distinctly convex; smooth;
sp. nov. 1 enlarged median spine.
(Natal)
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
I wish to thank Dr R. W. George for his criticism of the manuscript.
The holotype of Palinustus truncatus was lent by the Museum of
Comparative Zoology, Harvard University, the holotype of P. mossambicus by
the South African Museum, Cape Town, and the unidentified specimen from
the Sulu Sea by the Western Australian Museum.
REFERENCES
BARNARD, K. H. 1926. Report on a collection of Crustacea from Portuguese East Africa.
Trans. R. Soc. S. Afr. 13: 126-127.
GEORGE, M. J. & GeEoORGE, K. C. 1965. Palinustus mossambicus Barnard (Palinuridae:
Decapoda), a rare spiny lobster from Indian waters. J. mar. biol. Ass. India 7: 463-465.
GRvuVEL, A. 1911. Contribution a l’étude génerale systématique et économique des Palinuridae.
Annls Inst. océanogr. Monaco 3(4): 5—S6.
Hottuuts, L. B. 1946. Biological results of the Snellius Expedition XIV: The Stenopodidae,
Nephropsidae, Scyllaridae and Palinuridae. Temminckia 7: 1-178.
100 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Kuso, I. 1963. Systematic studies of the Japanese macrurous decapod crustacea. J. Tokyo
Univ. Fish. 49: 63-68.
MILNE-Epwarps, A. 1880. Reports on the results of dredging, under the supervision of
Alexander Agassiz, in the Gulf of Mexico, and in the Caribbean Sea, 1877, 78, 79 by the
United States coast survey steamer BLAKE, Lieut-Commander C. D. Sigsbee, U.S.N.
and Commander J. R. Bartlett, U.S.N. commanding: Etudes préliminaires sur les
Crustacés. Bull. Mus. comp. Zool. Harv. 8: 66.
i u es :
~ “ : ; #
ii : Y : . |
- a .
—_ ay
> Sy
+
*
if
—s ae
a [= 7
2
2
t :
25 5 |
: vA
=F *
Hy . 4 s
5 Ss - ef
— z j
ps o
~
ca
4
=
~
f a
Z
1
y
~ ii ee
x i <
7
v
_ rn if i |
ot
> I
. 4
Ades
ie »
= ;
= \
Sy,
ie ‘
Ste os
¥ t
s
. =
x, > i :
amd
a .
or
J é i i
= iar j
2,
wy
; Mrs
_ )
ie) ‘
f 9)
+
is ‘
. ‘
; C
os
?
i
A
: i
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the /nfernational code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb.
nov., syn. nov., etc.
An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name (and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific name must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
_ Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
_ Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses'to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
not acceptable. ;
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-—A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) ._The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
e.g. *... the Figure depicting C. namacolus ...’; ‘. .. in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...’
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. Du Toit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
“Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
P. Fa BERRY
A NEW SPECIES OF DEEP-WATER PALINURID
LOBSTER (CRUSTACEA, DECAPODA, PALINURIDAEB)
FROM THE EAST COAST OF SOUTHERN AFRICA
OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN
: ~~” MUSEUM
CAPE TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 « 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 <x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes...’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes...’
“As described (Smith 1969a, 1969b; Jones 1971)’
‘As described (Haughton & Broom 1927)...’
‘As described (Haughton et al. 1927)...’
Note: no comma separating name and year
Dagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, b, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list o,
Scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BULLOUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P.—H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140.
FISCHER, P.-H., DuvaL, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. gén. 74: 627-634. \
Koun, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
Konn, A. J. 19606. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull, Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4): 1-51.
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ee
*“SPUBS O]119}S SUIA]IOAO S
IA] JOAR] DUBDO[OF{ 93k] 94} SuUIMOYS ‘QV—-ZY UO!}Ses YINOS 3
I uses “(CT SC) SIOpfey sq °
Id ‘[ ‘3Iq
ARE RRNA,
whan ve
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 78 Band
August 1979 Augustus
Part 10 Deel
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS,
CAPE PROVINCE, SOUTH AFRICA
THE HOLOCENE DEPOSITS
By
FRANZ R. SCHWEITZER
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
beskikbaarheid van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
1, 2(1-3, 5-8), 31-2, 4-5, 8, t.-p.i.), 5(1-3, 5, 7-9),
6(1, t.—p.i.), 7-4), 8, 911-2, 7), 10(1-3),
11(1-2, 5, 7, t.—p.i.), 15(4—-5), 24(2), 27, 31(1-3), 32(5), 33
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 908407 80 7
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The Rustica Press, Pty., Ltd., Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, CAPE PROVINCE.
SOUTH AFRICA
THE HOLOCENE DEPOSITS
By
FRANZ R. SCHWEITZER
South African Museum, Cape Town
(With 43 figures, 28 tables and 3 appendices)
[MS. accepted 28 March 1979]
ABSTRACT
The excavations at Die Kelders Cave on the Walker Bay coast represent the first phase
in an investigation of the ecology of the indigenous populations of the southern Cape.
The excavations revealed a late Holocene (Later Stone Age) occupation sequence separated
by sterile sands from Upper Pleistocene (Middle Stone Age) deposits. This report deals only
with the Holocene sequence, which comprises a basal occupation horizon overlain by shell
midden deposits. The deposits, dated to the first to fifth centuries A.D., have yielded the earliest
firmly dated evidence for domestic sheep and pottery in South Africa.
Analysis of the excavated material indicates winter occupation with heavy reliance on
marine resources. This pattern appears to have been modified during the period in which the
cave was occupied, changes in the faunal remains indicating an extended stay and a decreased
reliance on small wild bovids. Differences in the stone artefacts of the initial occupation
horizon and the overlying shell midden layers are discussed and it is suggested that the informal
nature of the lithic component, together with the wide range of formal bone tools, reflects
differing needs arising from a stay at the coast compared with those arising from occupation
of inland sites.
It is concluded that the economic changes were related to the increasing availability of
domestic stock, but that at this period this new food source did not significantly change the
subsistence economy and technology of the late Holocene populations of the Cape Biotic Zone.
CONTENTS
PAGE
Introduction ; ‘ ; ; ; : é : ; 102
Geographical and environmental setting ae Sod on 108
Physiography . ; : k : : : ; o. V5kG8
Geology . ; : oe ae th,
Climate . f : : : : : . 109
Drainage . : ; , : ; . : . 109
Vegetation ; é : ‘ . : ; ‘ | 10
Fauna ; ; ; , : ; : : I 10
Environment and habitat . : ‘ ; : 113
The sea-shore : ; : 113
The dunefields . : I 13
The coastal peneplain 13
The mountain :,
Conclusions
101
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 78 (10), 1979: 101-233, 43 figs, 28 tables, 3 appendices.
102 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
PAGE
Archaeological observations at Die Kelders . : ow Phe
Introduction . 5 : : d : ; f A ak
Stratigraphy . : 115
Description of gross stratigraphy of ‘the cave
deposit : 115
Description of main layers in ‘the late ‘Holocene
midden member . 120
Description of minor layers in “the late Holocene
midden member . F 5 , 124
General discussion of the stratigraphy ; : eS
Dating and correlation . : : , : : 1 126
Excavation procedure . : : s : : ee
Artefactual finds. 5 , i : 4 : 5 28
Bone artefacts. : , : 5 : t ; 129
Shell artefacts . : : ; ‘ ; : : 143
Pottery . : : : ; : ; : : ; 155
Miscellaneous. : ; : : ; . Be NTO)
Lithic artefacts. : : : ; A ; se AO
Animal and plant remains. Ae is : : . 186
Shellfish f 3 : : : B : : 3 186
EIS ee : P ‘ : , : ‘ ; be M95
Birds. 3 : ! : : : : : . 200
Reptiles ‘ : : ‘ : : 5 a AOL
Mammals . c : 2 : : : k 20
Plants . ; : 206
The site as a location fie ee eone Guest : 5 OW
Die Kelders in relation to other excavated sites. . 208
Subsistence activities . ; ; : : ; . 208
Artefact making . : 3 ‘ ‘ ; : ~ 218
Conclusions . ; : ; : : ; 5 : eo by
Acknowledgements. ‘ : 2 ; ; ; erel20
References . 3 ; ‘ ; : ’ 1 220
Appendix 1. Karl W. BaCe:
Preliminary notes on the geology of Die Kelders,
Cape . , ‘ : ‘ E : ‘ Ly 225
Appendix 2. D. M. meee
The micromammalian fauna from the Late Stone Age
levels at Die Kelders, Cape . ‘ : ; ny D229
Appendix 3. G. P. Rightmire
Human skeletal remains from Die Kelders, Cape . 233
INTRODUCTION
The Gansbaai coast, which is the geographic focus of this research, is
identified as the rocky eastern shore of Walker Bay, a wide, deep embayment in
the coastline just west of Cape Agulhas, the southernmost point of the African
continent (Fig. 2).
This stretch, indeed, the whole Walker Bay coast and its immediate hinter-
land, is an area where arable land is limited, soils are poor and population is
relatively low. Proximity to Cape Town, however, has led to its increasing
importance as a recreation area with a large influx of vacationers during the
summer season and at week-ends, and to a noticeable increase in land division
for residential plots. As a result the archaeological sites located here have
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA 103
N WALKER
BAY
-~
~
~.
~-
~.
Die Kelders/, 7
Danger
Point
Fig. 2. Map showing relative position of DK | site.
104 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
become endangered to a greater degree than previously. It is against this back-
ground of modern development that the research programme of the South
African Museum in the south-western Cape in general and the Gansbaai area
in particular can be viewed—as basic problem-orientated research anticipating
conditions that could make salvage archaeology increasingly important in the
future.
The resort village of Die Kelders (34°32’8"S 19°22’33”E) has long been
known for its caves and subterranean springs (Wilkins ed. 1901: 165-166).
Some of these caves have been formed by water draining through limestones
under cover of aeolianites and dune-sand to the sea. This drainage ensures a
plentiful supply of fresh water along this part of the coast. Other caves are
wave-cut, and in some both seepage and wave action have played a role in their
formation.
A number of caves at Die Kelders contain remains of prehistoric occu-
pation. The most prominent of these is the Klipgat Cave complex which consists
principally of two large, high-roofed chambers at the foot of a 12 m cliff. The
chambers have been eroded out of the cliff limestones and are separated by a
rock-wall containing smaller openings and passages (Fig. 3). Part of this com-
plex, designated Die Kelders 1 (DK 1), was chosen for study as it contained
apparently undisturbed Holocene shell-midden deposits, and potentially offered
a succession of occupation horizons that could help to establish a chronological
and culture-stratigraphic framework for the area. It seemed that by concen-
Fig. 3. Klipgat cave complex viewed from the west, with DK 1 behind the staff bearer on
the right.
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA 105
trating efforts on the detailed analysis of finds from this site a direct contribution
could be made to the study of the cave-dwellers and to the prehistory of the
Gansbaai coast.
Numbers of archaeological sites in the area are known (Rudner 1968:
Avery 1975), but only three cave sites received mention in the archaeological]
literature prior to the commencement of excavations at DK | in 1969. Péringuey
(1911: 143-7) described two caves at Hawston, some 30 km north-west of
Die Kelders. One cave is reported to have yielded two ostrich egg-shell beads
and a ‘scraper knife’. The other was said to have contained a quantity of animal
and human bones which Péringuey interpreted as the result of alternate occu-
pation by man and beast. The Hawston caves have not been relocated and,
judging by the reported removal of slabs from the roof for building purposes
(Péringuey 1911: 143), they may no longer be in existence. The reported layout
of the cave, which included six or seven fissures radiating from part of an open
chamber, suggests that, in part, the cave was a porcupine lair (C. K. Brain
pers. comm.). This view is supported by a recent re-examination of faunal
material from the site, which is housed in the South African Museum. The
examination revealed the presence of a large proportion of carnivore remains
and a high percentage of porcupine-gnawed bone (C. K. Brain pers. comm.).
It is difficult to evaluate Péringuey’s observations in the absence of detailed
stratigraphic and content information, but it seems reasonable to accept his
conclusion that the site was used both by people and wild animals. It is not
possible to detail the context of most of the material, but the finds suggest that
horizons of very different time levels in the Holocene and Upper Pleistocene
were excavated. Péringuey’s faunal list differs markedly from that of DK 1
Gee diable 27):
The third site mentioned in the literature is Klipkop Cave in the Hoy Park
nature reserve in central Hermanus, some 18 km north-west of Die Kelders.
It was first excavated by J. Drury of the South African Museum and further
excavations were undertaken by W. H. Pattersen who was in charge of the
nature reserve. In 1935 A. J. H. Goodwin, of the University of Cape Town,
and K. H. Barnard, of the South African Museum, spent three days excavating
one of the remaining sections of the deposit. The history of the investigations
was recorded by Goodwin (1930a: 211 ff).
Since, in 1969 when this project was started, there was no active programme
of intensive research on shell-middens which included systematic excavations;
there was both the potential for and the desirability of such studies being
undertaken.
Any archaeological excavation programme is liable to be time-consuming
and the excavation of DK 1 was spread over seven field seasons lasting from
1969 to 1973. The reason for this was that the total sequence included some
7 m of deposit resting on a fossil boulder beach and ranging in age from early
Upper Pleistocene to Holocene. The occupation of DK 1, then, was unexpectedly
long and complex and the most recent phase of occupation, which is reported
106 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
here, comprised only the upper few metres of the sequence. This was separated
from another phase of use of the cave in early Upper Pleistocene times by thick
layers of natural sand deposits representing an accumulation over several tens
of thousands of years. The earlier phase of occupation will form the basis of a
further report.
The excavation of the DK 1 deposit was based on standard procedures of
stripping off natural stratigraphic layers. The deposits are complex in detail
but reasonable success was achieved and, in the absence of horizontal layering,
such an approach was essential.
Shell-middens include materials other than shell but are in the main garbage
heaps of inedible residues from food. From the investigation of cave situations
such as DK 1, it was obvious that much of the information recovered would
relate to subsistence economy and thus the focus given to the research was the
ecology of prehistoric peoples of the Gansbaai coast. It is not possible in the
design of archaeological research that includes exploratory excavation, as in
this case, to anticipate what will be found below ground. The nature of the
deposits in DK 1 was such that the excavation exposed not only the upper
shell-midden layers but also earlier Upper Pleistocene horizons that intersected
the surface where piled up against jutting-out wall rock. This meant that the
strategy of the investigation had to be changed to allow the testing of the earlier
and deeper deposits down to bed-rock.
At a later stage in the investigation, when it was established that sheep
remains were more abundant in a particular area of the deposit and in a specific
layer, the excavation was extended to provide better samples of the sheep
remains. In this case a more problem-orientated approach could be followed
because the finds of domestic animal remains in this context immediately posed
the problem of whether the occupants were hunter—gatherers who had obtained
sheep by chance, or herders. As a study of the age distribution in the sheep
sample appeared to offer the best means of distinguishing between the two
possibilities, adequately large samples of sheep bones had to be recovered.
The extended nature of the excavation entailed the preparation and publi-
cation of a number of interim and specialized reports. Some of these go beyond
the scope of the present study in that they consider the earlier occupation of
the site. The first publication (Schweitzer 1970) summarized the first two seasons
of fieldwork at Die Kelders. It gave initial descriptions of the stratigraphy of
the Upper Pleistocene and Holocene deposits, the archaeological finds and
relevant radiocarbon dates. A further short report (Schweitzer 1972) was
included in a review dealing with current archaeological research. The results
of the later excavations in the Holocene layers, designed to recover an increased
sample of sheep bones, were published in a short note (Schweitzer & Scott 1973)
that described the occurrence, composition and dating of the sheep remains
which at the time were the earliest known finds of positively identified sheep in
South Africa. A further and fuller report (Schweitzer 1974) included a detailed
analysis of the sheep bones and attempted to answer the problem of whether
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA 107
the sheep in layer 2 had been kept and eaten by pastoralists or obtained by one
or other means by the hunter—gatherers. A complete site report formed the
basis of a thesis submitted in 1975 to the University of Stellenbosch towards a
M.A. degree (Schweitzer 1975) and the present study is a modified version of
that thesis.
Analyses of the sediments from the site were presented in two papers
(Tankard & Schweitzer 1974, 1976) which point to human and natural debris
having accumulated in the cave over an estimated time range of 100 000 years.
These analyses suggest that the 40 000-year period of non-occupation prior to
the relatively late arrival at the site of the Holocene inhabitants was due,
initially, to the creation of a sump through water seepage and, later, to the
sealing off of the cave by a shifting dune similar to those found in the area
today. 7
A methodological problem in connection with a large site such as DK 1
is at what stage to accept that the investigation is complete. Obviously at the
present stage reached there is much more work that can and should be done
at the site. The excavations have been on a limited scale, the more so in the
earlier deposits. Practical considerations enter into excavation strategy and,
for example, to excavate the Upper Pleistocene levels larger areas of overlying
occupation deposits have to be removed and these cannot simply be stripped
off and discarded. In respect of the Holocene midden accumulation described
in this report, an area of some 85 m? has been excavated. On the one hand this
has been adequate to produce a significant sample of artefacts and food residues
for study, but on the other hand it is inadequate for studying spatial distri-
bution patterns that can inform on the use of the floor-space of the cave, from
which socio-economic inferences may be derived.
Given the results presented in this report, some statement can be made
on the economy of the late Holocene peoples at DK 1, and it is proposed to
extend these observations at the same level to another site, Byneskranskop, in
a slightly different setting but in the same local area. This leaves open the option
of extending the Die Kelders excavation at a later stage in the development of
our understanding of the prehistory of the region.
The methodological approach adopted in this study developed in the
course of the excavation and during the laboratory analysis of the material.
The occupation deposits studied relate to people who were hunter—gatherer—
fishermen at a stage when herding was being introduced into the area. The
valid approach here has seemed to be the study of changes in the behaviour of
people increasingly reliant on herding. Despite the impact of pastoralism on
their way of life, the late Holocene peoples on the Gansbaai coast retained an
economy largely based on the exploitation of the natural resources of the local
environment. The viewpoint of this study may be defined as ecological in that
it seeks to examine the interaction between these people and their environment.
It is relevant not only to study the visible evidence of the way these people
exploited their environment but also to consider how the environment’s
108 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
potentials and limitations may have affected their activities and, finally, how
these activities may have affected the environment.
In practice this approach has entailed the identification and quantification
of a wide range of residues from the site and this has been possible only through
close co-operation with biologists, geologists and palaeontologists. This is
reflected in the text by reference to specialist studies and in the appended reports.
GEOGRAPHICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SETTING
PHYSIOGRAPHY
The physiography of the south-western Cape coastal belt, including
Walker Bay, is dominated by mountain ranges of Table Mountain Sandstone
(T.M.S.) which run more or less parallel to the coast. In the vicinity of Die
Kelders the outliers of these mountains reach a height of some 350 m and are
separated from the sea by a low-lying coastal plain which varies in width from
about 3 km near Gansbaai to 10 km further north. The coastal plain in the
Die Kelders area is mainly underlain by limestones covered in part by calcareous
aeolianites and dune-sands. It is in the limestone that the main caves are cut
(Figs 3-4).
Many of these caves, including DK 1, have been eroded along the interface
between the folded T.M.S. which has been locally planed at 7-8 m above
sea-level, and the late Cenozoic Bredasdorp Formation, a marine limestone
Fig. 4. DK 1, left of staff, before excavation.
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA 109
which lies unconformably on the sandstone. The basal part of the limestone is
an angular to sub-angular breccioid horizon, passing upward through hori-
zontally bedded, fine quartzose sands with much comminuted shell and, finall y,;
into massive limestone.
GEOLOGY
The youngest sediments in the area are late Pleistocene calcareous
aeolianites of last glacial age and superficial modern dune-sands, the latter
forming a prominent landmark clearly visible across Walker Bay. The calcareous
aeolianites exhibit clear dune bedding dipping predominantly in a northern to
north-western direction. Outliers of these sediments lying on local promon-
tories and islands of Palaeozoic quartzite (T.M.S.) attest to their more seaward
extension during the lowered sea-levels of the Upper Pleistocene. Northwards
along Walker Bay the calcareous aeolianites that extend below beach level are
being eroded back by the sea along the length of the bay. These easily eroded
sediments show no evidence of having been planed by any sea higher than the
present. Cross-bedding within the calcareous aeolianites shows that a domi-
nantly south-easterly wind direction prevailed during their formation.
CLIMATE
The south-easterly wind direction is still dominant along the coast in
Summer and often reaches gale force. In winter the prevailing north-westerly
winds usually bring rain. These south-east and north-west components of the
wind system are elements of the Mediterranean-type climate of the south-
western Cape with warm, dry summers and wet winters. The climate is relatively
mild, and the coastal belt, which includes the Gansbaai area, has an average
daily maximum temperature of about 24°C in midsummer and 16,5°C in mid-
winter (Schulze 1965: 2). This area is also frost-free, and snow is restricted to
the higher parts of the more inland mountain ranges, but even there it usually
does not lie on the mountain slopes for more than a week or so after a fall.
Hail is rare, and thunderstorms occur on average less than five times a year.
Because temperatures are generally lower in the wetter mountain areas, they
offer a less favourable habitat than the valleys or coast.
The main rainfall period is from May to September, and precipitation is
profoundly influenced by the pronounced orographical features of the south-
western Cape. This results in a mean annual rainfall of over 3 000 mm in some
mountain kloofs, 400-500 mm on open areas such as the Cape Flats, and less
than 250 mm in valleys such as that of the Breede River (Schulze 1965: 313).
DRAINAGE
There is no major river in the Gansbaai area, but drainage from the moun-
tains gives rise to a few small seasonal rivers and streams as well as perennial
fissure-fed springs. The rivers and streams, in their meandering across the
coastal plain, form marshes and small, shallow lakes or vleis. Some of these
110 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
result from the closing of the river mouths by dune movement during the windy
summer months and others are the result of the low gradient of the surrounding
flat countryside and the variable precipitation. There are three perennial springs
in the vicinity of Die Kelders, produced by water seeping through the limestone
and moving along the upper surface of the underlying T.M.S. until they surface
near the shore. One of these, some 100 m from the cave site, delivers about
910 000 litres daily throughout the year.
VEGETATION
In the south-western Cape the natural vegetation consists of sclerophyllous
scrub known as fynbos, which extends from the mountains to the coast. The
different local environments, however, with their particular topography, soil
and precipitation, influence the character of the vegetation and, following
Taylor (1972), the vegetation can be divided into a mountain and a coastal
fynbos. The cave is in the area of the coastal fynbos growing on the lime-rich
marine sands. Although there have been changes caused by recent land-use
patterns resulting in the expansion of the open dunes during historical times
and the accelerating spread of exotics, it is probable that the present vegetation
is relatively little changed from that which existed during the Holocene occu-
pation of the site. Support for this contention comes from the absence of
evidence for marked climatic and sea-level changes in the late Holocene.
Taylor (1972: 17) suggests that the fynbos is a natural climax vegetation, unlike
Mediterranean-type vegetations found in some other parts of the world, notably
the macchia of France and the gorrigue of southern Spain, where the effect of
human interference is more pronounced.
The local fynbos includes typical elements and species of the families
Restionaceae (Cape reeds), Ericaceae (heaths) and Proteaceae (proteas) as well
as a number of grasses which, though limited, make good grazing. In the
sheltered troughs between dunes Sideroxylon inerme, white milkwood (melk-
hout) trees of the temperate coastal forests develop. In addition, there are local
forest remnants (Taylor 1961) of the type now restricted to the wetter Knysna
area some 400 km further east. The survival of these forest patches in the
vicinity of DK 1 is confined to sheltered locations further inland.
Fynbos is a fire-climax vegetation that must be burnt to retain its identity
as a plant association. Many component species need fire for their reproduction
and survival (Taylor 1972: 16). This requirement also favours exotic pest plants
such as hakea and the Australian acacias, A. cyanophylla (Port Jackson willow)
and A. cyclops (‘rooikrans’), which are now spreading in the area at an alarming
rate. Unless checked, they may thus replace the fynbos and have already done
SO in some areas.
FAUNA
The terrestrial fauna is now considerably depleted, but still includes
numbers of small antelopes belonging in the main to the genus Raphicerus.
Testudinidae (tortoises), Bathyergidae (dune mole-rats) and Hyracoidea
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA 111
(dassies) are still numerous, and tortoises and dune mole-rats in particular
provided much of the cave occupants’ diet. Bird life is prolific with more than
sixty-five species recorded from this area. These include sea birds, pelicans,
birds of prey, freshwater birds and migrants, many of which form seasonal
flocks numbering several hundred. It is, however, the marine birds that were
important to the cave inhabitants. Modern fishing and trawling have made
great inroads into Walker Bay’s off-shore fish population, but marine life along
the shoreline has been changed to a lesser degree, largely due to the enforcement
of protective legislation. The intertidal zone between high and low spring tides
was readily accessible to early hunter—gatherer—fishermen and, as the shell-
middens testify, important in their subsistence economy. Here, as on other
rocky shores of the south-western Cape, the coastal zone can be divided into
three sub-zones on the basis of the abundance of certain characteristic animals
and seaweeds (Barnard 1954: 9). The shellfish fauna of the uppermost or
Littorina zone is submerged only by the high water of spring tides and is
generally too small to make worthwhile eating. The Barnacle zone, named after
its most common organism, is covered by the normal high tides and includes
some edible species. It is, however, in the third or Cochlear zone, only fully
exposed at especially low spring tides, that most limpets (Patella spp), an
important food source, are found. Also of importance is the sub-littoral zone,
the upper fringe of which may be visible at very low spring tides (Barnard 1954:
10), where the brown kelp stems are rooted and red bait (Pyura spp), abalone
(‘perlemoen’) (Haliotis spp), rock-lobsters (Jasus lalandii), and ‘arikreukel’
(Turbo spp) are best developed.
Die Kelders falls into one of two overlap regions joining the three principal
coastal biological zones of South Africa. This is the ‘western overlap’ (Stephen-
son 1944) which stretches from Kommetjie on the Atlantic coast of the Cape
Peninsula to Cape Agulhas on the south coast. It links the colder waters of the
Benguela current, which has a mean annual temperature of 12°C with a 2-3°
variation off Cape Town, to the warmer Agulhas current, which reaches the
south coast from the Indian Ocean. This has a mean annual temperature of
19°C with a range of 5-6°C (Schalke 1973: 8). The resultant overlap, though
manifested by a progressive west-to-east change of the intertidal marine fauna
populations, is not at all uniform. It has, therefore, been subdivided into zones
of different water temperature, with Die Kelders and its well-developed kelp
fields occupying a colder water subcompartment extending from Cape Hangklip
to Danger Point (Stephenson 1944: 339) (see Fig. 5).
These temperature gradients are mentioned to draw attention to the need
for exercising caution when comparing marine faunal compositions from Die
Kelders with similar assemblages derived from sites situated elsewhere, even
relatively short distances away. Not only is there a gradual change in fauna and
flora from west to east coasts, but ‘it should also be remembered that a species
which occurs between tide marks along one stretch of coast may be present
below tide marks along another’ (Stephenson 1944: 272).
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
112
UOI}BIO] OY} puL (¢ :€/6] AO[SUOS JO}Je) SOUOZ 9.1N}eIOdUIO} OULIVU PUL S}U9IIND ULIDO BUIMOYS 9deD U19}S9M-YINOS puke UJOYINOS 9y} Jo dey] *¢ ‘SIZ
3
WOO8ILNOHY13We
"1X9} OY} UI POUOIUOU SO}IS PO}BALOXS JOYIO O} UOT}LIOI UI SIOP[Oy 91 JO
HINOW Y3AIY
S.2ISV 1 JAV)
AV@ NOS13N
UZAY SIITLVW
5. 1S wwvSysabiony
1 N
I
d
AV@ 13SSO
Vv
ie)
*isyNHAVO
O
Ww
soyjnBy ado>
dOXSNVYUNSINAR®
Rd Mee
3AVD dOdI1N
Ava SNOaxOS
N3ONVH ga
IfLawwOwm
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA 113
ENVIRONMENT AND HABITAT
The area in which DK 1 is situated may be seen as a series of environ-
mental zones affording a range of differing habitats. These zones may be
considered broadly as:
1. The sea-shore
The sea-shore may be divided into three micro-environments:
the rocky T.M.S. coastline, running south from DK | to Danger Point,
is the habitat of the principal shellfish species, black and brown mussel (Choro-
mytilus meridionalis and Perna perna), found in the cave’s midden deposits, as
well as of the most common fish, ‘hottentot’ (Pachymetopon blochii);
the limestone cliffs in which there are numerous caves and three perennial
freshwater springs; that both these features were attractive to human beings is
evident from the extensive occupation debris in the Klipgat Cave complex;
the sandy beach which begins a few hundred metres north of the site and
stretches for about 14 km to Hermanus. The tidal surf is the habitat of the
white mussel (Donax serra), shells of which are also found in the DK | deposits.
2. The dunefields
The open dunefields today form a spectacular but almost barren environ-
ment. There are, however, occasional patches of shrub in sheltered localities,
and small antelope are sometimes to be seen. Potsherds and other remnants of
late Holocene human activity have been found in the dune troughs (Rudner
1968: 59), which suggest that this environment was considered suitable for some
degree of occupation.
3. The coastal peneplain
The coastal peneplain, which consists of large areas covered by fynbos,
includes a number of vleis. The vegetation undergoes a progressive change,
relative to the distance from the sea and shelter from prevailing winds, generally
marked by an increase in the height of the vegetation. The area provides a wide
range of flora and fauna and would have been attractive to hunter—gatherers,
although they seem to have preferred to locate their settlements closer to the
shore in the caves and in the shelter of the milkwood trees on the seaward edge
of the plain. It should be noted, however, that open station sites in the more
dense vegetation would have a much lower visibility.
4. The mountain
In the upper reaches of the Franskraal mountains, fynbos becomes
increasingly sparse and the area is bare and rocky. There is a large rock-shelter
about half-way up the mountain, clearly visible from the peneplain. This shows
evidence of past human occupation in the form of marine shells, tortoise
remains and flaked pebbles (G. Avery pers. comm.). No detailed survey of the
mountain has been undertaken, though it is known that the shallow vlei on
114 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
the plateau, as well as those on the coastal plain, supplied local inhabitants with
small turtles (Pelomedusa subrufa) in recent times (J. Kemp pers. comm.).
CONCLUSIONS
The situation of DK 1 shows that many advantages were offered to the
hunter—gatherer—fisher and possible herder groups living there by the number
of micro-environments within easy reach. In addition to the obvious benefits
of shelter and proximity to fresh water and food resources, the cave offered
protection at the base of a cliff. Moreover by facing north it provided a maximum
of sunshine during the winter months when evidence indicates it was occupied.
ARCHAEOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS
INTRODUCTION
The deposits in the DK | section of Die Kelders Klipgat Cave complex
form a sand-covered mound that is well protected by the overhanging roof.
There was little eroded material on the surface, but a surface collection included
finds of a broken decorated bone linkshaft, ostrich egg-shell beads and flaked
stone artefacts. Archaeological investigations of the deposits then depended on
excavation. An area of some 85 m? was excavated in the top 2 m of midden
accumulation and a reduced area was excavated for some 5,5 m to a basal
deposit near the present mean sea-level.
The excavation exposed a deep vertical section through the cave deposits
and this has provided the basis for the study of the stratigraphic history of the
accumulation that is discussed below. Attention has been given to both the
gross stratigraphy of the whole sequence and the micro-stratigraphy of the
topmost occupation unit, the late Holocene midden accumulation that is the
concern of this report. Samples of charcoal and bone were collected for radio-
carbon dating and, while the results of these age determinations are discussed
elsewhere in the text, it can be said here that dating of the upper occupation is
satisfactory, although bone apatite dates from the Pleistocene occupation levels
have given results that are considered anomalous. In other sections the excava-
tion procedures adopted and the artefactual finds are discussed. The products
of the excavation in terms of both artefacts, objects made or modified by man,
and food refuse are very numerous, and routine sorting, cleaning, cataloguing
and housing the finds has been a major task. The artefactual finds have been
analysed according to the raw material used, context, form and function. The
other class of finds or remains analysed is the food refuse. This is artefactual
in the broadest sense, having been introduced by man, but primarily provides
information on the economy of the cave occupants. The sampling, identification
and interpretation of the food remains has formed a major part of the study.
There is clearly considerable potential for detailed analysis of such finds. It is
an almost open-ended study that requires reasoned explanation for the inclusion
in the deposit of each different kind of remains, be it a bone of a particular
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA 115
species of bird or an otolith of a species of fish. The interest lies in information
on how man adapted to his effective environment and how he influenced it, and
ecological studies of the prehistoric Die Kelders inhabitants are continuing.
The excavation of the Die Kelders cave has yielded a human burial, rather
poorly preserved, in a side passage (see Appendix 3).
STRATIGRAPHY
DESCRIPTION OF THE GROSS STRATIGRAPHY OF THE CAVE DEPOSIT
The stratigraphic sequence at DK 1 comprises more than 7 m of deposit.
A full description has been given by Tankard & Schweitzer (1974, 1976), and
the main depositional units or members are described in outline here.
A basal layer of beach sands
This overlies a beach cobble—boulder bed, the lowest horizon that was
intersected. The beach cobbles are thought to be the initial fill of the cave and
to date to a previous high sea-level of last interglacial age.
The Upper Pleistocene deposits
The marine deposits are overlain by an Upper Pleistocene (Middle Stone
Age) member made up of alternating occupation and non-occupation horizons.
These horizons formed during a regression but, as marine mammals are included
in the occupation horizons, it can be argued that the shore was within easy
reach of the cave.
A yellow iron-stained sand member
This conformably overlies the Upper Pleistocene member. There is no
evidence of human occupation in these sands and the faunal remains are
restricted to isolated, small rodent bones. It has been reasoned that these sands
accumulated during a major regression and, as a result of waterlogging and
sealing off by dunes, the cave was effectively uninhabitable. The suggested time
range of accumulation of these deposits is from an estimated 45 000 to about
9 000 years ago (Pta—1456, derived from charcoal in the uppermost levels:
9620 + 100 years B.P.).
A pink, shelly sand layer
This overlies the yellow sands and indicates a return to a post-Pleistocene
higher sea-level and the reopening of the cave. The two sand members are
disconformable and easily distinguished in the field (Fig. 1).
The shell midden
The uppermost member in the sequence marks the final occupation
of the cave in the late Holocene. This is a complete unit in itself and comprises
a 1-1,5 m shell accumulation interspersed with sand and ash lenses (Figs 1, 6-8).
It is capped by a partly cemented, powdery grey sand which serves to protect
‘SI
S seq
18(0) faye) ae
@ “84-8VV MA - Ip uot!
E®) | “SSUIME
VV ‘VY ‘S3UI
Sees
VV : See
11 |
O1}90S ee
I ue
: S yyNoS
1309 Mad ‘9
ZG
8
Ml
QJ) 3
Wit
XG
M
116
<2)
<
a
N
<
<
=
©
O
Lu
a'
-
_
O
x
j=)
ar
$28
be
'
i
it
iene
ied
ee
ne
pene
a)
Se
~
209
ox
[4_--=-- == y ‘
eooo7dsd alorolcla
ey
°
(10) '
O59 0-0 0-0 Ot OtOVGe
ott ty
°
110} aoe
a, 0 eo0
9
i)
Wisc cueieieiens
e~
ooo°o
ey
20°
°
59,0 7079 |
05°
ill
990
os)
°
l
°
:
Oo
00
09900
°
0°99 9
“ill
9.90
Anat
0 Oo
6% 20° 059
6.0 0
. Onn
02070 °%R iil
°
2 2
0 8)
00°02
gil
i
950,09
0
°
0° pa 6 PBS oat
2 : Sencar gD
[pi aaa ee ,
RRO i; > ee Scaeee Bene ie ao tee fee . ik, Se re) Onin io
°
°
°
bare)
°
°
°
6~0
020°
0
°
° B
090505 ul
| wa
°
-
7
od
=i)
°
0.0
UNNATLAUANNAN
°
SS
IND:
eo
To[a/
© 959025202
0-0,
0209050002000
°
Ot
vA IATA
9 599% 905% 4% 9%0°%O
TAY OROGe
6° 50°06
50° 6200
pO 2 0 0 DO gm
Ofori)
PR ee nes
Fig. 6.
117
‘9 “SI
JuL3w
P10}
rod
°o
Ce esanr ae
Ce
;
10 @2 0 o
oH Ge"
©0000 OL_____
oooo
eoooo
ooo0o0°0
oa
3 i ‘
» eerie fore
es STs”
ED
us XX
°
26
0° ;
KS x
al IN étiiinine
Le rTM TT CELT TTT Tne fi nel MMHG
FER OOO?
<¢ <oxXOX AXOKOX rox Q Ox
cox
OPVG9, I, DOGO, 5 PK A
\ 1) CO COCCOCO OS SOOOOOOx aC . xe
IS efor ON ON ;
erererere 77) \ LOOOO uM LOX. S500
SZ
% x Cie eS
118
ON
=
Sa |
MY SY
‘Q “SIF
[ME
Teale
TUOUIOLIU
S6V-LV AAVO S.VdINVS 4O NOILOSS HLYON Lya
120 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
the midden surface. In the absence of any marked compaction, the middens
still show irregular features related to the mode of accumulation on uneven
surfaces and the complex micro-stratigraphy of the layers within the member
required excavation with care. This is shown by the fact that during excavation
some eighty minor subdivisions of this Holocene member were recognized and
removed separately. For the purpose of analysis the excavated minor sub-
divisions were subsequently combined to form eleven composite or main layers.
These layers can be grouped in three major divisions:
(i) layer 12: this is an occupation soil, and the earliest deposit;
(ii) layers 10-6 and 1: these shell-midden layers form the bulk of the thickness
of the accumulation;
(iii) layers 5—2: these shelly layers occupy surface irregularities in (41); they
may be contemporary with an accumulation, layer 22, recognized in a side
passage of the cave.
DESCRIPTION OF MAIN LAYERS IN THE LATE HOLOCENE MIDDEN MEMBER
Layer 12 (Figs 6 A-C, 7A)
The earliest occupation layer is clearly separated from the overlying
layers by its brown, sandy matrix. The interface with the pink, shelly sand
member was not everywhere sharp and thus may result in its having been
mapped as slightly thicker than it, in fact, was. A date of 1960 + 85 B.P.
(GX-1688) is associated with this layer, which extends over most of the area
of the grid and has an average thickness of about 15 cm. Volume excavated was
3,1 m?. (Volumes of main layers excavated are shown in Fig. 9.)
Layer 10 (Figs 6A—-C, 7B)
This is essentially a shell layer resting on layer 12. It extends over most
of the central gridded area with some irregularities in outline. The layer varies
in thickness from 2 to 10 cm on the western side of the grid to 75 cm in the
eastern section. This is a composite layer which was excavated as six sub-units
which were subsequently grouped to form a single unit as they were seen to be
part of a whole. Pitfill middens A and B (Fig. 6C) are included in layer 10.
Volume excavated was 6,6 m°.
Layer 9 (Fig. 7C)
This layer occupied the central area of the main grid and therefore does
not appear on any of the section drawings. It was characterized by an orange-
coloured sand matrix which helped to define its limits. This unit was of restricted
size and included rock fragments within the shelly matrix. The maximum
thickness was some 20 cm. The significance of the orange sand is difficult to
interpret, but it has been regarded as a facies of layer 10 which surrounds it.
Volume excavated was 1,4 m3.
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA 121
Layer 8 (Figs 6A-B, 7D)
A shelly layer found in the south-western part of the excavation. It was
originally excavated as four separate units which were subsequently grouped.
Separation between this and layer 7 was not always clear and for practical
purposes of inter-layer comparisons the contents of these two units can be
considered together. An average thickness of about 45 cm was consistent in
this horizon. Volume excavated was 3,2 m?.
Layer 7 (Figs 6A-B, 7D)
This was the most heterogeneous layer of the sequence. It was made up of
predominantly ashy lenses and burnt shell deposits grouped on the western
margins of the grid where it reached a thickness of 60 cm. It became more
shelly in composition as it thinned out towards the centre of the grid area. Small
lenses of pure sand occurred throughout this unit which was composed of a
variable set of micro-stratigraphic midden entities. Volume excavated was 6,9 m?.
Layer 6 (Figs 6B, 7E)
This was a thin, sandy deposit generally not exceeding 10 cm in depth
and blanketing part of layer 7. It was characterized by a white sand matrix
with a relatively lower shell content. As in the case of layer 9, the distinguishing
features may not warrant more than recognition as a facies of layer 7. Volume
excavated was 1,4 m?.
Layer 5 (Figs 1, 6B—D, 7F)
This comprised a shelly layer restricted to the south-eastern part of the
excavation. It formed the first deposit to fill in the hollow caused by the trun-
cation of the earlier accumulation. This is shown in Figures | and 6B. As might
be expected in a sloping deposit, the layer attained its maximum thickness of
35 cm at its base where it rested on the sterile sand floor of the deposit. Volume
excavated was 1,6 m?.
Layer 4 (Figs 6B-D, 7G)
This was a loosely compacted shell-midden, originally excavated as two
sub-units, which formed the bulk of the in-fill of the above-mentioned hollow.
This layer covered approximately the same area as layer 3 from which it differed
mainly by virtue of its greater bulk and more lenticular shape. Its greatest
depth was in the ‘A’ line where it attained a thickness of about 95 cm. Volume
excavated was 4,5 m?.
Layer 3 (Figs 6B—-D, 7H)
This layer was originally excavated as three sub-units consisting of a shell
horizon lying between two thinner, brown sandy layers. Maximum thickness
occurred in the lower eastern part of the deposit. Volume excavated was 2,5 m°.
122
<
HS a ity a se
10
~~—------,
eo00000000
DQ9RQRO0O0D0000BK
vo ‘o (P)00000%
1000000008
eso’?
=~
-——.
95
99
95
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
123
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA
“¢ Joke] A “Pp OAC T°
<s¢ <af (00) (©) (@) I) ie © ac —
<
sana G|
saljaw
_——
© JOAGT Ss]
*[ Tose] ‘f¢ °¢% JOACT T
9 IOAeT “FT “/ pue g stoke ‘dq “6 JOAeT ‘DS ‘OJ JaAeT “gq “ZI Ae T “WY “UONPAROXA JO
|
H
S)
3|
3]
@
2)
q
Vv
VV
CY DVO,
MMO,
=.
er
suvyd
(4
IMC ‘lL 8y
124 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Layer 2 (Figs 6B—D, 71)
The uppermost shell-midden of the south-eastern sequence followed the
general easterly dip of the underlying layers. Its limits were readily recognizable
owing to the contrasting sandy matrix of the adjoining layers. It was super-
ficially indistinguishable from the other shell-middens but was unique in that
it contained by far the greatest number of domestic animal bones. It was origi-
nally excavated in two parts, 2a and 25, and varied in thickness from 6 to 20 cm.
Volume excavated was c. 5 m°.
Layer I (Figs 6A-B, 7J)
This was a somewhat complex layer consisting of a shell-midden in the
south-western part of the excavation and included the adjoining thicker deposits
originally designated layer 17 in the western limits of the grid. It may be argued
that the south-western part of layer 1 should be grouped with layer 2 which it
resembles more than the facies in the western part. However, in the absence of
an acceptable stratigraphic correlation between layers 1 and 2 they have been
kept separate. By including the layer 17 material in layer 1, a unit large enough
for comparison was obtained without distortion of the stratigraphic record.
Volume excavated was c. 0,2 + 0,9 m? = 1,1 m3.
DESCRIPTION OF MINOR LAYERS IN THE LATE HOLOCENE MIDDEN MEMBER
Layer I1
This layer consisted of a localized lens of white sand which for convenience
was incorporated into layer 6 during the course of the excavation. It is, there-
fore, not treated as a separate layer in this report.
Layer I5a (Fig. 6C)
A small localized shell-midden, the youngest deposit in the north-eastern
part of the grid.
Layer 15b (Fig. 6C)
A patch of ashy soil below 15a.
Yellow sand (Fig. 6C)
A sandy layer blanketing a thin outlier of layer 12 and the Middle Stone
Age (M.S.A.) deposits where these surface near the drip-line. Disturbances may
have caused some mixing of horizons in this part of the midden.
Layers 20, 22 and 22a-c (Fig. 6D)
Shell-middens situated well within “Sampa’s cave’, which were excavated
separately. The position of layer 22 alongside layers 5-2 would suggest that it
was contemporary with these horizons. The layer was predominantly composed
of shell which is noticeably less fragmented than that in the higher-roofed main
chamber of the cave. It contained the dispersed bones of two human skeletons,
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA 125
both of which lack skulls. This demonstrates the degree of disturbance that must
have taken place in the midden during its accumulation. As indicated in
Figure 6D, a collapse of the deposit overlying the burial occurred during removal
of these layers.
GENERAL DISCUSSION OF THE STRATIGRAPHY
The stratigraphy of DK 1 reveals a clear-cut distinction between layer 12,
which is an occupation horizon, and the remainder of the deposits, which
consist of refuse heaps. The latter show signs of having been disturbed in various
ways subsequent to their deposition. Evidence for disturbance comes from the
scattered human skeletal remains in layer 22 and the distribution of potsherds
and tortoise carapace fragments that could be joined but which were found in
adjacent squares and even layers. There was a greater concentration of ash
lenses in the western limits of the grid and these could, in part, represent burnt
organic material such as bedding. No clear evidence of sleeping hollows was
found, but Zostera capensis, which can be interpreted as having been introduced
for bedding, occurred in small clumps throughout the sequence. It would seem,
then, that the sections of the cave exposed through excavation reveal the result
of intermittent occupation by people following a similar basic adaptation to
coastal living. Occupation was probably spread to a greater or lesser degree
over the whole cave floor and the relatively small excavation samples part of
this shifting pattern of floor usage. The whole would be revealed only by a
considerably more extensive excavation, beyond the scope of the present project.
Fig. 8. DK 1, east section before opening of Sampa’s cave (right of staff).
126 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
DATING AND CORRELATION
Nine radiocarbon dates have been obtained for the Holocene occupation
of DK 1 (Table 1). The first four charcoal samples to be dated were submitted
to Geochron Laboratories (GX—1685-8) in 1969 and showed that the midden
had accumulated between 1 500 and 2 000 years ago. A second series of four
charcoal samples (GaK-3877-8, GaK-—3955-6) was sent to the Gakushuin
Laboratory in 1972 in order to verify the unexpectedly early dates for domestic
sheep remains at the site. A further series of samples was submitted to the
University of Washington laboratory in Seattle to determine the lapse of time
Volume
ae (m? sane
22 825
20 iS
18 6,75
16 60
14 525
sx 9,09°/,(0=5,6°%o
|OLZ YY yi
177. 7) O-
Y/y ZY, UH
es
Fig. 9. Histogram of volume of excavated material from individual layers.
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA 127
TABLE 1
Radiocarbon dates for occupation layers.
Years B.P. Years B.P.
Layer Lab. no. (5568 year (5730 year Date
half-life) half-life)
a : : ‘ : 2 ; GX-1685 1465 + 100 1509 + 100 A.D. 441
GaK-3955 1600 + 120 1648 + 120 A.D. 302
GaK-3877* 1650 + 90 1699 == 90 A.D. 251
GaK-—3878* 2620 + 100 2699 + 100 B.C. 749
Se! oe eS aS GaK-3956 1590 + 80 1638 + 80 A.D. 312
POM cs hk GX-1686 2020 + 95 2080 + 95 B.c. 130
UW-291* 1480 + 55 15245 A.D. 426
USS GX-—1687 1960 + 95 AVI ae 2 Bieyo9
Le ol, a ae Oe GX-1688 1960 + 85 2019 + 85 B.C. 69
* Dates marked with an asterisk were derived from charcoal fragments collected from sieves
after washing, and are considered less reliable.
represented by the truncation of layers 7 and 8 and the subsequent deposition
of layers 5 and 4. Only one of these samples has so far been processed (UW-291).
The radiocarbon age determinations at present available show reasonable
stratigraphic consistency. Two clusters of dates are apparent. The earlier cluster
relates to layer 12-9 and gives results of the order of 2000 years B.P. The later
cluster gives results between 1650 and 1465 years B.P., suggesting that the
upper midden layers would span the fourth to fifth centuries A.D. That there
were two discrete periods of occupation is an important conclusion because of
the contrasts between layers 12 and 2, representing phases prior and subsequent
to the introduction of domestic stock to the area.
The dates are not completely consistent. In the later cluster GaK—3878,
dating layer 2, is anomalously old. This could be due to sampling—the sample
was collected from a screen and not directly out of the deposit and it came
from a square not fully covered by layer 2 in which an older (M.S.A.) horizon
also surfaces. Sample GX—1686 from layer 4 is also apparently too old and the
dating fits the earlier series better than the later series. There is no easy explana-
tion for this anomaly. The remaining five dates cluster very closely and it would
seem reasonable to accept them as the best estimate of the age of layers 2-4.
As noted by Vogel (1969: 86) conclusions on radiocarbon dates depend on
series of dates rather than on isolated determinations. The DK 1 dates have
established a basis for the introduction of herding in the south-western Cape
which has been supported by other more recent discoveries.
EXCAVATION PROCEDURE
Prior to the excavation, the cave was surveyed and plans, which included
contour lines, were drawn. Two base lines at right angles to each other were
128 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
laid out on the deposit and their positions were fixed on the cave roof by means
of eight brass hooks. This enabled the rapid and accurate resetting of the original
base lines at the beginning of subsequent extensions of the excavations by
suspending plumb lines from the roof hooks. The base lines, which formed two
sides of the first excavation, were marked off in l-metre intervals which were
lettered in one direction and numbered in the other (Fig. 7A—J). This gave a
primary grid of l-metre markers for horizontal location.
The excavation was carried out using trowels and paint-brushes. All the
material recovered was dry-sieved on a double-tiered rack with a 13 mm mesh
sieve above one of 3 mm mesh. With the exception of soil and shell, which were
regularly sampled, all the material collected in the sieves was retained for later
laboratory examination. The volume of all shell recovered from sieving the
different layers was also recorded (Table 19).
Below the superficial unstratified material, the midden structure was well
preserved and layers were traced individually and methodically removed from
each square metre over their entire extent within the confines of the grid. During
later excavations, when there were guidelines from earlier drawn sections, the
approach varied from excavating single 1-metre squares through all the strata
(1970-1), to following single layers over many squares (1972).
Section drawing procedures varied during the progress of the excavations:
either faces of individual metre squares were drawn as excavated, or the face
of several metre squares was drawn as an entity. Plans and other records were
made during the course of excavation according to standard procedure. The
positions of special features were recorded in plan and section as necessary.
Drawings were augmented by black-and-white and colour-slide photography.
The ample sunlight entering the north-facing cave gave sufficient light for
excavation purposes. The exception was when, in the search for additional
sheep remains, the excavation was extended into the narrow passage, “Sampa’s
cave’, in the far eastern corner of the grid. There it was found necessary to use
artificial light and this was somewhat less satisfactory.
For purposes of preservation the vertical sections of the excavation have
since been protected by sand-bags.
ARTEFACTUAL FINDS
The artefacts from DK 1 were made of various raw materials. The non-
lithic assemblage consists of bone and shell artefacts and pottery. No wooden
implements were found. Had wooden tools been left at the site they would
probably have been preserved, since preservation of other materials is good.
This is shown by finds of remnant patches of the sea-grass Zostera capensis in
all layers.
As seems usual in the late Holocene coastal midden deposits that have
been excavated, the stone artefacts are limited in the range of forms represented
and in quality of retouch. Had they not been found associated with midden
material many of them might have not been recognized as objects modified by
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA 129
man. For the most part the stone artefacts consist of rough, flaked beach
cobbles and the flake products from such cores. On the other hand, artefacts
manufactured from other materials, particularly in bone and shell, are varied and
formalized and the initial Holocene occupation of DK 1 (layer 12) indicates
the existence of an already established pottery tradition.
All the material in this paper bears the main accession number SAM-—
AA8725. Numbers in the figure legends are those of individual finds from this
excavation.
BONE ARTEFACTS
Introduction
That bone artefacts are well represented at coastal midden sites in the Cape
has been long appreciated. Péringuey (1911: 97) attempted the first systematic
typological analysis of bone artefact collections from shell mounds, caves and
rock-shelters between the Cape Peninsula and the Tsitsikama coast over 60 years
ago. He recorded rare ‘knives’, numerous ‘awls’ and ‘arrow points’, and noted
that it was only on artefacts of bird bone that decorative marks were found.
It is doubtful whether the typological classes of Péringuey still provide a basis
for the adequate description of the range of bone tools found at Cape coastal
sites and his typology is now more of historical interest. Encouraged by
Péringuey, Sharples carried out extensive excavations at Plettenberg Bay in
1917 (Rudner & Rudner 1973: 94) and considerably enlarged the collection
of bone artefacts now housed in the South African Museum. These and subse-
quent excavations, notably by Goodwin (19385) at Oakhurst and Dreyer at
Matjes River (Louw 1960), have confirmed the relatively elaborate technology
of bone-working practised by the coastal dwellers. These earlier collections are,
however, almost unstudied and the paucity of information on context and dating
raises doubts as to the value of detailed study. A renewed phase of excavation
at coastal sites in the last decade promises to provide better-controlled samples
and reassessment of the earlier collections may be possible in relation to the
newly generated samples such as those from Die Kelders.
The typology of the bone artefact sample
Bone artefacts occurred throughout the Holocene deposits at DK 1. Of
the 383 pieces recovered, 238 were whole or broken formal tools and ornaments;
the other 145 pieces were fragments, splinters and teeth showing signs of modi-
fication. One complete tortoise carapace bowl and fragments of many others
were also recovered. Because of the generally good bone preservation at the
site, the only items requiring treatment were a number of exfoliating pieces of
ivory. In direct contrast to the lithic assemblage, most of the bone artefacts
were made to formal designs and this facilitates the interpretation of function.
A high degree of craftmanship is evident in the manufacture of various tool
types from diverse animal bones. Bird bones provided a good source for light
130 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
shafts whilst the denser mammal bone supplied material for more durable tools
such as projectile points and spatulae. Similarly, awls were made mainly from
mammal bone with only occasional examples in bird or fish bone.
Formal tool classes
The following formal classes of bone tools have been recognized and the
frequencies of the finds in the different classes are given in Table 2.
Projectile parts
1. Points (Fig. 10). These were made by shaping both ends and working
most or all of the surface of a bone splinter to form a tool with a finely tapering,
pointed tip at one end and a squared-off butt or blunter point at the other.
They are usually well finished, slender tools with a relatively uniform diameter
for most of their length. The sample from DK I| consists of two size categories:
longer points ranging from 160 to 170 mm in length and having an average
maximum diameter of 6 mm, and smaller points ranging from 40 mm to 100 mm
in length with maximum diameters ranging between 3 and 6 mm. Broken points
have been listed separately in Table 2.
2. Linkshafts (Fig. 11A—D). These are somewhat bigger, thicker and more
cigar-shaped pieces. They often have flat mid-sections due to the shape of the
original bone splinter from which they were made. Broken linkshafts are given
separate listing in Table 2.
3. Unclassified points or linkshafts. These include pieces which fall between
the two recognizable classes and cannot be assigned to one or the other with any
certainty. Broken pieces, usually rounded, thin bone splinters with both ends
missing, that apparently fall into this class have also been listed separately in
Table 2.
The ready division of bone projectile parts into points and linkshafts
suggests a close correspondence to the composite Bushman reed arrows des-
cribed by Goodwin & Van Riet Lowe (1929: 254): ‘The foremost part consists
of the point, a splinter of bone rounded, and sharpened at the forward end,
measuring about 7 cm in length by 4 mm at its greatest thickness. The butt,
which is squared off, is bound into a reed collar, and rests directly against the
forward point of the linkshaft, which is also bound into the reed collar. The
collar usually measures 15 mm in length by 7 mm diameter. The linkshaft con-
sists of a rounded splinter of bone, pointed at each end, and measuring some
6 cm in length by 1 cm in thickness. The hinder end is inserted into the reed
shaft of the arrow, which measures perhaps 40 cm in length. The point is
poisoned and the whole foreshaft can be reversed in the reed arrow to guard
the poisoned point when not in use.’
Spatulae
These are made of long pieces of bone and have been generally assumed
to be skin-working tools. They are subdivided into the following types.
131
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA
cm
Fig. 10. Bone points: size range. A. SAM-AA1930 layer 2. B. SAM-AA1542 layer 2.
C. SAM-AA2674 layer 5. D. SAM-AA316 layer 12. E. SAM-—AA2979 layer 1.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
132
50
9°€
G Mis
‘0
8°0
£0
eal
9°€
9°T
9°T
S17
‘0
Gal
OT
V7
LG
7
8°0
p's
9°¢
(a
vY
0104
puoss
7o
[210L WCC
ST Cll Of OT
L My Y)
aes 7G ae cagh
I GI! I I
G — —— ——)
I I cage Sa
€ 61 7¢ I
mee aC eso
— G — —
— G — —
— G — —
=o Peel I C
— G — —
— I — —
“syusWodu :ou0g
T ATAV
oil
9
‘TI pue OJ s19ke] Jo uonoune ,
[®}0} pueis Jo %
; [210
SSUII “S}JUDWILUIO
saqn} ‘s}UsUIeUIO
SNOLIVA Pozi,
" (opeseiq) ATOAL pozijyQ
: Y}99} Pozi)
winus9}s pozlnQ
oeindeoss poz
siajul[ds pozynn
Q[poou “s|MY
UsyOIQ ‘S[MY
sJOUM “S[MY
,suoods,
* usyolq “punol ‘orjnyedg
sjoyM “punol ‘ovjnyedg
usyoIg “yey ‘aepnyedsg
gjoymM “yey ‘oernyedg
UdYOIQ ‘S}JeysyUl] IO syurod a[qissog
JOY ‘s}JeysyUl] JO syurod s][qissog
; usyorg ‘s1yeysyurT
STOYM “s}yeysyurT
" Udyog ‘s}UIOg
QJOUM “S}UIOg
AaddvT
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA
133
1. Flat spatulae (Fig. 12A—B) which are made of the ribs of large mammals,
with one end square, bevelled and polished by usage; the size range lies between
110 and 220 mm.
2. Round spatulae (Fig. 12C—E) which are similar to the above but round,
sometimes made of ivory with blunt, not chisel-edged, ends; the size range lies
between 100 and 140 mm.
Spoons
Two pieces of rib, shaped into ‘spoons’, were found in the upper midden
layers. The more finely worked one (Fig. 13A) came from layer 2, where it was
=a
Fig. 11. Incised bone. Linkshafts A-D. A. SAM-AA1358 layer 12. B. SAM-AA1034
layer 12. C. SAM-AA1540 layer 2. D. SAM-AA3314 layer 2. E. Notched, hollow bird bone,
SAM-AA2438 layer 5.
134 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 12. Bone spatulae. Flat, made of ribs: A. SAM-AA3285 layer 2. B. SAM-AA3397
layer 2.
Rounded, made of ivory: C. SAM-AA2022 layer 7. D. SAM-AA1685 layer 7.
E. SAM-AA753 layer 10.
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA 135
found in close proximity to the small tortoise carapace bowl illustrated in
Figure 19. The other ‘spoon’, less well shaped (Fig. 13B), came from layer 1.
Awls
This category includes all tools made by sharpening one end of a bone
fragment to a point suitable for piercing holes. There is considerable variation
in size, kind of bone, and the degree of finish. The emphasis is always on the
point which in many examples is polished by use and it is rarely that the rest
of the tool shows any modification. Awls have been subdivided into the follow-
ing categories.
1. Common awls (Fig. 14C—N) which include those with a shaft considerably
thicker than their points.
2. Needle awls (Fig. 14A-B) which are small, thin, finely tapering pieces
with a mean overall diameter of 1-2 mm. They are classed separately from
common awls by virtue of their thinness which would have precluded their use
for the same purposes as common awils.
cm
Fig. 13. Bone ‘spoons’. A. SAM-AA210 layer 2. B. SAM-AA2013 layer 1.
136 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 14. Bone awls showing range in shape and size. A. Needle awl, SAM-AA2579 layer 10.
B. Needle awl, SAM-AA1164 layer 6. C. SAM-AA1541 layer 2. D. SAM-AA450 layer 6.
E. Bird-bone awl, SAM-AA1842 layer 1. F. SAM—AA291 layer 10. G. SAM-AA443 layer 10.
H. SAM-AA284 layer 10. I. SAM-AA273 layer 10. J. SAM-AA1869 layer 1.
K. SAM-AA1657 layer 1. L. SAM-AA3409 layer 2, M. SAM-AA1561 layer 1.
N. SAM-AA1359 layer 12.
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA 137
Utilized pieces
This category includes ivory, bird, fish and mammal bone, all of which
bear evidence of having been worked to some extent.
1. Modified fragments (Fig. 15) of mammal bone which show modification
along their length by flaking, in addition to polish at their ends; this pattern of
usage suggests their function as skin-working implements.
2. Scapulae of sheep (Fig. 16) and a possible seal sternum that show
utilization on the long edges; the edge damage suggests that these tools were
used for scraping.
3. Animal teeth consisting of a leopard tooth (Fig. 17A), a baboon tooth
(Fig. 17B), and a pig tusk, which show signs of utilization on their crowns.
4. Miscellaneous utilized pieces consisting of fragments of other pieces,
unfinished pieces, possible off-cuts, and pieces bearing signs of random usage.
Ornaments
1. Tubes (Fig. 18A—B) are cut lengths of hollow bone ranging in size from
20 5 mm to 80 X 10 mm. Both bird and mammal bones were used. Ends
often retain evidence of having been snap-broken after ring-grooving (Fig. 18C).
Some of these pieces are highly polished, possibly as a result of having been
used as beads.
2. Rings (Fig. 18D) are flat pieces made of the cross-section of hollow
bone. Included here is a possible bracelet of ivory. Ivory does not preserve well,
tending to break up into concentric rings, and pieces of ‘rotten’ (weathered)
ivory were recovered from layer 2.
Tortoise carapace bowls
Bowls or parts of bowls were found in almost all layers. These were made
by removing the plastron, flattening the spinal protrusions, and rounding and
smoothing the resulting edge of the bowl. The finds are listed in Table 3, and
an example is shown in Figure 19. Counts are given in terms of complete bowls,
broken bowls (where about half the bowl is preserved), and bowl fragments,
which include modified pieces of carapace (between one and five plates) that
show the characteristic tooling marks or working of a bowl. The bowl fragments
have been studied in detail to determine whether they could have come from
one of more bowls in any level. The approximate count of bowls represented
by modified carapace fragments is included in the total bowl counts.
Discussion of the bone artefacts
From Table 2 it can be seen that awls (118) are by far the most common
type of bone tool. Parts of projectile points, arrow-heads, linkshafts, bowls and
spatulae are also well represented. The formal artefacts are not restricted to
any horizon. Layers 2, 5 and 12 yielded relatively more projectile pieces and in
layer 2 the greatest variety of points was found. Needle awls are not common
138 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
and appear to be restricted to the layers below layer 4. Their apparent absence
from the upper layers may, however, be due to sampling factors. There is some
suggestion of a time trend in the replacement of the round form of spatula by
the flat form above layer 4, and the latter form is best represented in layer 2.
There are certainly stylistic changes in the pottery between the lower and upper
levels of the midden accumulation, and parallel changes in the bone tools would
not be unexpected.
WH
Oo l) Loe
Sas
"(Mes
«£ Pee
Nica
Eos
Cs
SSS SSS
SSS SO
RS eS SE TN
_——- as ===) SOBRE SSS s8 mm
FSS SS See = Ayame el SSS
=== 5. >. a= \S=SS$65 1 EBLE
- a = 2 —————— =
Sr : —— a ne
Ss eee eS :
SE FE LI es == ane
ZZ 7 eo ee
a ES OT
EE ae ee a ee LS a
Toa = —
Fig. 15 Tools possibly used as spatulae. A. Ivory, SAM-AA3315 layer 2. B. Bone,
SAM-AA330 layer 4. C. Bone, SAM—AA3289 layer 2.
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA 139
cm
Fig. 16. Utilized sheep scapula, SAM-AA856 layer 2.
The functional interpretation of the bone points and linkshafts would
seem to be well supported by ethnographic analogy. The composite arrow-head
was known historically to have been widely diffused in southern Africa and this
is suggestive of its being in use for a long time. It is a specialized artefact asso-
ciated with the use of a weak bow and relying rather on the lethal effect of
poisons than of penetration. The artefactual bone finds give direct evidence for
this kind of projectile hunting which was usually directed at the medium and
larger antelope. In addition to the more or less uniform length (c. 70 mm) of
the arrow points found throughout the deposit, layer 2 contained two long
arrow-heads (Fig. 10) of about twice the normal length (195-205 mm) which
may have been directly fitted on to a wooden point such as that from Scott’s
Cave in the eastern Cape (Deacon & Deacon 1963: 114-151). One broken and
TABLE 3
Bone: tortoise carapace bowls.
Bowls
represented
Modified by modified Total
Layer Complete Broken fragments fragments bowls
1 =e ahd ae, a 2s
ern 1 — 6 2 3
Si oe: — 2 8 4 6
4. — ae 11 3 5
Sy: = = = = a
G — — 1 — —
Teh: — 1 — — 1
8. — 1 — = 1
8) Vs — — 1 — —_
OM — 4 — 2 6
1s: — 1 +20 4 5
15d. — = = — —
DOE = — — D, 2
Total 1 11 1 7/ +29
* Includes the Testudo geometrica carapace.
140 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
: Yip, arent)
= Yyjyyp oyanpnn ll
aris YL) YUP
enn
0 3
cm
Fig. 17. Utilized animal teeth. A. Leopard tooth, SAM—AA1846 layer 12. B. Baboon tooth,
SAM-AA1847 layer 12.
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA 141
four complete linkshafts show interesting decoration, which is incised and
varies from piece to piece (Fig. 11A—D); the decorations are not directly func-
tional and may well be marks of ownership.
The large number of awls suggests that the manufacture of skin garments
was important. The slender needle awls may have had a different function and,
indeed, they would have been most suitable for sewing the thin skins of dune
mole-rats, but would have been too fragile for working the heavier skins of
seal or sheep. The apparent absence of needle awls in the upper layers may
also be explained by a lesser demand for dune mole-rat skins when sheep skins
became more readily available.
The category of utilized bone includes a notched bird bone shaft (Fig. 11E)
which is noteworthy because of its similarity to at least two other such incised
bone artefacts from other sites along the south-western Cape coast (Maggs &
Speed 1967: 83; Van Noten 1974: 129). This suggests that it may be of value
to look for repeated incised patterns in Cape coastal sites and wider study may
offer some explanation of their function. The few examples of animal teeth
included in the utilized bone category show utilization marks on restricted
surfaces and are somewhat anomalous ‘osteodontokeratic’ elements. The utiliza-
tion marks on these teeth are in marked contrast to the other implements in
this category which do not show comparable localization of wear.
Ornaments do not constitute an important part of the bone industry.
Tubes were made by snapping the base of ring-cut shafts (Fig. 18C), using a
technique similar to that used for working wood at Melkhoutboom Cave,
eastern Cape (Deacon, H. J. 1969: 149). These similarities suggest that the
extensive bone industry at DK 1 to some extent replaced the use of wood at
more inland sites.
The use of tortoise carapace bowls as containers is supported by ethno-
graphic observations and amongst groups such as the Nharo Bushmen these
are still in use as receptacles for aromatic powders. They are often decorated
and worn on a thong round the neck (Steyn 1971: 293). There is also evidence
of their use as food receptacles (E. M. Shaw pers. comm.). They may have
served both purposes at DK 1 as is shown by the presence of a bored carapace
fragment in layer 7, the occurrence of four bowls in close association in layer 3,
and the association of a bone ‘spoon’ (Fig. 13A) with a further bowl in layer 2.
Not all the tortoise remains found at the site were the result of bowl-making;
a large number of carapace fragments do not show modification, and tortoises
are a well-known source of food. Of interest, and included among the bowls,
is a broken example made of the carapace of Testudo geometrica. The present
known distribution of this now rare species is restricted approximately to the
lowland areas (below 300 m) between Piketberg, Worcester and Gordon’s Bay
(R. Rau pers. comm.). Although the past distribution of 7. geometrica is
unknown, the occurrence of a carapace of this species at DK 1 may indicate
the extent of the seasonal (?) round of the cave occupants, or contact with other
groups from these areas.
142 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
cm
Fig. 18. Bone ornaments. A. Bird bone tubes, SAM-AA2691 layer 12. B. Polished tube,
SAM-—AA2093 layer 12. C. Snapped tube showing ring grooving, SAM—AA2087 layer 12.
D. Bone ring, SAM-AA1186 layer 12.
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA 143
cm
Fig. 19. Tortoise carapace bowl, SAM-—AA209 layer 2.
Conclusions
That the sample of bone artefacts from Die Kelders gives a reasonably
full picture of the bone tool technology of the Cape coast dwellers is supported
by the evidence from less well-provenanced samples in museum collections.
Bone fish gorges, which have been found at other coastal sites, e.g. Robberg
(R. R. Inskeep pers. comm.), Elands Bay (C. Poggenpoel & J. E. Parkington
pers. comm.) and Byneskranskop (Schweitzer & Wilson 1978) are, however,
absent from the sample. Although published evidence is at present largely
lacking, it seems that the use of fish gorges was not known in the time covered
by the DK 1 deposits, those found at the other sites occurring in deposits dated
to about 10000 years B.P. The general level of functional interpretation of the
bone artefacts does not pose difficulty and categories such as projectile points
and tortoise bowls have good ethnographic analogies. It is more difficult to
ascribe specific functions to categories such as the piercing artefacts (e.g. awls
and needle awls) and spatulae. Certainly awls occur in very high frequencies
at coastal sites and this is suggestive of their use in some activity related to
occupation of the coastal zone. One possibility suggested above is maintenance
and manufacture of clothing, but direct evidence, such as the remains of skin
garments, is lacking.
SHELL ARTEFACTS
Introduction
The use of shells as ornaments is a fairly universal practice and may be
expected at coastal sites such as Die Kelders where suitable shells could be
readily collected. Not only have isolated shell ornaments been recovered at
144 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
sites on the Cape coast, but also shell beads and other ornaments have been
found in direct association with prehistoric human burials (Péringuey 1911:
162). Shells were also modified to serve as artefacts (Goodwin 1938a: 216,
19385: 307-309; Louw 1960: 101-103; Van Noten 1974: 129, fig. 6). With few
exceptions the shells used for ornaments and artefacts are not the by-products
of shell collecting for food but rather the result of selective collecting aimed
specifically at utilization of the shell itself.
Description of the shell artefacts in the midden
The artefactual shell can be discussed under the headings ornaments,
containers, and tools.
Ornaments
1. Perforated shells (Fig. 20)
The occurrences of perforated shell ornaments are listed in Table 4.
Conus spp could not be identified beyond genus level owing to loss of
colour and shell wall. “Cones are predominantly a tropical/semi-tropical group.
Three species occur on the cold west coast, the numbers increasing, as in
cowries, aS one moves up the east coast’ (Kensley 1973: 204). It is assumed that
the relative scarcity of this genus in the deposit (1,9 % of the total for perforated
shell, Table 4) reflects the geographical situation of DK 1 near the western limits
of its habitat. A noticeable feature of the Conus shells recovered from the
excavation is that thirty-four of the total of thirty-eight were perforated by
means of a filing process which resulted in a clearly defined V-shaped notching
in the shell (Fig. 20A). The remaining four shells, which comprise the entire
Conus sample of layer 12, were all perforated by means of jagged, punched
holes (Fig. 20B), the more usual method of perforation in other shells. A detailed
layer count of Conus shells set out in Table 5 shows them to have been more or
less evenly distributed throughout the deposit but with a peak in layer 4. File-
perforated Conus shells were found at Matjies River in layer D (Louw 1960: 96,
fig. 34) and at other southern Cape sites.
Marginella are small shells with four characteristic pleats on the columella.
That ‘the mantle can be reflected over the shell when the animal is extended,
and keep the surface polished’ (Barnard 1951: 59) would have enhanced the
shell’s value as an ornament.
Bullia are the conical plough shells frequently to be seen ‘ploughing’ the
surface of sandy beaches along the water-line. Their shells comprise some
18 per cent of the total perforated shell assemblage and they are listed in Table 4
as two separate species, both of which are found on sandy beaches close to
DK 1. The species have been further subdivided into size categories to determine
any size preferences. Small (< 2,0 cm) B. /aevissima appear to have been pre-
ferred in the upper layers, while the larger (> 2,5 cm) B. digitalis were preferred
in layers 7 and 12. The generally low and variable frequencies do not, however,
lend themselves to more than mere observation. It should also be borne in mind,
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA 145
ein
Fig. 20. Perforated shells. A. Conus perforated by filing, SAM—AA334 layer 4. B. Conus
perforated by punching, SAM-AA3161 layer 12. C. Glycimeris perforated by filing, SAM-—
AA124 layer 2. D. Glycimeris perforated by punching, SAM—AA206 layer 2. E. Glycimeris
ochre-stained ‘necklace’, SAM—AA2437-2514 layer 1.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
146
=a a ee ee eee
POISAOSOI S[[BYS poyes1ojsiod
[®}0} Jo Jakey Aq %
[®10} IoAeT
13YIO
(e}UYep) 177ayanb staaunddpH
; HYIO4 DYOIIAT
puonuas DI1J0N
dds vapidty
paubjdaz unioyd
dds nuadnuing
DUDISSNDAY DSSON
"WO 7 < DUIISSIAaD] “g
"WO 7 > DUISSIAaD] “g
" Wd ¢°T < SIDILSIP “g
Wd ¢°% > SyDIsIp vying
dds nyauisinpy
* dds snuojd
JOACT
6 66 S00 SIO SO soO +rOL Li sz Ey OS! 66 Vil Sse @Or iin <e
6°66 C107 (4 v Ol Olt £6 ¢ $8 ce L/S 6c Fh 002 6cc TTT
8° 9¢ = a, el oe hse tS cI y) c 8 C € Cc
8°6 L6l I t I I I ae eS Ol I = 9 IT Lvl Ol
9°8 VL pass ie I 4 Ie see cf SI OS (44 LI 6 8
v0 8 a et I I ppt es See ae ae me 2 v C
‘0 Ol Ey age Seas I € Se ee LV. age Eee I ip tee ace!
Z0 v ae pat Games C oe es oR ne = eee © aaa a a C me
ia (46 == ak I € v oe I Vv or gall ¢ £3 C !
TSS ChE == appt OcI I¢ € us ISI GS GE The «OP 88 IG
pT 6c I I I 6 C 3 I 9 oe ee S Fe ae Noah,
€°8 wy)! ae Te I 9 I I I 6 — Sl 96 SI wb S
6V 66 = ae ae 6¢ 9 aa 2° 9€ ee | L Cc 4 6
9°¢ ted, = ree cl IT I 6 vl I € 6 I Sas HL
Gal 6 — So) oa C ee Sie Pea ao ae Sees I I y) C
61 8E ae earn 4 C am nC L II I cl ¢ I € ee oe ts
PEEEINGO SE ENON, ORGS GIS cl OO 6 8 L 9 g v € C I
s]jous
po}e10jiod
[e103
Jo sarsads
hq %
aa eee
"S]JoYs poyesojsod :]Joys ourreyy
p IIav ye
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA 147
TABLE 5
Marine shell: Conus.
Filed
Perforated Perforated but not Layer
Layer by filing by piercing perforated Unperforated total
1 2 1 — — 3
D 1 — — — 1
3 5 — 1 — 6
4 12 — — — Ww
5) 1 — — if 2
6 1 — _- -— 1
7 7 — — — 7
8 2 — — — D)
9 a ae ae ao =
10 1 if — — )
12 — 4 — 1 5
Class total 32 6 1 y) 4]
Bead total . 38
as in the case of the Glycimeris ‘necklace’ (see below), that deliberate selection
of graded shell sizes would be obscured by the subdivisions made.
Nassa kraussiana, a small gastropod which is found mainly from Still Bay
to Mozambique (that is, from some 180 km further east than Die Kelders),
attains a size of 6 X 4,7 mm (Kensley 1973: 160) and is certainly too small
for food. It is abundant in weed-beds that are exposed at low tide on the muddy
banks of estuaries (Day 1969: 167). A few species listed under Nassa spp belong
to species other than NV. kraussiana. Nassa beads are well known from coastal
and inland sites along the southern Cape coast, and at Scott’s Cave (Deacon
& Deacon 1963: 206), Wilton (Deacon, J. 1969: 1972), Melkhoutboom (Deacon,
H. J. 1976: 53-54), and Boomplaas (Deacon, H. J. et al. 1978: 54), for example,
are found in horizons related to occupations dating from the early Holocene
onwards. These are numerically the largest component of the perforated shell
ornaments at DK 1 (55,2% of the total, Table 4).
Burnupena spp belong to the family Buccinidae or whelks. All are either
predators or scavengers and form an important unit in the ecology of the
intertidal rocky shores, especially around the Cape (Kensley 1973: 152). They
are of a size (up to 40 mm) suitable for food, though, unlike their larger counter-
parts in Europe (Buccinium undatum), they have never been commercially
exploited in historical times. They are included in Table 4 only where the
perforations appear to have been deliberately made. As the bulk of these shells
are unperforated, they have been included in Table 20, which details the fre-
quencies of marine shell from the sieved bulk samples.
Phalium zeylanica belongs to the family of ‘helmet shells’. It has a number
of knobs around the shoulder and is strongly built. These gastropods burrow
just below the surface of sheltered sands at low-water spring tides (Day 1969:
148 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
167). Two of the four shells recovered came from layer 2, the others from
layer 12 (Table 4).
The family Cypraeidae or cowries, ‘form one of the best known families of
molluscs because of their colourful and glossy shells’ (Kensley 1973: 100).
Cowries are essentially tropical and no species occur on the west coast. Three
species occur in False Bay and the number increases as one moves up the coast
(Kensley 1973: 100). The Cypraea listed in Table 4 cannot be identified further
than genus level owing to loss of colour and shell wall.
Natica genuana belongs to the family Naticidae or ‘necklace shells’, a name
which is reportedly derived either from the necklace-like ornamentation found
in some species, or from the shape of the spawn (Barnard 1951: 104). However,
perhaps the reason is their use in necklaces. These shellfish are sand or mud
dwellers; like Bullia they are predators and it is considered unlikely that they
were collected for food.
Tricolia kochii is only slightly larger than Nassa and, after Glycimeris, the
next most common gastropod. Maximum length is about 12 mm (Kensley 1973:
52), but the size of specimens at DK 1 are generally a few millimetres below this.
Glycimeris queketti is the only member of the family Mytilidae (mussels)
found at DK 1 to have been deliberately perforated for stringing. Valves are
of various sizes and holes show signs of enlargement by punching or filing.
The frequencies given in Table 4 are only for shells in which the perforation
could definitely be termed artefactual. Fifty-three valves with apparently
natural openings, which may none the less have been used, are included in
the contents in Table 6, but are excluded from the grand total of 197 shells with
large, punched holes or filed apertures (Fig. 20C—E). Of this total, forty-two
valves were found heavily ochre-stained and lying very close together in the
deposit in layer 2 (Fig. 20E, not, however, as illustrated).
In Table 4 the category ‘other’ is made up mainly of Thais spp, common
in the intertidal zone, and Turbo spp. These, with a few shells of other genera
that complete the total, do not contribute meaningfully to the assemblage as a
whole.
2. Perforated discs and pendants (Fig. 21)
Round and oval discs made of the nacreous shell of Turbo sarmaticus
varying in size from 6 X 8 mm to 10 X 12 mm form the main finds in this
category (Table 7), In all cases the outside edges were carefully worked. This
is shown in Figure 21M-—O which also shows the circular groove marks left
by the drill used for boring the aperture. The holes were always drilled from
the inside of the shell, but in a number of cases were completed by drilling from
the outside. The depth of the groove marks indicates that the boring tool must
have had a very short, sharp point. Evidence for the use of shell discs in neck-
laces was recently found at a site near Cape St Francis, eastern Cape (Thackeray
& Feast 1974: 92, fig. 1), where twenty-seven similar discs made of T. sarmaticus
were found round the cervical vertebrae of a midden burial. A tibia from the
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA 149
TABLE 6
Marine shell: perforated Glycimeris.
Natural
Obviously opening CAO}
enlarged Filed (possibly Layer grand
Layer aperture opening utilized) total total
ae 8 2 3 10 5,1
oe 143* 4 16 147 74,6
oe 9 2 5) i 5,6
Aa 3 3 3 6 2,8
ae — = 1 = =
6. 1 — 2 1 0,5
yo 7 3 2 10 Spi
Se 2 3 D 5 je)
9, — = 3 — =
10 . 1 — 2 1 0,5
12a 1 — 11 1 0,5
De. : 3 — 1 3 i155)
Ashy soil — 1 — 1 0,5
22e> — — 2, — =
Grand
Class total . : : : yds 19 (53) total 197 99,9
* Including 42 ochre-stained shells found associated.
burial has been radiocarbon dated to 5180 +65 years B.P. (Pta—1089)
(De Villiers 1974: 91).
In addition to small perforated discs (or ‘buttons’, Fig. 21E-H, J—L), the
shell ornaments also include larger pendants which have a more striking
appearance. These are also made mainly of 7. sarmaticus shell and are more
common in the lower layers of the deposit (Table 7). They vary in size and
shape (Fig. 21B—D, I, M-—O) but most are oval with one or two holes drilled
close to one end. The largest and possibly most distinctive item is a round pen-
dant made of Haliotis midae which has one hole drilled just off centre (Fig. 21A).
3. Marine shell beads (Fig. 22A—G)
The simplest manufactured marine shell ornaments at DK 1 are thin, flat
nacre beads, bored and rubbed down to an oval or round shape (Fig. 22A-G),
which apparently were manufactured in the same way as ostrich egg-shell beads,
as described by Goodwin (19385: 309). There were seventeen such beads distri-
buted throughout the sequence.
4. Ostrich egg-shell beads (Fig. 22H-K)
These are common at all Cape Holocene sites and are also found distributed
throughout the DK 1 midden sequence (Fig. 22 H-K). Many show ochre
staining. The numbers of beads in the sample and egg-shell fragments from
150 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
which they could have been made are given in Table 8. The numbers in them-
selves have reduced significance when it is appreciated that a modern Bushman
necklace requires about five ostrich egg-shell beads per centimetre of string
length. From this it can be calculated that some 2 000 beads would be required
for a typical multi-stranded necklace or about 8 000 beads for an apron. The
large numbers of ostrich egg-shell beads at a site such as DK 1 are thus explained.
Containers
Both ostrich egg-shell and marine shell recovered from DK 1 represent
material apparently used as containers. The ostrich egg-shell fragments were
worked to a concave edge which is thought to have formed part of the original
aperture of a water container (Fig. 22L). The use of such containers has been
Fig. 21. Shell pendants and ‘buttons’. A. SAM—AA2283 layer 12. B. SAM-AA3439 layer 12.
C. SAM-AA1206 layer 12. D. SAM-AA287 layer 10. E. SAM-AA3166 layer 10.
F—H. Unprovenanced. I. SAM-AA521 layer 5. J. Unprovenanced. K. SAM—-AA3144
layer 7. L. SAM-AA1079 layer 7. M. SAM-AAS521 layer 5. N. SAM-AA1206 layer 12.
O. SAM-AA1306 layer 12.
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA
Fig. 22. Shell beads. Marine: A. SAM-—AA357 layer 7. B. SAM-AA358 layer 7.
C. SAM-AA366 layer 7. D. SAM-AAS533 layer 7. E. SAM-AA2585 layer 10.
F, SAM-AA678 layer 12. G. SAM-AA1688 layer 7.
Ostrich egg-shell: H. SAM-AA477 layer 7. I. SAM-AA2139 layer 12. J. SAM-AA232
layer 2. K. SAM-AA1572 layer 12. L. SAM-AA1664 layer 12.
151
152
Class total
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
TABLE 7
Marine shell: pendants.
Double
perforated Single Double Broken
‘button’ holed holed Unperforated bored
pendants pendants pendants pendants pieces
2 ee eee =.
2 2 — 1 1
6 = xe es Bee
1 1 — — —
7 1 1 — 3
2 1 1 1 1
fees ee ae 1 ate
5 2 — — 1
25 7 5 3 6
Large
round
pendant
Layer
total
BS poran| ral ar
well attested in numerous ethnographic and archaeological reports (see Good-
win 1938b: 252). Frequencies of marine shells which are considered to have
served as ochre receptacles are listed in Table 9. With few exceptions these
comprise fairly large (8 X 5,5 cm to 10,5 X 11 cm) Patella argenvillei. All show
heavy ochre staining on the inside but no other modification. Some ten to
fifteen unbroken Haliotis midae shells were found to contain semi-articulated
fish bones. Although this association may be fortuitous in a midden where
there are numerous fish remains, it is worth noting. Examination of the H. midae
shells in the laboratory showed the edge of one to have been ground smooth
Layer
OMA IDNUMPWNe
TABLE 8
Ostrich egg-shell: beads and fragments.
Beads Fragments
Finished Unfinished No. Mass (g)
90 — 41 33,6
228 5 46 36,2
129 — 35 33,9
203 — 86 102,7
91 — 75 78,8
33 — 12 10,6
388 y) 196 188,2
61 1 52 67,2
70 1 68 68,9
. 250 — 175 215,0
. 2850 16 1176 1 043,7
2p — 13 30,8
1 hee ee i
7 — 78 150,6
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA 153
TABLE 9
Marine shell: ochre containers.
Patella Patella Choromytilus|
Layer argenvillei compressa Perna Total
OF ee ee 1 — — 1
OKA Oe 3 — 4 7
Oe oe aan 8* 1 — 9
Tlie Ne aria 1 — ~— 1
hotales 255% 13 1 4 18
* Includes one broken container.
and round and thus clearly to have been modified as an artefact. These large
shellfish are edible and the shells themselves, despite their branchial holes, have
obvious potential for use as containers.
Shell tools
Shell implements in the form of edge-trimmed Donax serra valves and
Choromytilus meridionalis ‘crescents’ were first observed and recognized by
Goodwin at Klipkop cave (Goodwin 1938a: 216) and at Oakhurst (Goodwin
1938b: 307-309). Louw (1960: 11, fig. 44) recovered similar ‘crescents’ at
Matjies River and Van Noten (1974: 129, fig. 6) reported finding a Donax
‘scraper’ at Gordon’s Bay.
1. Donax serra ‘scrapers’ (Fig. 23)
In contrast to the “one or two’ trimmed Donax pieces found in each layer
by Goodwin at Oakhurst, the Die Kelders sample yielded close to 1 600 of
these. The frequency distribution is given in Table 10. All specimens show
steep working (or damage) on all or part of their edges. The retouch appears
to have been deliberate and resulted in the formation of scraper-like edges. By
far the greatest number of these artefacts occurs in layer 12 (about 50°). The
function of these implements is not known, but it is apparent that Donax shells
were collected primarily for use as artefacts because unworked valves are rare.
This is reflected in the low frequencies shown in Table 20, which lists shellfish
food frequencies from individual layers. Unmodified Donax shells occur in
only five out of a total of forty-one samples and are limited to layers 10 and 12.
2. Shell ‘crescents’ (Fig. 24)
Delicate ‘crescents’ made of Choromytilus meridionalis were more difficult
to identify. These thin and brittle artefacts are difficult to distinguish from
naturally broken mussel shells, and it was questioned whether they formed a
valid category of implements. Microscopic study of the arc edge has since
revealed that at least some such ‘crescents’ may have been modified by grinding
(as opposed to flaking as is the case with stone crescents) (Fig. 24G). They do
154 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
TABLE 10
Marine shell: Donax, utilized or worked.
Yo Of
Layer Frequency grand total
1 50 3)
Dy 19 1,2
3 24 5
4 76 4,8
5 51 3) 7)
6 20 1,3
7 289 18,3
8 33 Dil
9 a ae
10 104 6,6
1) 797 50,6
15a 10 0,64
15b 4 0,25
20 5 0,3
DD) We : : 3 , ; 47 3,0
pl) : ‘ ; : 4 36 2,3
WHE 6 ‘ F : 5 é 11 0,7
Grand total . : : s 576 100,0
Fig. 23. Edge-trimmed Donax serra valves.
A. SAM-AA1239 layer 12. B. SAM-AA1113
layer 12.
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA 3)
cm
Fig. 24. Choromytilus ‘crescents’. A. SAM-AA3469 layer 2. B. SAM-AA3470 layer 2.
C. SAM-AA3471 layer 12. D. SAM-AA3472 layer 2. E. SAM-AA3473 layer 12.
F. SAM-AA3474 layer 1. G. SAM-AA1075 layer 12.
not, however, form a significant part of the assemblage and counts were not
made.
Discussion of the shell artefacts
The variety of shells used as ornaments is striking and it is also clear that
the human behaviour implicit in the selection of specific species and the mode of
working these is strongly patterned. Notable here is the occurrence of Nassa
beads in quantity at this site, as at sites along the whole southern Cape, and the
habit of filing out notches in Conus shells, which is also widespread. At present,
the site’s shell ornaments would seem only to indicate similarities with sites in
the areas to the east, but the Die Kelders data will become more meaningful
when there are fuller reports on shell finds from sites on the west and east coasts
as well as inland; their distribution in both time and space could be informative
of aspects of cultural stability and continuity, and possibly also trade. It seems
well established in this study that shells were useful for purposes other than
ornaments although shell ‘crescents’ remain a somewhat dubious entity.
POTTERY
Introduction
The pottery from Die Kelders was found throughout the top member,
except layers 6 and 8. The sample is relatively large and is noteworthy for the
unexpected range of shapes and the high quality of most of the material. A total
of 1 118 sherds recovered by excavation was reduced to 810 after joining as
many sherds as possible in an attempt to reconstruct the original vessel forms.
The remains of at least 46 vessels are represented, with 7 sufficiently complete
for their reconstructed forms to be drawn, and another 2 to be partly
reconstructed.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
156
“SUOISNOUI (194}0 puke) Z}IeNb YIM SpIOYs Z] JOA] JOJ spiejop = (b)z]I
“A[UO SUOISNISUT 9U0}S)][IS/S[BYS YA SpIOYS ZT] JOALT IOJ sjrejop = (S)Z]I
“yIUN & Se ZT] JOALT IOJ SpIeJOp = (L)ZI “SION
10 + O'S 06P Lcs 6cL (b)Z1
70 + 69 cel Srl Liz (S)ZI
TO + S°s €c9 CLO 946 (L)ZI
EO F L’S 8 Or Or Or
SOF S*¢ v v v 6
an’ oy = as 8
v0 F ¥°9 8I 0¢ 0¢ L
=e 3 = a 9
10 +78 € € € ¢
£0 + 9p S S S v
50 + €°9 6 6 6 €
50 F 6S 6L v8 SIT C
LO F 7S € € € I
pajosorJap saspq sjnods Spdays Ulld
"oS FX SJaSSAA
(sud suipnjaxa) SJASSAA PAJINAJSUOIAA pajanajsuoray J1sousvIpo sumiol pajpavoxa
(Wu) ssauy21Y41 UDA Ul papnjoul Jou Spdays jonplAipuy /010L, Aayfo /019, AOADT
Se [DIOL
J1JSsousvIp 1010,
“SpJoys Jo sisAyeue : A19}}0g
IT dav
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA S77,
The analysis of the pottery is given in three tables. Table 11 analyses the
layer occurrence and type of the sherds and gives the range of sherd thickness.
Table 12 analyses rim sherd form, and Table 13 is a descriptive analysis of the
reconstructed vessel from the main pottery-bearing layers, 12 and 2.
TABLE 12
Pottery: analysis of rim sherds.
Layer 2 7 10 12s 12q
Type
Plain-rounded
Plain-squared .
Tapered-rounded
Tapered-squared
Externally ridged-rounded
Externally ridged-squared
Everted-rounded
Everted-squared
Inverted-rounded .
Inverted-squared
Half-rounded internally
Half-rounded externally
SAN N22 SoS >
nO i a oe Se lO ny
Note. Rim sherds clearly part of the same pot are counted as one, even if not joined, except
in the case of the layer 2 and layer 12s externally ridged sherds, although these are
probably parts of the same pots.
TABLE 13
Pottery: analysis of reconstructed vessels.
Rim Body Mean Approx. Measurement
Height diam. diam. thickness capacity ratios
Layer No. Figs. Form mm mm mm mm litres H/D D/R
12 ss WV 25A,.. pot 195 170 220 5 3,4 0,89 1,29
26
Da 2SB pot 150 170 190 4 1,8 0,79 1,12
Di
3 25C;, “pot 145 110 130 5 1,0 1,11 1,18
28
4 25D bowl — 220 225 5 — — 1,02
5 25E bowl — 215 235 6 — — 1,09
6 25F bowl 130 205 215 6 2,4 0,60 1,05
7 25G_ pot 155 170 200 6 DT 0,77 1,18
8 25H bowl 140 220 230 qd 2,8 0,61 1,04
Di 1 30-32 pot 220 70 195 5 2,9 ile Abs
Note. 1. All dimensions are calculated from the outside of the pot, and to the nearest 5 mm.
2. Dimensions are calculated from the graphic reconstructions where actual measure-
ment has not been possible.
3. Volumetry based on calculation formulae in Ericson & Stickel (1973). Calculations
are based on external dimensions less mean thickness and allow 10 mm empty
from the rim, or to the rim trimming groove in nos 12.1 and 12.2, and in no. 2.1
to the centre of the higher boss (175 mm from base).
4. The mean thickness of no. 12.8 was calculated by measurements taken at seventeen
points (approx. 10 mm apart) along the drawn profile of the bowl.
5. Ratio: H = vessel height, D = maximum body diameter, R = rim diameter.
158 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
The materials and methods used in the manufacture of pottery have been
discussed by Rudner (1968: 442-447) and the technical aspects of the DK 1
pottery are dealt with on a general level only, since the complex methods of
physical analysis are considered to be beyond the scope of this report. Analysis
is thus confined to selected attributes such as sherd frequencies, thickness, rim
and vessel morphology. Of interest is the inclusion in Table 13 of the calculated
approximate capacities of the reconstructed vessels. Vessel capacities are con-
sidered an important attribute, as analyses based simply on shape and similar
physical characteristics tend to overlook the function of the vessels as artefacts
related to specific human needs.
Discussion of the pottery samples by layers
Sherd frequencies quoted in this discussion are based on the total(s) of
sherds after joining (Table 11), each set of joined sherds being counted as one
sherd.
Vessel forms are defined as follows:
a pot has a height not less than 0,75 of its maximum body diameter, and
usually also has a rim diameter less than its maximum body diameter;
a bowl has a height less than 0,75 of its maximum body diameter, and its
rim diameter should be equal to or only slightly (0,1) less than its maximum
body diameter.
The definitive proportions used here differ somewhat from those used by
Rudner (1968: 444-445), who defined the proportions for a bag-shaped pot as
height: maximum body diameter 0,90 or more, and maximum body
diameter: rim diameter 1,39 or less. His proportions for a bowl are
height : maximum body diameter 0,89 or less, and maximum body diameter : rim
1,39 or less (as for bag-shaped pots).
Table 13 shows that the height : maximum body diameter (H/D) ratio is
0,89 or less for all the layer 12 vessels except no. 3 (Fig. 25C), suggesting that
these should be classified as bowls in terms of Rudner’s typology. This is at
variance with the visual evidence which shows at least two vessels, nos 1 and 2
in layer 12 (Fig. 25A-—B), that would commonly be described as pots rather than
bowls.
Layer 12 (Figs 25-29)
85 per cent of the total of the sherds from the site came from this layer,
and these gave the greatest number of diagnostic pieces, including six of the
seven reconstructed vessels. In Table 11 the material from this layer has been
subdivided into sherds with shale/siltstone non-plastic inclusions (‘temper’),
designated 12(s), and sherds with quartz and other inclusions, designated 12(q).
1. Sherds with shale/siltstone inclusions
These form a visually distinct group. Apart from the difference in ‘temper’
they are mostly of light-brown clay which has apparently been lightly fired.
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA 159
Fig. 25. A. Layer 12 pot no. 1, SAM—AA1040 (see also Fig. 26). B. Layer 12 pot no. 2,
SAM-AA690 (see also Fig. 27). C. Layer 12 pot no. 3, SAM-AA757 (see also Fig. 28).
D. Layer 12 pot no. 4, SAM-AA1361. E. Layer 12 pot no. 5, SAM-AA1218. F. Layer 12
pot no. 6, SAM-AA1350. G. Layer 12 pot no. 7, SAM-AA1049. H. Layer 12 pot no. 8,
SAM-AA1250.
160 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Their range of thickness is greater than that of the other sherds in the rest of
the deposit, reaching a maximum of 14,5 mm. In general they give the appear-
ance of being less well finished than the other sherds in this layer. It has been
possible to join a number of sherds into larger composite fragments. These
consist of ten sets of rim sherds, a section of a body and portions of a base.
Although it has not been possible to join these major pieces, a possible recon-
struction of the shape is shown in Figure 25H. This was arrived at by matching
the curve and thickness of the middle section with the known diameter of the
rim. The cross-hatched section represents an area of overlap of the middle and
base sherds.
2. Sherds with quartz and other inclusions
This material is generally of fine quality, well finished and apparently well
fired. Reconstructions undertaken during 1974-5 have resulted in the partial
rebuilding of seven small vessels shown in Figures 25A—G and 26-29 which
show a marked divergence from the norms of ‘Strandloper’ (or Hottentot)
cm
Fig. 26. Layer 12 pot no. 1.
161
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA
cm
1,
Layer 12 pot no.
» Alle
1g
Is
162 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
pottery as suggested by Rudner (1968: 456-459): ‘Strandloper vessels are
generally necked (84,5%), but there are also some bag-shaped ones (13,5 %)
and a few bowls (2,2%). The base of the Strandloper pot is generally pointed
(81,6°%). Globular bases are uncommon (8,4%). . . . Strandloper pottery is
almost always well fired, the exceptions being mainly bowls... .” There are,
however, two aspects of conformity that are interesting and perhaps important
in terms of geographic distribution: the maximum occurrence of undecorated
ware is found in the Agulhas area and on the south-western coast (Rudner 1968:
463); wall thicknesses of less than 6 mm comprise 34,1 per cent and are found
mainly on the west coast and from the south coast to the East London area
(Rudner 1968: 459).
The pot shown in Figures 25B and 27 shows considerable sophistication
in its concave neck and inverted square rim as well as in its thickness, which
ranges from 3 to 5 mm. The pot shown in Figures 25C and 28 is to within a few
millimetres a perfect truncated ellipse. It is also worth noting that the thinnest
sherds, measuring 2,5 mm, were found in layer 12. 80 per cent of the sherds
have a high to medium density of fine to medium (up to 2 mm) angular quartz
inclusions. However, the occurrence of chunks of up to 7 mm suggests that at
least some of the inclusions are natural inclusions in the clay. Ten sherds have
inclusions other than, or including, quartz, but these components have not been
identified.
Figure 29 shows a reconstructed base which, together with the evidence
of the pots shown in Figures 25A—B, F—G and 26-27, tends to support the
indication that the pots in layer 12 have bases which are more rounded than
pointed. A sherd from this layer has not been included with the diagnostic
material in Table 11 as its function or position cannot be ascertained. It contains
part of a conical perforation, the outer surface of which continues into the
remnants of a broken-off protrusion. As the hole was made before firing and
known repair holes do not have protrusions (Rudner 1968: 460), it is thought
that the hole may have been designed for the passing through of a string or
thong for carrying.
The bulk of the layer’s quartz sherds are black or dark-brown, but there
are four varying from grey-brown to buff, and one with an off-white outer
surface on a brick-red core, probably re-fired after breakage.
Most of the material is well finished and finely wiped or burnished on the
outer surface, though the pot shown in Figure 26 has a somewhat granular
surface. This effect may have been deliberate as the inner surface is well
smoothed. There is no indication of ochre-staining, nor of the carbonized fatty
accretions observed on other coastal pottery (Rudner 1968: 598) and on sherds
in layer 2.
Layers 10-3
The quantity of sherds from these layers, especially of diagnostic material,
is disappointingly small. Layers 8 and 6 yielded no pottery at all and what has
163
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA
cm
3
Fig. 28. Layer 12 pot no
164 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
cm
Fig. 29. Layer 12 globular pot base, SAM-AA1909.
come from the other layers allows for little else to be said about it than that it
appears to conform to the norms for the site and for coastal pottery in general.
Nine sherds from layers 10 and 7 could be joined to sherds from layer 12. This
indicates that more material from these two layers may have been derived from
the earlier occupation, though this cannot be further substantiated. The majority
of the sherds in layers 10-3 contained inclusions similar to those in the quartz-
containing sherds of layer 12, and also included burnished pieces.
Layer 2 (Figs 30-34)
This layer provided 10,4 per cent of the toal of joined sherds and included
the upper portions and base of a fine spouted pot shown in Figures 30-32. This
pot has a comb-stamped rim and extruded bosses on the shoulder decorated
with a roughly oval design of radial linear impressions, which is highly remi-
niscent of Patella (limpet) shells (Figs 30, 31B, 32). The outer surface appears
to have been stained with red-brown ochre before firing, and is well burnished.
Eleven of the adiagnostic sherds, as well as the two rim sherds also appear to
belong to this pot. The asymmetrical form of the pot is best seen in Figures 30
and 32, which show the side away from the spout as having a greater curvature
than the side with the spout. Although most of the spout is missing, reconstruc-
tion of the shape was made possible by the finding, in 1979, of a large sherd
with a complete spout. This sherd, which had eroded out of the upper levels
to the west of the excavated area, also has an extruded boss with Patella-like
decoration as well as comb-stamping on the spout rim. These features, together
with the evidence of another spout recovered from a section collapse, point
either to a common tradition or to the work of the same potter. The sherd with
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA 165
the boss and spout has, however, decoration in the form of ten dragged bands
on the spout neck above the boss and two bands of impressed dots on both
sides of the spout, whereas the layer 2 pot has only decorated bosses and rim.
Spouted pots represent only 6,4 per cent of the material studied by Rudner
(1968: 456), who also reports that their maximum occurrence (15,9 %) is on the
south-western Cape coast.
The remainder of the sherds are from quite another class of pot and
include the spout fragment shown in Figure 33. The sherds in this group appear
to have come from larger, less well-made vessels than the reconstructed pot.
They are for the most part black, unburnished and partly coated with car-
bonized material, which can be seen on the illustrated spout fragment (Fig. 33).
Scrapings of the carbonized material were submitted to the Department of
Biochemistry of the University of Cape Town for analysis and possible identi-
Fig. 30. Layer 2 pot no. 1. SAM-—AA154. Reconstruction.
166 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 31. Layer 2 pot no. 1. A. Detail of neck. B. Detail of decorated boss.
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA 167
cm
Fig. 32. Layer 2 pot no. 1. Restored upper section of pot.
fication. In its report (letter dated 13 April 1970) the Department states that
‘the contents of the pot as well as the material adhering to the outside also
contain protein. The proportion of the amino acid is reasonably well in agree-
ment with that of contemporary protein. On the basis of this it is fairly safe to
say that the charred residues removed from the inside and outside of the pot
represent food material . . . because of the relative high content of lysine the
samples are possibly of animal origin.’ The above finds would be in keeping
with the presence of domestic stock in layer 2 (see below) whose milk and/or
meat may well have contributed to the contents of the pots.
75 per cent of the sherds have a high to medium density of fine to medium
angular quartz grain inclusions. The similarity between these inclusions and
those from layer 12 suggests continuity in the use of the same, possibly local,
clay sources. The layer also contains an unusually decorated sherd, shown in
Figure 34. As may be seen, the decorations consist of two sets of overlapping
168 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
cm
Fig. 33. Layer 2, spout fragment with carbonized material adhering, SAM—AA2950.
impressed bands, one in the centre of the sherd and one near the edge. These are
unlike the comb-stamping on the rim of the reconstructed pot from this layer
(Fig. 31A) and replication tests carried out to ascertain the nature of the tool
used showed that the ventral edge of a Donax serra shell produces impressions
identical to those on the sherd. This provides another example of uses to which
marine shell could be put. It is difficult to assign the sherd to any known pot or
other sherds in the assemblage for, although in appearance it is similar to the
spouted pot, it does not appear to belong to it for two reasons. Firstly, since the
pot is almost complete in circumference in its upper part, this would represent
only isolated decoration on one part of the circumference; secondly for the
lower part of the pot to be decorated would be a most unusual circumstance
(Rudner 1968: 457). On the other hand, there are too many bands for the
impression to have been accidental rather than deliberate, and it is therefore
concluded that a second brown pot, similar in some respects to the reconstructed
pot, is also represented. The suggested minimum number of pots represented by
the sherds in this layer is five.
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA 169
Layer 1
As with the sherds from layers 10-3, there is little that can be said about
the three sherds from this layer, except that they appear to conform to the
norms for the site and for coastal pottery.
Discussion of the potsherds
The analysis of the DK 1 pottery throws new light on early local pottery
and poses a number of interesting questions about its distribution and manu-
facture. The main concentration of potsherds in layer 12, and the wealth of
other associated cultural and food remains, are in keeping with the interpreta-
tion of this layer as an occupation surface. Also of importance is layer 2 with
its well-made spouted pot, and in this case the pottery is associated with the
remains of at least eighteen sheep (Table 27), suggesting the sampling of another
important occupation phase. The pottery from layer 12 demonstrates that
skilfully made vessels were being used along this coast some 2000 years
ago and its introduction to the site was clearly at a time when the craft was well
developed. The paucity of material from layers 10-3 leaves unanswered the
question of whether the form of the layer 2 pot (which, with its decorated neck
and bosses, spout and pointed base, is a more or less typical Hottentot, or
‘Strandloper’, pot), evolved directly from the globular pots and bowls of
cm
Fig. 34. Layer 2, decorated sherd, SAM-AA3475.
170 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
cm
Fig. 35. Mastic-impregnated sand artefact from layer 2, SAM—AA3330.
layer 12, or whether this later form was introduced from elsewhere during the
period between the two occupations. Nevertheless, it is evident from the bulk
of the layer 12 material that pot-making was not a technological invention at
DK 1: the origin of this tradition is a problem that cannot be answered by
material from this site alone.
MISCELLANEOUS
An unusual piece of mastic-impregnated fine sand was found in layer 2.
Its shape suggests that it might have served to unite four minor barbs to the
main shaft of an arrow (Fig. 35). There is no ethnographical or historical
record of such arrows being used by Bushmen or Hottentots.
LITHIC ARTEFACTS
Introduction
Goodwin (1938a: 219) described the stone artefacts from Klipkop as
‘. . . broken in use rather than to any plan. They consist of chipped and split
sea pebbles.’ This also describes aptly the lithic assemblage at DK 1, though
it will be seen that it also includes some backed and formal microliths. In some
sense this was an advantage as it encouraged looking at the stone tool component
less as a culture marker and more as a source of information on adaptive
behaviour.
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA 171
Raw materials
Frequencies of raw materials (Table 14) are, in diminishing order: quartzite
(49,5 % of the artefact total), quartz (41,7), limestone (6,7 %), silcrete (1,5 °%),
and chalcedony (0,6%).
Quartzite
This occurs in the form of:
pebbles, cobbles and boulders (sized according to Pettijohn 1957: 20),
which are abundantly available from the beach a few metres below the site;
earlier made (M.S.A.) stone implements. These are recognizable by their
differing raw material, which is generally a fine-grained Bokkeveld quartzite,
by the use of a prepared platform technique, and sometimes by their formal
shape. Their acquisition would have required the least amount of effort, entailing
only picking up the artefacts where they eroded out of their exposed surfaces,
either at the cave’s drip-line or from near-by limestone cliff exposures.
Quartz
This occurs as veins in the T.M.S. where it sometimes attains its crystal
form. It is also sometimes found in the form of cobbles.
Limestone
This is also readily available, both in the form of beach cobbles and from
the cliffs lining the local coast.
Silcrete
This occurs both in near-by outcrops and in the form of cobbles.
Chalcedony
A local source for this rare constituent of the assemblage has not yet been
found, but it is found elsewhere in the south-western Cape, usually in the form
of small pebbles in river-beds or alluvial gravels.
Red ochre
This occurs in the T.M.S. and was present throughout the deposit in sizes
ranging from about 3 mm maximum dimension to larger pieces of about
40 mm. The numerous fragments, some of which showed marks of abrasion,
were not counted.
Artefact description and analysis
The typology used in the description and analysis of the artefactual stone
from DK 1 follows, in general outline, that used by J. Deacon (1978) for her
analysis of the material from the Nelson Bay Cave, southern Cape. Three main
categories are discussed: waste, utilized pieces, and formal tools.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
172
70 81 I = SS = = I Sess i = = = = al
ay 65 SS = pat Res = 07 TI = ae TI I = L = I = y UEP eee 20
; 9¢ = = SS —< 07 €l = Gil I = IL = I = * [8}0} :SoUOJSpULIS 19MO'T
ma IC ¢ = = aS ca € = ee ah I = I — De era > Rea
1‘0 (aa € aa ae ee I = So ay) eS ae Poss I = I a fe es ee Wee
OL L'96 = TET = ae = 6S €s I IT 19 G I O€ v 6 I 20
OrZ = i = €9 €¢ I IT 19 4 I TE v IT I <9 eee * 1210}
:SeTqqoo poyxey-N[nw pur sjsurg
70 s‘s T == = = — I — ——— = es eee as aa = ie: Scat ous MONE c ce
s‘0 bre = LT eee mers x S 4 mate € Sigh os is es aS =a 20
81 ce = SS = 9 v ay 4S € ee) ae G = = — Fae 8 ae * [8101
:SoooId posvulep-ospo AAvOPL
97 9‘ I as es aes a I meer oo — a Ss sae? 2; ae ——, — ° ° . ° . . e)
; _ (Nd) (NZ)
6'v SiC mas = = = € == = = ae Se = = G = S
_ _ CNOE) (9) (NE) (N6) (NOT) (NZ)
OT 9°p8 «EE 9 ee oer € Gli Or SSP SS Ce SS = = = = 2a Le® Alay alt Reo)
6£ 9 ne ioe & | ol ee ee 4 = = = — G = ee [€10} :soyey powUItsy,
pazyun
Ol SO 9 weed te ee om a ae =e ie fl =a oe Sam ad! = Mit ee ee)
€°CL GG €L a SS 9 ts € aoe a ¢ = = € I = = oo a We eed
SOL 66 SIE = ==> I Ivl TE € ¢ v8 = Or vl I II 91 Coe RE A ag ee ee eT
TCP SSeS T € =a L ESL LE v 19 KN Ol ce 601 17 8 TI a ia ial ae OP eae“ 0)
(INZZ) (AT) (N91) QNZ) CNT) (NZ)
67S SCS OS/L Ii 8 te a bP LOL 707 €l 8p SLE IZ €€ 08 SE 9¢ L9 ene 20
; : PrE € IT v == 8S STL I PLT OZ Il 985 I€ 08 907 79 cL 66 * 7810} :soyey pouu1jug
IS €'€ G a = = G = = = — a = a a — ie es Foe gs CO)
07 sat G = =i ge = G = =e Same: Eto = = = = = = S
LG Me Ei — = == = 6 ame ap coos G = — I = = = gt
60 9% 97 I I = — LI 6 Ss iG = — — ae € — oO
9'0 [eGo = I = = Ol I = > v = = I = I I 20
: ‘ 19 I G = a OF € =o 8 = eS G = v I [2}0} :se10D
£01 70 v = lors a C I I ee = a — = = = 1 2)
O'r 70 v a a ae I G — = _ if a — = = = = = S
IS 6S vol = = gi = (44 61 a LZ I € I € v G at
L‘SE OOS 666 ae v I iL 98€ 18 0% 69 vol Ol LI 6bI =s«€€ 9 a oO
L‘9Z bby 888 I a ee IZ 677 POT Ie SG 707 9 TE 6£ €7 Sv Or 20
; 666 I I v I 67 199 SOE Cy €tY /iji 7S 681 6S $9 vs [e}0} :syunyD
C'S €0 (6 = an aes = 6 = a = a — — = — aapian 0)
69 él [i aa =e =a 9 = a ee ee = = = I = = S
8‘I vl 8 oa Se ae v = ap eo = — e v = = = gt
7 6l iG SS = ae ae = 8tP € I 9] LY I (6 8E = (4 = re)
90 9°¢€ 17 ca Sy pes I is — = all 8 = v I = I = 20
OLS a rp goal I Shr € I LI cs I 9 eV I € aaa [e107 :sdiyD
ASD, V1
10140]0U 1?101 1210} 7 G6 We pups 6)! Ol 6 8 L 9 S v € (6 I AOADT
MDA SSDII AOADT MO]JAX
jonpiaipur = fo '%,
AOf 1010}
ays fo %
“SIDAB] PUB SOSSEID ‘SO1I0S9}v9 JORJoIe Aq [PIIOJCUL MBI :9U01S
pl dav
We)
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA
C21qe1 Siu) ut AJoIVIvdOs UMOYS JOU Iv sTe1O1 OSOU TL.)
*sassv]d JOVjolIv 94} ][V Ul STPIIO}VUL MvI [VNPIAIpUL pure “(Cojo ‘syuNYD “sdIyo “Sa )sassv[O [ENPIAIPUT IOJ s[e}O} O}Is oY} UO pase o1v SULLINTOS OM} JSP] SY} UI Sose}USDIOd OY], “yp
*soqqqod = g ‘sejqqed = vy :souojsiouWeyy “¢
*S]¥JO} SSPID JORJOVIV SY} UL Popnyour oie sSolT,
‘ssoaId “W'S IA] JO Joquinu oy} a1vOIpuT PY Aq poMoy[oy stsoyjusied ur ssoquinny *Z
I
“AuOpasjeys = - ‘ojo1O]IS = § ‘suo}souny = | ‘zjaend = © ‘auzyenb = 9 “O1ON.
60L 9 [e101 eyduies
IZ Ol v6 L80 € Iv 98 96% 9611 $9 er] vES 6EI 6LI pS * 1210} JoAV'T
STI OSG SS ee < S = a eS ae ow we =a eee
O'€ OS ones or = € es i a a S
+0 SS Un kt as Oe ai 8 = Cag Fey oe ea eo Ss m I O
€0°0 0's I = Sy eS I a == > SS = = — = ee — = poe ee Aye 20
07% = — = I OI == @ = = — — — — — I [¥101 > Yonoje1 snOsUeLT[SOSITY
Lea OOS € = cape eta = € ee ae ei = Pee = rs = oa Oa ges ee eee)
ro os € Se ase = € ae Se ee) Gay al ae a dae <3 = eS een 7 O)
9 == sat | eta a 9 a = = — = * 7eI07 1019 “€
£0°0 O00l 1 ae: a yee a I i a) het he ss eas ee Pie sO.
if — — — — I — — — — — — [101 :SIoI0g °Z7
TOI SiS at, ae v = Se) SS a = = a a Ak) eee ee
6 Ci See ets zs S = See fas ae ram “hae ae S
L‘0 SS Gl ele see sae Si 8 a GC € oe a < I _ ©
£0°0 be I see ae = See amen Me £0
67 -% = S J LI = GC. € = ! = cae = I [¥10} :sJUeWISIg “|
: 9€ J VC C v € I I [®10} :s[oo} poyoeg
VS EG ace gh oat eS = c 3 Sar er hae Pee oes =e os = =i as ae)
OK StS aI = Ser ae a ZG = Sy Wes MES = = = = = S
ro) CiSee eC = Paap eters T I aa: eat Niger eee SS = = = == hs a)
9 — — — I ¢ — — — — — — — — — — [8101 :siodviog
i SJOO] JDUUOY
‘0 OOOl ST = ae ee i 9 9 cin = att I =s oa a
CI = = = = 9 9 — —= = = I = — = * [8101 :sfeisAJO ziIJeNb pez]
10 OO0I Z pe Wee as I = fee ae a= tee = as a ait cco Bess ea ee O.
G — — — — ] — — I — — — — — — — [#101 :Souo}1S POAODOIH
z0 Oool I ae ee ae a =e em pee) ee at Pee I = ant aa es. omen neiel
| = = = — — — —_- — — — — I — — — [€10} : sjIAUY
0% TOOL 99 es a ties re LI zl Sa eee Sor ap Cho L ae gO
99 aa = age = LI a a Ol =o ewices Gil G fh = ‘ * 1230} :saTqqoo
pue sojqged pourejs-s149Q
‘0 O00] Zz ‘ae = Wescen a a eo Ree ria SS I es i BaP ar, ae ne eee ea)
C = — = = —= = = — — — I = I = : [¥10} :safqqoed o3po pel]
c0 Sl Gil Sates le ear a aS a Sg Sa aera ae) fee pee os ee cl! Wo ee ee eae aaa
(ag¢
‘ V07) a7 a6 q€ dl
eG HX5 UL V7 Sap eiaes =a. V9 VL iba w Nay SEC qzi ae aL cad ae 20
: 6L © Sale eae = 81 9] Saye vi ay aS il € iL I [¥}0} : SoUO}SIOUIUE HY
61 O00! 79 = can eS ie I, 07 Seip Ul IT = I it, I a cas bee oO
42) = Boe ore = 17 07 ee I =~ I L I << =< * [2101 :sjoo} uoNeurquio)
97 OO0r 8 == ar, PE = ai GG Sree mG El = 61 ft € a eee Mk ec)
L8 = oar ne ae a TT Sie Bee €] oe 61 fh, € = 7 5 tt 7eI0} :SIEqqny
eae aes ae
[p14ajDUul = JJ 0} [D101 UE 6 WC jaz Tl OL 6 8 ih 9 S v € G I 1akDT
MDA SSDI AOADT MOUAA
jonpiaipuy fo %
4Of ]Dj0}
AUS fo %
ee ee eee ee Ee er ee a ee le ee a
(1UO)) pl ATGV I,
174 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Waste
This category comprises chips, chunks, cores and untrimmed flakes and
accounts for some 89 per cent (5 980) of the total number of stone artefacts
at the site (Table 15).
Chips are pieces of irregular form, less than 3 mm maximum dimension,
lacking bulbs of percussion but considered to be artefactual. These form some
10 per cent of the waste category (Table 15). They consist almost entirely of
quartz (93,4%, Table 14) and reflect the brittle nature of this raw material which
tends to shatter when struck.
Chunks differ from chips in size, being greater than 3 mm maximum
dimension. These constitute one-third of the total waste category (Table 15)
and consist largely of quartzite (44,4%) and quartz (50,0°%%) (Table 14).
Cores are pieces which show a pattern of working consistent with the
systematic removal of flakes. The total sample was too small to warrant division
into sub-classes. In the case of coarse-grained quartzite and quartz, flake scars
were frequently impossible to identify. This is particularly true of many broken
pieces of quartz which did not have percussion marks indicating points of
TABLE 15
Stone: categories and classes of artefacts (site totals).
Percentages
Category Totals Category Site
Waste: total : é : . : ; : : 3 5 980 89,1
Chips ‘ : : ; 3 ‘ : : ; ‘ 576 9,6 8,6
Chunks . : ; é : : : : ‘ . : 1 999 33,4 29,8
Cores : : : . ; : : : . : 61 1,0 0,9
Untrimmed flakes F : : : : : : 3 : 3 344 55,9 49,8
Utilized: total. : , : : : ; 5 ‘ : 667 9,9
Trimmed flakes . 3 : 4 , 4 : : 39 5,8 0,6
Heavy edge-damaged pieces : ; : : : : 18 Dai 0,3
Single and multi-flaked cobbles . : A : . : 240 36,0 3,6
Lower grindstones : : ; ‘ ‘ : : : 56 8,4 0,8
Rubbers . ; : : : s ; : ; : 87 13,0 163)
Combination ols ; : : . : s : : 62 9,3 0,9
Hammerstones : : ; : ; : 3 : : 79 11,8 2
Milled edge pebbles : ; ‘ : : : : 2. 0,3 0,03
Ochre stained Dele and cobbles ; : ; ' : 66 10,0 1,0
Anvils : : ; : ; : : : : 1 0,1 0,01
Grooved stones. : ; , , : f ; D 0,3 0,03
Utilized quartz crystals. MN LS, aa a 15 22 0,2
Formal tools: total. : ; 4 : : : : : 62 1,0
Scrapers . : ; ; ; : ; : ; ; ‘ 6 9,7 0,1
Backed tools
Segments . : A ; ; ‘ ‘ : 5 ; 29 46,8 0,4
Borers : , f : : 1 1,6 0,01
Other . ; A : : f i 2 ‘ 6 9,7 0,1
Miscellaneous retouch : : : : : : : 20 BP 0,3
Total . : : fale: : 6 709
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA 7S)
impact. As a result quartz cores may be under-represented in Table 15 as
suggested by their low number (61), which is in contrast to the large number of
untrimmed flakes. This may be taken to indicate the limits imposed by adhering
to the definition of cores as set out above.
Untrimmed flakes are those with no visible damage on the laterals that can
be ascribed to usage or trimming (Deacon, H. J. 1969: 155). These constitute the
largest single class of artefact at the site and their number (3 344) amounts to
more than half the total waste category (Table 15). Most are irregular in shape
and 41 per cent are primary flakes with cortex still present (Table 16), and more
than half (52,5%%) are made of quartzite (Fig. 36, Table 14). In classifying
untrimmed flakes as artefactual waste, this discussion follows accepted prac-
\
\
\\
\
-
oa
Bes
ZU,
4
4
4;
Z 4
Fig. 36. Untrimmed stone flakes, all quartzite except bottom left which is of limestone, layer 4.
176 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
tice (e.g. Deacon, J. 1978: 91, table 1). DK 1, however, has a low frequency of
formal tools (Table 15), and such a classification may therefore mask the actual
purpose of flake manufacture at this and other coastal sites which, especially
in the case of quartzite, might have been intended to produce flakes suitable
for use on soft materials, which would have ensured the retention of a sharp
edge for some time. Supporting evidence for this contention comes from a
report on an expedition which came into contact with a stone-using hunter—
gatherer group in the northern part of South West Africa whose use of simple,
unretouched flakes showed these to be effective tools for skinning and cutting
up antelopes (MacCalman & Grobbelaar 1965: 23).
Of the 1 756 quartzite flakes, 22 were made by the prepared platform
technique and are therefore related to the earlier, Upper Pleistocene (M.S.A.),
deposits. These have been included with the untrimmed flakes in Tables 14 and
17, their frequencies, followed by an M, in brackets. It was not possible to
determine whether these implements had been used again by the cave’s later
inhabitants as an absence of patination does not allow for any estimation of
possible time difference between the original flaking and any subsequent
re-use. That the greatest number of these flakes (16) occurs in layer 12 may have
been due to a larger number being exposed when the first group of Holocene
people came to occupy the cave.
TABLE 16
Stone: flakes with cortex: frequency analysis by raw material classes and layers.
Layer 1 2) 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12
Total of flakes in layer (T) . 95 73 62 206 719 31 586 114 20 272 1712
Quartzite
Total of flakes (t,) . A : 67 54 38 80 32 21 375 48 13 200 7351
Yee. ‘ R 70,5 74,0 61,3 38,8 40,5 67,7 64,0 42,1 65,0 U5 43,9
Flakes with cortex . 5 : G 38 38 32 63 2D 13 252 37 6 146 531
Yo th 6 j j ; ; : 56,7 70,4 84,2 78,7 68,7 61,9 67,2 77,1 46,1 73,0 70,7
Quartz
Total of flakes (t,) . ‘ ; 12 8 21 109 35 10 121 61 4 37 753
ra oe ‘ z 5 : 4 12,6 10,9 33,9 52,9 44,3 32,3 20,6 53,5 20,0 13,6 44,0
Flakes with cortex . ; : — 4 6 2 — 8 — 5 15
Yo ti 5 : , : 5 — — 19,0 5,5 5,7 — 1,6 3 13,5 2,0
Limestone
Total of flakes (t,) . ‘ ‘ 16 11 1 14 10 — 84 5 32 141
aa 5 ‘ : 16,8 15,1 1,6 6,8 12,7 — 14,3 4,4 15,0 11,8 8,
Flakes with cortex ‘ i e 6 8 1 3 5 — 43 — 1 19 64
Yost, o ; ‘ : 3 4 37,5 72,7 100,0 21,4 50,0 — 51,2 — 33,3 59,4 45,4
Silcrete
total of flakes (t,) . — — 1 3 — — 5 — — 3 55
é — — 1,6 15 — — 0,8 — — 1,1 3,2
Alakes with cortex . i ‘ — — 1 — — — -—— — — — 2)
Vartigue ; ‘ 2 . 5 — — 100,0 — — — — — — — 3,6
Chalcedony
Total of flakes (t;) . — — 1 — 2 — 1 — — — 12
air 5 — —_ 1,6 — 25 — 0,2 — — — 0,7
Flakes with cortex ; ‘ i — — 1 — — — — — — — —
Vaitshe : 5 3 . ‘ — — 100,0 — — — — — — — —
Note. 1. M.S.A. flakes are not included (see Table 14).
2. Layers yellow sand, 22, 22b do not contain flakes with cortex.
3. The 7 trimmed flakes in layer 12 (Table 14) are all without cortex.
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA 177
Utilized pieces
This is the next to largest category of stone artefacts and consists of a
variety of forms which are discussed below, and for which frequencies are given
in Tables 14, 15 and 17.
Included in this category is the small mastic-mounted quartz flake found
in layer 12 (Fig. 37). The flake has a small (approx. 0,5 mm) bevel across most
of its ‘working edge’, giving it a chisel edge, of which about half shows chipping
indicative of utilization. There is no modification of the shape of the flake in
the exposed area, and this lends support to the contention mentioned above,
that the inclusion of untrimmed flakes in the ‘waste’ category may mask the
actual purpose of flake manufacture.
The mastic, which contains small quartz grains, has been smoothly moulded
round the flake, and its lower edge indicates that is was originally attached to
some other object, possibly a haft of wood or bone. The cutting back of V-shaped
notches into the mastic on both sides of the artefact is problematic: one would
expect this to weaken the binding effect of the mastic and it seems to have served
no functional purpose, since only the edge of the flake appears to have been
used.
Trimmed flakes differ from untrimmed flakes in that one or more of their
edges is reduced by utilization. Tables 14 and 17 show that of the 39 artefacts
in this class only 7, from layer 12, were manufactured by the late Holocene
occupants of the site, the remaining 32 being of earlier, Upper Pleistocene
(M.S.A.) manufacture. Trimmed flakes are, therefore, not an important element
of the stone artefacts at the site after layer 12.
Heavy edge-damaged pieces are cobbles usually retaining a substantial
part of their original shape but modified by the removal of flakes due to utiliza-
tion at right angles to their flattened surface. This results in a roughly straight,
flaked edge (Fig. 38A-B).
Fig. 37. Mastic-embedded quartz artefact from layer 12, SAM-AA1264,
178 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
(
ww
AN
Fig. 38. Heavy edge-damaged pieces from layer 12. A. Limestone. B. Quartzite.
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA 179
Only eighteen of these artefacts were found at the site. They were distri-
buted fairly evenly through the lower levels up to and including layer 7. After
that only two were found, in layer 4 (Table 17). Little is known about the use
of such implements which have also been found in the excavated deposits from
Nelson Bay Cave (Deacon, J. 1978: 91-92) and the small DK 1 sample is not
considered to contribute any new information.
Single and multi-flaked cobbles show signs of utilization resulting in the
removal of one or more flakes (Fig. 39). These stones, which are almost exclu-
sively of quartzite (96,7 %, Table 14), though not showing systematic removal of
flakes seem to augment recognizable cores as a major source of untrimmed
flakes. By adding multi-flaked cobbles to cores, the previous low ratio of cores
to flakes, ranging from 1 : 19 in layer 2 to 1 : 103 in layer 4, is raised to 1 : 7 for
layer 2 and 1 : 8 for layer 4. This does not, however, preclude the use of single-
flaked cobbles and occasional lower grindstones for flake production, which
would further raise the ratio. The use of flaked cobbles is, therefore, regarded
as being in keeping with the informal nature of the stone industry at DK 1
which is characterized by the use of any suitable stone to supply required flakes.
Lower grindstones are flat-surfaced, partly rounded stones varying in size
from 11 x 22 cm to 28 x 50 cm. They bear smoothed concave surfaces or
grooves as a result of deliberate and repeated use of the stone for grinding.
Fig. 39. Multi-flaked cobble, quartzite, layer 7.
[2102 g[duivs 94} UO peseq c1¥ s[ejO} JOAL] PUL SSID OJ SSO} B[IYM s[ev}O} IoAET UO poseq O1v OAL] YOO UL SOsSE[D [VNPIAIPUI IO} SosvJUSDIOg ‘7
*(s]B10} Ishv] pue ssvlo 94} UI popnjout) sedeId “W'S JO Joquinu ey} o}edIpur ‘J Aq pemo]joj ‘stsoyjucred ur sioquinN “[ 310N
60L 9 2 2 * [e101 ofdules
Ic €l I iS LOT € SEL 8 LST 80¢ I cS et I ves 6E1 6LI vSI “ON
€0 70 10°0 aa | €‘Or OTT OT g‘€ 0 8I 80 17d 6L WG MG (SG, We [€}0} IoAeT
0c — — i I 9T =e Cc == = == == = = — if “ON,
€0 = a = OT 50 = 67 ae =m Sa = ail as Sore 9°0 Ve * YonojJel SNOsUR]IOSIJAI
2) = = aa i S. a aa sie = iar = a = — = ON
10 =e = — OT (0) = = = = a = om —— = = Ye * 1yIO
I 2 a = a — I = ee —_ ao = pas an == a = ON
€00 = = = eal €0 = =e = = = = = = = = ie a se a a SIo10g
6¢ SE ae — I LI = Cc v e. == iy = = = II “ON,
vo a = = OT 50 rae 67 9'T c0 = LO = = ia 90 We SJUOWISIG
/$]00] payovg
). a = — T ¢ = ae — oa wa ee: = eae = = ON
10 = —_— — OT Z0 — = — = — — — — — —_— Y, siadeiog
58J00] JDULAOT
s SI = = 2 == ) 9 3 C. == = ae I. a es — ON
5 op ZO rm) 80 ZO & * spejshi9 zJenb peziyng
—_— —— —— —_— — I — — — — —_ —— — — 0
ZA €0°0 10 10 % * += — g9u0}s peAcoin
~ 1 a = = = ar, == = ca = = = I = = = "ON
= 100 70 Ye spIAUY
z 99 = = aa = LI CI Ser ae DI = am 4 C. L. oar ON
Ze Onl S‘0 9° eT TT vl 6€ wee ite eee SECS)
O pure safqqed poure}s-o149Q
) GC. mile: = Sea = — = = = = as a UU aa L =e “ON
im £00 c0 90 Vie ; sa[qqed espe pall
< 6L C. = = co SI 9T ers v vl aa C. C e. L. I. “ON
ce cl C6 90 CC 9°1 (an DI aC GG 6€ 90 Ae : : * SOUO}SIOUIUIE FY
= co = = eS oe IZ 07@ at I IT =a i L I, = ra “ON
) 60 L‘0 nC v0 60 L‘0 eT LO Ye * S[OO} UOT eUIqUuIOD)
Oo 48 = € a ra Os 8 = c €] = =< 6 L e rag ‘ON
n el InSG L‘0 VT 80 VT C‘€ os LI Vo sTaqqny
w (usx0.1q) (uey401q)
x 9S (p9}uUNOd JOU SIOAP] 07 €l = G TI I == iL = I = ‘ON
io 30 9SoY} WOT, SOUOISPULIS) 9‘0 ST 80 OT 61 ET 9‘0 Vi - * S9U0JSPULIS IOMOT
em OV Za a —— a €9 €S i II 19 C I CE v. I Lf “ON
) 9°¢ 07 TL ol ev os SE L‘0 09 6C 19 90 Ye : ; ; * sa—tqqos
n poyxey-HyNu pue s[surg
Eee Si = ag 7 9 v = € € re as c = = = "ON
Se0 Z‘0 0) Ci Z0 v0 Yi Ea sooord
oa posewep-sspe AAvapyy
< (W9) (WE) (N6) CNOT) (NZ) (NZ)
6£ 9 a = € OT Ol = a G = rs ae mae (4 — ON
9'0 9°87 TE 50 el (av) iT Vhs SOYPY POLIS |
(N91) (QONZ@) (WT) (NZ) ‘pazyun
DHE LE IT 1 = 8S 8cL I VLT 07 vit 98S Te 08 907 oO cL G6 ON
8°67 VTS SOE O19 9°SS LE P67 ery C‘8P 9°6S 6°SS 9°8E 9 bY 6 IP L'19 0 5 * soyey pouwluwijuy
19 I 4 —— ram OV € = a 8 oat == G = v HE “ON
60 8 rst € 1 v0 L‘0 a0) GG 90 re ; 2 : : * S81OY)
666 I I Vv I 67 199 SOE (Oy, L6 ECV /E II cS 681 6S $9 vs ON
8°67 I 8°0£ 0°00! SOE Cae Civ 8°19 JETS OSE fEEE p9OC PSE v CY €9€ I Se 7o : ; : 3 syuny)
OLS = = = I CrP € J LI cs I 9 tv I € a BON!
9°8 0! € vl v0 Cl 9°9 cP om (6h 0'8 LO L’| = 7o ; : ; ae
=) a pe a poe te, Wee OS
Se ])101 ICT (G6 OC pups ai Ol 6 8 L 9 ¢ v € T ] doh]
SSDID MOTJAX
“sIoAvy] AQ S}OVjO}IB JO SOSSPID PUL S3IIOSI}VO :39U01S
L| avy
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA 181
Rubbers, or upper grindstones, are smaller stones of a size easily held in
the hand and having at least one smoothed facet. They include split and pecked
stones where such pecking, though on the grinding surface, has not impaired
the overall smoothness. All rubbers and almost all lower grindstones were made
of quartzite beach cobbles (Table 14). As such stones often have smooth, flat
surfaces as a result of water action, their classification as grinding tools required
care. Stones were included in the frequencies shown in Tables 14, 15 and 17 only
on the basis of wear sufficient to rule out any doubts as to their use, and the
counts may therefore be conservative.
The numerous upper and lower grindstones, most of which were stained
with ochre (Table 18), as well as the number of unworked ochre-stained pebbles
and cobbles (Tables 14, 17), attest to the important role of ochre in the daily
lives of the inhabitants. This is supported by evidence from other sites dated
to a similar period. Powdered ochre was also found at the site in shell containers
and as a coating on perforated shells, ostrich egg-shell beads and snake vertebrae.
Evidence for its cosmetic and/or ritual use is derived from the child burial
(Appendix 3), the skeleton of which was partly enveloped in a thin layer of red
ochre in addition to its heavily ochre-stained cranium. Most of the ochre
Staining associated with the lithic artefacts is red and only very rarely yellow.
In addition, black staining, apparently not ochreous, was noted on about
one-third of the rubbers (Table 18). In a few cases both red and black occurred
on individual rubbers. Such dual colouring was more common on the less
frequent lower grindstones. The cause of the black colouring still remains a
puzzle. Its staining quality suggests a smooth, fatty compound giving rise to
a thin film of adhesive pigment rather than a coating of powdery ochre.
Combination tools occupy a category intermediate between rubbers and
hammerstones. They are rubbers with patches of abrasion and/or small pecked-
out hollows which indicate their use for hammering as well as grinding. These
are further distinguished from rubbers by the damage not being situated on
the grinding surface. They were all made of quartzite cobbles and were found
in most layers of the main excavation (Fig. 40, Table 14).
Hammerstones are implements which have areas of pitting and bruising
TABLE 18
Stone: ochre- and black-stained artefacts.
Layer 2 3 4 51 6 7 8 9 10 i eeloral
Total of rubbers and
combination tools 3 8 26 1 — 24 3 — 38 43 146
Ochre-stained ; 1 2 9 — — 15 2 — 20 DD, 71
Black-stained ; : 1 2 4 —_— — 6 —- — 5 5 23
Total stained ; DD, 4 13 —= = Jil Dz | OS) Da 94
% of layer total . . 66,6 50,0 50.00 — — 87,5 66,6 — 65,8 62,8 64,4
Lower grindstones i 1 — V — 41 12 D — 13 20 56
Ochre-stained — — 7 —_ — 6 1 — 4. 16 34
182 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
indicating their use as hammers. They have been divided into two sub-classes
in Table 14: type A—pebbles that are smooth, flattened and oval pieces c. 6 cm
long, having hammer wear at either or both ends of the major axis (Fig. 41);
type B—cobbles that are of a larger size and have irregular, pitted patches.
Both types occurred in layers 6 to 12 but the upper layers contained only the
informal (type B) cobble hammerstones.
Milled-edge pebbles are round, flattened quartzite pebbles which are pitted
round their entire perimeter as a result of hammering. They may be regarded
as belonging to the general hammerstone category. Two were found, one in
layer 4, the other in layer 2.
Ochre-stained pebbles and cobbles show no utilization but are partly or
entirely covered in ochre (see rubbers above). They were found to be distributed
throughout the sequence (Tables 14 and 17).
Anvils: the only anvil found was a large, flat piece of limestone from
layer 4 containing a small hammered-out hollow (or dimple) on one surface.
Grooved stones are oval and symmetrical stones measuring between 9 and
12 cm along the major axis. Each bears a noticeable groove parallel to its major
axis and in the centre of a broad face. Only two such artefacts occurred in the
DK 1 sample, in layers 8 and 12.
Fig. 40. Combination hammerstone-rubber, quartzite, layer 7. A. Lateral view.
B. Ventral view. C. Dorsal view.
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA 183
Fig. 41. Hammerstone, quartzite, layer 12.
Utilized quartz crystals were found, whole or broken, and with their tips
abraded or crushed. This was taken to indicate usage. Most came from the
lower layers (Tables 14-15, 17).
Formal tools
These are defined as pieces that have been deliberately modified to a
standard form by secondary flaking, or retouch, but also include pieces which,
although lacking formal shape, show deliberate retouch as distinct from
utilization.
As is usual in excavated samples, the proportion of formal tools is very
low in relation to the total of stone artefacts recovered (Table 15). The two
major typological classes represented in the DK 1 sample are scrapers and
backed tools, with ‘miscellaneous retouch’ as a third class incorporating those
pieces discussed above which are retouched but lack formal shape.
Scrapers are flakes with steep retouch from one side only and usually
varying in extent according to the shape of the artefact. Five of the site’s six
scrapers came from layer 12 and the sixth from the overlying yellow sand
layer (Table 17). They are made of the finer raw materials: quartz, silcrete and
chalcedony (Table 14), and their shape is generally circular. Positioning of
retouch is variable, and the width of the retouched edges ranges between
14 and 20 mm (mean 14,5 mm). Because of their low frequency and variety of
shapes, scrapers have not been divided into morphological sub-classes such as
side- and end-scrapers, and it is fair to say that it is only the nature of the
retouch that holds these tools together as a class (Fig. 42).
184 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
cm
Fig. 42. Scrapers. A. Silcrete.
B. Quartz. C. Chalcedony.
Backed tools are flakes and blades with fine retouch on one lateral, approxi-
mately at right angles to the main flake surface and forming a blunted edge
generally opposed to a sharp, unretouched edge. Three sub-classes are recognized
in the DK 1 assemblage.
1. Segments: these are backed along the arc, with the chord remaining
unretouched and sharp. Shape ranges from the ‘regular’ segment shape with
a relatively long chord and a short radius (Fig. 43A-—E), to pieces that are more
triangular (Fig. 43F—G) (see Sampson 1974: 333, fig. 121 nos 1-7). 17 of the 29
segments came from layer 12 alone (Table 14), and of the total 19 are made of
quartz (Table 17), which probably accounts for their generally small size, which
ranges from 10 to 19 mm. Measurement of segment lengths from other Holo-
cene occurrences in the south-western Cape (e.g. Vensterklipkop and Brak-
fontein (L. Wadley pers. comm.)) indicates that segments made of quartz are
smaller than those made of silcrete or chalcedony. L. Wadley (pers. comm.) has
quoted mean lengths of 14,0 mm for quartz segments, and 18,2 mm for silcrete
segments from Vensterklipkop.
2. Borers: the single borer from the site came from layer 12 and is made
of quartz (Table 14). It is a piece in which the backing converges with the
unretouched lateral to form a blunt point (Fig. 43H).
3. Other: the six remaining backed pieces, all from layer 12, are made
equally of quartz and chalcedony (Table 14). They lack formal shape and are
included in the general class of backed tools by virtue only of their having
backing on one lateral.
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA 185
Miscellaneous retouch covers a range of generally small flakes on which
the partial retouch does not justify their inclusion in any of the above categories.
The seemingly casual and varying positions of the retouch suggests either that
they are incomplete tools, or that they were used for functions which cannot be
determined (see H. J. Deacon 1976: 61).
cm
Fig. 43. A, D-E. Segments, chalcedony. B, F—G. Segments, quartz. C. Segment, silcrete.
H. Borer, quartz.
186 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Discussion
In conclusion it must be noted that the artefacts are very varied and as a
result formal patterning is weak. This makes for difficulties in applying even
simple, broad classifications. The informal content of the assemblage is not
regarded as being the result of any incompetence on the part of the tool makers,
whose skills were turned to working other materials such as shell, bone and
pottery, but rather as resulting from the differing needs arising from a stay at
the coast.
ANIMAL AND PLANT REMAINS
SHELLFISH
The Holocene midden member in the Die Kelders sequence is largely
composed of shell with interstitial sand, ash, and other inclusions. The exception
is layer 12 which is an occupation soil rather than a shell-midden. Some layers
(5, 8 and 9) have few inclusions other than shell and almost entirely represent
garbage heaps. Shell, which contributes to the rapid build-up of deposits,
is largely unweathered in this time range. Fragmentation, probably resulting
mostly from trampling, is, however, a factor that must be taken into account
and certain layers, especially in the main part of the cave, show a high degree
of comminution; but on the whole the shell remains are readily identifiable.
There is little question that the bulk of the shell represents food residues.
Shellfish are still collected and eaten by the local population and there are also
good ethno-historical records of the importance of shellfish in the diet of the
indigenous peoples at the time of the European contact. Shellfish eating was
the hallmark of the ‘Strandloper’ and as Goodwin (1935: 293) notes, shell-
middens were still in the process of formation in Van Riebeeck’s time. This has
since been confirmed by the discovery, during building excavations in the centre
of modern Cape Town, of shell-middens whose upper layers included European
goods of the early historic period (G. Avery pers. comm.).
The coastal zone offers a ready supply of food in the form of shellfish.
Although something of the order of 75 per cent by mass of a shellfish is inedible,
the edible portion is a good source of nourishment containing protein (10 g/
100 g), fat (29 g/100 g), minerals and vitamins (Fox 1966: 38).
It has long been appreciated by archaeologists in South Africa that shell-
fish residues can be readily identified and that they provide useful dietary
information as well as data on the selection and availability of different species
in what is essentially a ‘Strandloper’ economy. Goodwin’s collaboration with
Barnard in reporting the shellfish remains from Klipkop Cave at Hermanus
(Goodwin 1938a) is an example. What has developed since that time is an
awareness that a species list alone is not very informative and that a more
quantitative approach is desirable (Avery 1976; Deacon, H. J. 1970; Grindley
1967; Klein 1972; Maggs & Speed 1967; Speed 1969; Voigt 1973a, 19735).
However, sampling poses problems in quantification. If quantitative data on
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA 187
relative frequencies of minimum numbers of individuals are to be interpreted
in terms of exploitation patterns, it is necessary also to take into account the
mean live mass of different species and the relative abundance of shellfish popu-
lations in the tidal zones of the locality.
The shell components of the middens
Sampling
Since almost the entire deposit consisted of marine shell, it was considered
impracticable to retain all the shell for laboratory analysis. Instead, after various
sampling methods had been tried, what may be termed sieved bulk samples
were collected. This entailed the retention of all the shell from parts of selected
grid squares and natural stratigraphic units that remained after sieving on a
3-mm-mesh sieve. Dependent on the thickness of the stratigraphic unit, the
shell content from one to three buckets (volume approximately 0,03 m*) was
retained.
As will be seen from Table 19, the ratio of shell recovered from individual
stratigraphic units relative to the excavated volume is extremely variable, from
85,7 per cent in layer 2 to 13,9 per cent in layer 12. This is in part a reflection
of the nature of the deposit: layer 2 consisted mostly of loosely packed, unbroken
Shell with little sand, while layer 12 was a brown, sandy soil in which the shell
was incorporated. However, as indicated in Table 20, most sieved bulk samples
yielded 100-300 identifiable shells per bucket and this was considered adequate
for statistical analysis.
The distribution of shell in a midden is important in that it can reflect
social and economic factors, but its mode of deposition and subsequent dis-
turbance results in complex stratigraphic patterns. In order to approximate
more closely the collection of shellfish by the cave occupants during various
periods of the midden build-up, some layers were subdivided into naturally
occurring sub-units. It was not always possible, however, to achieve the same
level of precision in the separation of these sub-units and this may to some
extent account for sample variability. The extreme variability of the samples
is well demonstrated in Tables 19-22 which show respectively the ratio of shell
to excavated volume, the frequencies of genera in the individual samples, the
frequencies of Patella (limpet) species and those of Choromytilus meridionalis
(black mussel) and Perna perna (brown mussel). Not only is there a wide range
of variation in the amount of shell recovered from different grid squares and
layers, but there is also wide variation in cases where more than one sample
was taken from the same layer of the same square (e.g. square C8, layer 7) or
from adjacent squares of the same layer sub-unit (e.g. squares B2 and C2,
layer 3b) (Table 20). While this sort of variability is not unusual in most types
of excavation, it adds to the complexity of interpreting patterns of behaviour
from the midden refuse.
Two other factors influence sample variability. One is the change in
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
188
€°0 6°99 +00 ee) 80 8) ie ELI w0 [e307 e]duues 7%,
vSL 07 9 88 €1 6 667 I Sol 097 I LE 88S € 8h [e}0} snueH
ST vIE 666 CS ee lel SEY vi EO OL Ce ei ay COMO 3 SE i 0 4 " 8V
91 8ze «0.001 GO VG EG EEN SS rs so SOT S60 Iie 72) ii Cs i WG 10 4 * OY
CC Soya OO) as TG e058 = E62 Y OO Ol Yee Ch Ve KS 16) 6 £0 cl SvV
91 PTE 6,66 Para Uo Ceen OLS ee See Clee aioe EG OO oe 97 0:8 0 Ol 1 IN)
£9 6671 8.66 = as GLO SCS a hp Gis Gill OD Ore SS vZ 8'T pel ‘6 ete Ol SVV
Of 6€L ‘1. 00T ae al EOS BCE Gl Oe Gi Oy bl 6 8 AGG oe Or SVV
ci 6SST 6.66 = = SCONE SO Ea ty 87 Qi We Gh 9 +0 Sin Ore 9 70 Or vVV
L'0 6€1 666 = eee SO Di ea S 9 Givi OF cir, G iil 91 STI Si cer 98 " 8V
8:0 OD! OW = CoE ese Cae IE COs ee ea S Wes SI 6 a ee 98 LVV
Gs e OOOL a = S67 GN Si DOS ee AG iy Sin 6 SO 98 oVV
LG OLS 0001 Tae ee O97 LOS = = is wb SG Bi iron Or Or rd D8 ° EN
Ol SOc 0.001 a Gili) CHR G On 6 Wil 2 66 G Wl bl 89 = D8 LN
Ine Ivpb 6 66 aos O6E% = SASSEs = ih Oi Sit Ce rbal 6 OC S68 1S ess D8 8VV
SG O8r 0.001 = =e GliG OOS ty 06 ar IG SO Ci OSG aS D8 SVV
9°0 IG OWL 66 SSM sae Cl OG Be ae Q OG py Ct See aegis qL old
9°0 911 0001 CEN 6S COS == s. €7 Se oe ee CG fli ee ZN ibe neces L 8)
O'€ LI9 6.66 ee Oy GS)” | SIT 9°81 i Sn GC 0 81 67 89 Ol ere L 8)
UT SG OUD = = Colm AVSay se S le Sas ae may ese yi ie Sik oe L 80
S°0 L6 0'001 = oe vs ESOS, ess 61 9°61 are Coe BS GN fi GTi a ine L 8V
iG 19S F001 S CO GP ~~ Ogi Ke Wy GC YO 66 C8 eG v8 O'SI c +0 L pow
l'€ GD COCOl @é US . Gye BES = = 99 CsI SSO ws ©8 iii ih OCI S‘8I 9 60 L SVV
O'r €78 0.001 = oe SSC cme 2) Taman AG ! FO 88 170) Gil ee GES 99 LVV
O'€ L796 66 ier SS) OG WG Oe GC §0 ke oy S 80 OI SLI ES SO 9 SvVV
LI SET —- 8'66 ee ap 1S) 019 ae es Ei OY G 30 98 isi © ei Ge © ae te qs 2 @®
8°9 LOvI 6.66 a Vee 906 9 I 10 CONG OH LO GL OS €l 60 NG Ole = = S SVV
a 967 6.66 Ta RS SCG EGIL i €O Ol ve © O! OQ VS y ll O62 CCl es tee ee ¢ 7VV
a ZOE = 6 66 ies AL LL Iby i &@ Oe Gil ho oe Se YS one EL SSG. Se ee ale p ed
lie Ofr 6:66 ue NGG SS a ee sé 18 i 9) OS Girl KG OY LOE 0 v Ovi
9” 0S6 6:66 agree wo OGL § EO tb bP Se €@ @8 78 02 1 Qi Co C6 CW 4 VV
0°6 OL81 0-001 sae ae SOU OBS C6 Uo Say 9 60 C6 CO WS Le diy SS SS FO v oVV
G) est 0.001 im ioe OU SS Phe ee Me EO! eal Gp Vol Ce LB NS TA v 2 NAY
v'0 68 6:66 oo oe 8€ INCU Er ee 8 68 Caras 6 "Or i” Gi lig SOE € VE o€ cel
L‘0 CS OCD 68 Z'8S I XO GS &s ecg Ce Vil 3 CS 8% £81 ean gE PRESS)
a 9V7 666 es LOCH) cS te Cs 68 Seals Use CG gO yp 9 Ait 69 Tr ee q€ > Gl
OS 8E01 6.66 coe tae: SS ASUS. go) 5 9 8 80 66 S‘6 IC O€ LEG, 8.CC 8) 80 € cVV
0) SIL 6.66 ee S6 NCO ue i 60 ol ENT: © i Si OE) 6 fel € EVV
9° STE 6.66 ik YG OS 9 gil ee 9 gi € 60 ie So =: fe I mae
vie OL OU = = LES SLE ae We NG Eb WO Me lis AU 601 S'SI ae I SVV
9°7 SES 6.66 rani lege Ole Y IGSLS Ge O® S 60 Ai Cb ¢ 60 lis S(O) ee I EVV
lI sec —-: F001 se es UST SU Bete os fh Ben f © epi Sie or De EVV
w0 Lt 8°66 reli ve iC RP is Go GY nee (Gam AY, ie Sas (hi! CN I 8V
"ON % ON % ‘ON ONL F ‘ON % ‘ON % ‘ON % ON % ‘ON % ‘ON % Toke] erenbs
[e101 a — = =
gjduies % [e101 19AeT xDUOG DUdIg PUP uoj1y,) DIJI10d S1]01]DH JAJSAXE OqAHT, puadnusang DYN
SNJIJAUOAOY YD
“So]duues YING PADIS WOJJ BIOUDS : [JOYS IULILIA
O07 TEV
Gel We See winp OMe OWS OW7 OW¢C EGS SBS = LOD o@7 IES lee ysodap
jo % se ]ays JO suINjOA
Gi ve 70 Gi v0 ae v0 ime) ‘0 VC v0 £0 cl £0 el IIsYs JO StunyOny
9°8 0's 9°0 NG vl 0) Onl ¢'0 a Ip 90 LO VI CC ee PovBAavoxe
ysodap Jo sunjoA
cl Ol 6 78 D8 L 9 qs S Lv Vike t C | = cB
‘sajduues yyNQ PoAdis JO JaXv] JOd SOWINJOA P9}BABOXS : [JOYS UTIL IA]
6] ATAVL
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA 189
sampling procedure during the excavation, which resulted in more sieved bulk
samples from some squares or layers than had been taken in previously excavated
parts. The second is that it was only at the stage of laboratory analysis that the
importance of recording the different degrees of shell fragmentation in the
various strata was fully appreciated. It is evident that the more fragile shells
such as Choromytilus and Perna are more susceptible to fragmentation due to
trampling and burning than the more robust genera such as Pate//a and Burnu-
pena. Table 20 indicates that, where there is a decrease in the frequency of the
more fragile shells, there is a corresponding increase in that of the more robust
ones, and the high frequency of Burnupena, e.g. in square AA7, layer 6 and
square C8, layer 7, is probably indicative of a high degree of fragmentation of
the more fragile shells. However, since counts were not restricted only to
complete shells but also included identifiable parts large enough to be retained
on the 3-mm-mesh sieve, this factor is not considered to have added significantly
to possible sample bias resulting from the other factors mentioned.
Identification and quantification
The identification of the shells was based on their gross morphological
character. This was relatively easy in most cases, although affected by break-
ages and colour fading. Generally the most durable shells were found to be
Patella and Burnupena, whilst Choromytilus, Perna, Haliotis, Turbo and Oxystele
are generally more fragmented in the samples. Counts were made on such
identifiable features as umbones (left and right) in Choromytilus and Perna,
spires in Haliotis, apices in Oxystele and Burnupena, and both apices and
opercula in Turbo, where the highest counts are normally given by the opercula.
No complete shells of less than 2 cm maximum length were included in the
counts as they were considered to have been too small to have played any part
in the diet. These include all Crepidula porcellana which are assumed to have
been introduced into the deposit adhering to the outer shell of Patella argen-
villei. Table 20 lists the counts from the various bulk shell samples. Because of
the statistically low counts the main genera rather than individual species are
listed. In addition, the mussels Choromytilus meridionalis and Perna perna are
grouped together in the table because the genera are morphologically closely
similar. Supplementary Tables (21 and 22) listing the species composition of
the limpets and the mussels are also provided.
Table 20 indicates that the most commonly occurring genera are Choro-
mytilus and Perna. These account for 66,9 per cent of the total shell sample,
and range between about 40 and 90 per cent of the frequencies for individual
samples, with twenty-two of the forty-one samples comprising over 70 per cent
of these two genera. Burnupena, with 17,3 per cent of the total sample and
individual frequencies ranging from about 2 to 41 per cent, is next in numerical
frequency. The importance of Burnupena as a food source is debatable: its
flesh is said to be bitter and unpalatable, but it occurs in frequencies that are
generally too high for the possibility that the shells included in Table 20 merely
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
190
[e103 wokeT 1019 snjnao “df SLDJNUDAS cel
|
tC
vive LyvV 638 tO
Oe S09 SIT
(S 68 l
€ 6 Sl
a vl v
174 14 a,
S Cl ar
Ol iG G
9 SG (4
o I I
S Ol ae =
¢ =. ——
Cl cl G
I — —
G I —
8 Tl 14
v 9 ae
C are G I
LS Se [L
I G I
[L 6 I
Il Gl maa
O£ OV 14
EG GG A! 2s
6 9 v
[L, S =
16 CS el
—— 6 —
I 9¢ l
c 16 —
VI 9] [
9¢ VE 8 =a
I 9] G
G G G
o if I
S 8 I
Oc 67 L
— € —
I 9 4
174 GI v aa
I | i
r= I I
‘sodtuues yjNq Poadis ul so1seds yyjajv_ :{[OYS dULIe|A
VAceCKAD
DULJDUDAS *q ADAJYIOI*q = vADGADG “d
J [| FANA [9 | | eo es NS Soe ao ee
1A]JIAUIGAD *q
O
MRO Ol 2
S
Ot ttt tinin
yey} ojaWes 9%
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA 191
represent unworked shells brought into the cave for eventual ornamental use,
since only twenty-two perforated examples were found (Table 4). Frequencies
of other genera are mostly low, only rarely exceeding 10 per cent of individual
sample totals, and the very low frequencies of Bullia and Chiton suggest that
they are chance inclusions. It is possible that the Bullia are unworked shells
that should perhaps be considered with the perforated shells (see Table 4 and
p. 144).
Individual sample counts for Patella species given in Table 21 show a
range of from | to 114 per sample. Of the six species represented P. granatina
is most common (46,7% of the sample total) followed by P. granularis
(24.4%). The high frequencies of these two species are doubtless the
result of their being the two most common Patella species (Day 1969: 155, 156).
The other four species are each present in frequencies lower than 10 per cent of
the sample total. Although the sampling method does not allow for accurate
assessment of change through time by the measurement of frequency differences
between layers, calculation of the average shell count for each layer shows
Layer 12 to have the greatest mean frequency (66). A decline in layers 10 and 8
is followed by increases in layers 7 and 6, when the frequency stabilizes until
layer 4, but declines again in layers 3 to 1. In the context of the total marine
shell component (Table 20) Patella frequencies are generally below 10 per cent,
although three of the seven samples from layer 7 exceed this, as do two of the
three from layer 12, that from square A8 yielding an exceptional 36,3 per cent.
Layer 12 is also noteworthy in having yielded the widest range of species as well
as some of the biggest individuals.
The sample totals for Choromytilus and Perna given in Table 22 show that
frequency of the black mussel exceeds that of the brown by a factor of almost
three to one, with individual sample frequencies of the latter ranging from
0 to 48,8 per cent. This is probably a reflection of the greater visibility and
accessibility of Choromytilus. As mentioned in the foregoing discussion of the
Patella species, the sampling procedure causes problems in the analysis of
temporal change. In the case of the mussels, however, the mean frequency
variation between layers is so great as to preclude any inferences regarding
exploitation trends, and the same is true of the mean Choromytilus : Perna
ratios. It is worth noting, though, that layer 10 has the highest mean frequency
of all the layers for combined samples and for both genera (483 and 246 respec-
tively). A factor that should be borne in mind when considering the range of
variation between Choromytilus and Perna frequencies, particularly where more
than one sample is represented from the same square and the same layer,
e.g. square C8, layer 7, is that Perna is more fragile than Choromytilus, so that
low frequencies of Perna may indicate a higher degree of fragmentation.
Interpretation of shell counts
It is apparent from the shell analysis of the Die Kelders middens that
collecting of shellfish was directed primarily at Choromytilus and Perna. These
192 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
TABLE 22
Marine shell: Choromytilus and Perna in sieved bulk samples.
Choromytilus Perna Pernaas %
Square Layer Dj R* L R Total** of total
AS oo, Uae hic. ee 1 21 19 13 11 34 38,2
AA3 ese We 2a SZ 151 32 26 184 17,4
AA3 a ees 2b 267 Dial [SZ 145 419 36,3
AAS Seat ein 2b 395 388 il 152 547 27,8
Bile ceeac es, Mua Ae 2b 209 224 65 45 289 77), )
AA3 gn te. ase 3 86 82 3 9 95 9,5
AAS ae 3 468 440 129 ele So)7/ 21,6
BOF ea yea ae 3b 150 173 22 28 201 13,9
C2 Sean teu 3b 89 76 — — 89 —
BY 4 36 28 Py] 5) 10 38 26,3
AA3 4 76 67 38 40 116 34,5
AAS 4 699 Wd 283 233 1 008 28,1
AA6 4 620 574 64 59 684 9,4
A2 4 170 174 a2 52 226 23,0
B2 4 68 83 61 46 144 42,4
AA2 5) 171 174 49 47 223 22,0
AAS 5 700 685 206 186 906 22,1
@2): 5b 93 139 DS 18 164 IS 2
AAS 6 33D 378 80 62 458 17,5
AA7 6 189 200 158 136 358 44,1
AAS 7 223 192 120 126 349 36,1
A6 7 168 190 219 210 409 S355)
A8 7 34 35) 19 7/ 54 3
C8 i 171 187 4 12 199 6,0
C8 7 306 288 84 97 403 24,1
Csi 7 34 42 6 17 SY 28,8
DIOR Ne Bee 7 80 68 19 15 99 19.2)
AAS Rahs 7 eae 8a 220 DAD 50 53 273 19,4
AA8 selp > pate 8a 287 271 103 99 390 26,4
NT ope gs OP cease ce sia a 8a 105 Sy7/ DD 2D 9 12,3
RCO gee TN OO cage 8a 310 340 120 101 460 26,1
ASK Vac cane ge 8a 409 384 86 68 495 17,4
AA6 ei da 8b 102 111 21 19 13 15,9
AAT aeahS eeirs 8b 85 59 23 7) 108 | 3)
AA4 Cert, es 10 631 701 324 299 1025 31,6
AAS Pag 10 287 264 233 250 537 46,5
AAS gee ae tl 10 720 680 352 333 1072 32,8
AST? Vee ods one Mee 10 224 200 60 48 284 Die
AAS5 ee Ue: 12 184 165 60 50 244 24,6
AG: “Seana: 1 87 79 96 115 202 56,9
ASHE B50 ene iw 50 67 64 63 131 48,8
Species total** 2 10114 3770 13 884 —
% sample total : 72,8 (SPOTS
i L = left umbo, R = right umbo.
** Totals are based on the higher count, left or right, for each genus.
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA 193
vary in size with age and there is a corresponding difference in flesh yield. An
attempt was made to evaluate the size range of Choromytilus shells in the
midden samples to gain a better appreciation of the food contributed by the
mussel component. Some other larger shellfish that are represented by lower
frequencies have a high value in flesh yield and their importance is not imme-
diately apparent from simple counts.
A limited sample of shellfish was collected from the Blouberg beach near
Cape Town, a locality some 140 km west of Die Kelders with somewhat colder
water conditions. These factors are not, however, considered likely to have a
significant effect on the comparability of the sample. The sample consisted of
100 Choromytilus, 50 Burnupena, 10 Turbo sarmaticus and 9 Haliotis midae and
was collected during winter under a permit which restricts both the maximum
number and minimum size of specimens. As far as possible collecting was
aimed at different sized individuals in the various genera as interest was in the
relationship between flesh yield and shell size. No attempt was made to sample
the species composition of the intertidal fauna, although this is an obvious
approach that should be borne in mind for future research, but would need to
be carried out at Die Kelders specifically for it to have any direct relevance to
the site.
Because of the fragmentation of Choromytilus in the midden sample, the
morphological character chosen for size comparison with the modern sample
was the width of the blue bands that are found on the interior of the valves.
The blue band width range in the Choromytilus shells is between 3 and 9 mm
and this range was divided into 3-5 mm, 5-7 mm and 7-9 mm classes. There
was also a fourth class of indeterminate size for highly fragmented shells in
the midden sample. In the modern samples different blue band widths gave the
following average flesh mass: 3-5 mm = 3,0 g; 5-7 mm = 6,9 g;
7-9 mm = 30,7 g. The big mass increase in the largest class suggests that
the blue band width increase is not a simple correlate of size. Most of the
midden samples were in the 3-7 mm range, however, and the largest size of
mussel was represented by less than 10 per cent in the 7-9 mm range. This
fact may be seen as significant and possibly reflects collecting practices (see
Buchanan et al. 1978: 91), although it is evident that the larger shells are thicker
and thus less subject to fragmentation than the smaller, thinner ones. In the
measured samples from the different layers it was thus Choromytilus in the
5—7 mm blue band width range that contributed the bulk of the flesh eaten.
About 15 mussels of this size would yield 100 g of flesh and that amount would
contribute some 70-90 calories (Fox 1966: 38). There would be an obvious
advantage in the selection of larger mussels, but these are unlikely to be avail-
able in quantity in a regularly exploited mussel population. It can be expected
that even a small human group would have been capable of serious depletion
of the local mussel beds where the individual needs of a single member could
have been between 100 and 200 mussels per day.
A relationship between flesh mass and operculum size was worked out
194 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
for the modern Turbo specimens collected, and on the basis of this admittedly
small sample an estimated flesh mass of 20 g each was calculated for the
Turbo represented by opercula found in the midden deposit. The flesh yield of
Turbo is thus three times that of Choromytilus. Haliotis has an even higher
yield: the flesh mass in nine mature modern specimens was found to be
between 199 g and 433 g with a mean of 287 g. Conservation laws at present
prohibit the collecting of immature individuals, that is Haliotis less than 12 years
old (Rand 1971: 126). The shell of the immature Haliotis is very friable and as a
consequence it is largely mature individuals that are represented in the deposit.
In terms of yield one Haliotis shell in the midden is equivalent to some forty
Choromytilus shells. Among the remaining shellfish eaten, Oxystele are
similar in yield to Choromytilus but in general represent only some 10 per cent
or less of the middens. The Patella are larger than the Choromytilus and
Perna but tend to be represented in the middens in low percentages, except in
layer 12.
The frequencies of shellfish found in the different layers in the late Holocene
deposits at Die Kelders (Table 20) give an indication of the range of shellfish
collected. Calculation of the yield in flesh mass of individual species, however,
gives a slightly different perspective to the frequency counts.
Conclusions
The earliest layer of the sequence, layer 12, although containing only
some 14 per cent by volume of shell, includes the greatest variety of shellfish and
also shells of generally larger size. This suggests the exploitation of a rich shell-
fish fauna that was available to the initial groups occupying DK 1. The midden
accumulation overlying layer 12 seems to have been directed more towards the
lower yielding but easily obtainable mussels, mainly Choromytilus, possibly
because population pressures necessitated the exploitation of a wider subsistence
base. Layer 12 and the overlying layers are, however, not directly comparable
because the former is an occupation soil and the latter are refuse heaps. It should
also be borne in mind that only a limited area of the cave has been excavated
and possible occupation areas related to these refuse heaps may be located
elsewhere. However, it is possible that the contrasts indicated point to two
factors; firstly to a reduction through time in the richness and diversity of the
shellfish fauna and secondly, and perhaps more probably, a change in the
importance of shellfish in the economy during the later occupations. Layer 12
represents an occupation some 2000 years ago when the population of the
area were primarily hunter—gatherers visiting the coast during a restricted
season. Their versatility in exploiting their environment is supported by evidence
from other food and cultural remains. In the uppermost layers, up to 500 years
younger, there is evidence of increased reliance on domestic animals and a more
protracted season spent at the coast. The general visible emphasis throughout
the occupation, however, continued to rest on mussel exploitation.
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA 195
FISH
The abundance of shellfood residues at most coastal cave middens tends
to overshadow the presence of the less conspicuous fish remains. As the catching
of fish would have been more demanding in skill and technology than the
collecting of shellfish, prehistoric fishing methods have been a focus of interest
of a number of investigators. In one of the earlier investigations Goodwin
(1946: 134-141) described numerous coastal “vywers’ or tidal fish-traps, the
remains of which are still to be found along the coast, and which in isolated
instances are still in use today.
These traps consist of an enclosure which ‘is built up as a dry-stone wall
to such a height that normal high tides will cover the ““vywer’’ and permit fish
to swim freely over the enclosed area. As the tide sinks, the water runs out
through the interstices between the stones, while the fish are trapped and can
be clubbed and caught by hand. It is a simple application of the system used for
netting fish, though here the dry-stone walling provides the imbrications’
(Goodwin 1946: 134).
Goodwin, who recognized the problem of dating these fish-traps, suggested
that the sudden proliferation in fish remains at Oakhurst and other middens
in the “developed Wilton’ levels correlated with the construction of the traps.
Avery’s (1975) more recent observations on fish-traps between Walker Bay and
Cape Agulhas, which include a record of catches from a functioning trap,
support Goodwin’s description of the traps and their efficiency as a means of
catching fish. Evidence of other possible prehistoric fishing methods is men-
tioned by Goodwin (1946: 340) in quoting a letter received from a Mr Pike
who reported the discovery of ‘a fishing line made of a certain wild vine of
fibrous nature. This has been shredded and turned into a fishing line and the
hook was a bone tied in the middle and sharpened on each side.’ At that time
Goodwin had not found any fish gorges in midden deposits but they have
subsequently been recovered from Nelson Bay Cave, Cape south coast (R. R.
Inskeep pers. comm.; Deacon, J. 1978, figs 10-11) and from Elands Bay Cave,
Cape west coast (J. E. Parkington pers. comm.). Other material evidence of
line-fishing on the coast has come from the discovery of stone sinkers from
Swartrif midden, Cape south coast (Deacon, H. J. 1970: 43) and Nelson Bay
Cave (R. R. Inskeep pers. comm.; Deacon, J. 1978, table 1). The spearing
of fish from rocks or positions in the sea is depicted in prehistoric rock art
(Willcox 1963: 28-30; Carter 1965: 579) and recounted by early travellers
(Kolb 1738: 256-257) and seems well established as a further method that
was used.
The quantity of fish bones clearly attests to successful fishing methods
having been used at Die Kelders. In all probability a number of different
techniques were used, depending on the sea conditions and the type of fish.
Because of their maintenance needs the use of fish-traps would, however, imply
relatively sedentary population and they may not have come into use until
herding was established in the area.
196 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Sampling, identification and quantification
All fish remains retained after sieving were identified as far as possible.
They were found to belong to species still common in the area today. Counts
were based on dentaries and premaxillae as these were found to be the best
surviving bones in all the major levels. By far the greater number of fish
recovered from DK | belong to the family Sparidae, members of which occur
in all but the coldest seas of all oceans and are usually concentrated along the
shore in fairly shallow water (Smith 1949: 265). Some species enter and live in
estuaries while others penetrate deeper water. The fish of this family represented
at DK | are Pachymetopon blochii (hottentots), Lithognathus lithognathus (white
steenbras), and Cymatoceps nastutus (mussel-cracker or biskop), all of which are
still commercially important.
The total counts and the distribution of the fish remains throughout the
deposits, shown in Table 23, reflect the major role Pachymetopon blochii played
in supplying the fish food during the midden build-up. From the beginning of
the Holocene occupation, this well-known fish, which frequents deepish waters
in rocky areas on the Cape west coast mainly west of Cape Agulhas, accounted
for some 92 per cent of the total number of fish brought back to the site. The
high count of individuals does not necessarily reflect a high yield of edible flesh.
P. blochii may obtain a length of 45 cm but are generally much smaller (Smith
1949: 276).
The next most numerous fish remains at DK 1 are of Lithognathus litho-
gnathus which is found along all South African coasts. It has a habitat preference
for waters with a sandy bottom. Although this fish may attain a length of 180 cm,
jawbones from DK 1 suggest a size range considerably below this. In their
search for food, white steenbras usually enter shallow water and adopt a
characteristic feeding attitude, head downwards on to the sea floor, the body
in an almost vertical position with the tail acting as a propeller, forcing the
pointed mouth into the sand (Biden 1954: 252). In this position they would be
most vulnerable to spearing or even catching by hand. Rhabdosargus globiceps
(white stumpnose), represented in the samples, also occurs all along the local
coast. It attains a length exceeding 50 cm. Today it is usually caught close
inshore by nets or line. Cymatoceps nastutus occurs in lower frequency in the
samples. It may attain a mass of up to 20 kg, and exceed 45 cm in length. Found
only off the South African coast, nowhere abundant, it frequents rocky areas
and often feeds in shallow water (Smith 1949: 271).
Other families which were represented in smaller numbers in the deposits
are as follows:
The Coracinidae, represented by Coracinus capensis (galjoen), are found
in shallow and turbulent waters all along thé coast. They average about 1,4 kg
and form shoals in winter (Smith 1949: 248).
The Pomatidae, represented by Pomatomus saltatrix (elf), are found in all
but the coldest waters in all oceans and attain a length exceeding 122 cm (Smith:
1949: 224).
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA 197
The category ‘other’ (Table 23) comprises nine individuals; 2 Liza richard-
sonii (haarders) from layer 12; 1 Tachysurus feliceps (sea barbel) from layer 12;
3 Pomadysis comersonni (grunter), 1 from layer 7, 2 from layer 2; 1 Diplodus
trifasciatus (zebra) from layer 10; 2 Seriola lalandii (yellowtail) from layer 12.
These numbers are considered to be too low to be significant.
Fishing methods
Whilst it was generally possible to identify the remains, it is more difficult
to determine the methods used for catching the fish. This is due mainly to the
absence of direct material evidence of fishing practices. However, some inference
can be drawn from the behaviour of different species.
As Pachymetopon blochii tend to frequent areas of kelp, it is unlikely that
they could have been speared successfully, given the depth of water and poor
visibility under the cover of the kelp. The use of tidal fish-traps to catch this
species is thought equally unlikely as the coastline near DK 1, where rocky, is
too steep and is broken only by narrow gullies. Again, the use of these traps
can be considered unlikely because of the near absence of Liza richardsonii in
the fish remains. These fish, which are distributed all along our coasts, feature
most prominently in fish counts derived from a still-operative fish-trap situated
at Die Dam, some 30 km east of DK 1 (Avery 1975). They would, therefore,
reasonably be expected to have formed part of the catch had small traps been
built at or near DK 1 or had fish been brought from the nearest known trap
sites clustered close to Danger Point about 10 km to the south (G. Avery pers.
comm.). This strongly suggests the possibility that P. blochii were caught on
lines. In line-fishing for them, sea-worms or rock-lobster can be used as bait
(Biden 1954: 232), or simply a bunch of limpets on a line if some sort of scoop
net is available (M. J. Penrith pers. comm.). Unfortunately there is little direct
evidence to support line-fishing, as only one or two bone points have been
recovered at DK 1 that could possibly be classified as fish gorges. This is in
contrast with large numbers recovered at Elands Bay to the west and Nelson Bay
Cove to the east and may be accounted for by temporal factors, as the Elands
Bay and Nelson Bay gorges are dated to occupations several thousand years
earlier than those at DK 1. However, there were no finds of line or netting at
Die Kelders and the evidence for line-fishing is thus somewhat inconclusive at
present.
The capture of Lithognathus lithognathus could have entailed the use of
spears, aS mentioned earlier. The success of this method has been recorded in
the Journal of Van Riebeeck (Moodie ed. 1838: 93): the entry for 20 January
1657 records that people of the Hottentot tribe known as the “Caepmans’
(Goringhaiqua) ‘came with 10 oxen laden with steenbrasen, which they had this
morning killed with assegays in some shallow water near False Bay . . . enough
to feed the garrison for 3 or 4 days’. More recent confirmation of the use of this
method was reported from Walvis Bay by Biden (1954: 253), who describes the
spearing of these fish with straightened fish-hooks attached to ‘4 ft’ (1,2 m)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
198
vo SO LO 0) i ST oes
Gi 06 YO el Ge OS ta Ce EH OT °° * [e303 eJdures %
8I (G6 cE 6l € IL LSv lt ¢L9 L6 SOE 699 Orr 8€% 78S LSt vt 6PF ‘ : * — -[2}0} IoAeT
‘ I9L v
cO 6 ¢ I I (4 4 4 : y 194Y1O
10 v I 4 I * * — SnBaDs snpojdiq
v0 0@ € v S 4 I I 6 I I " X/1DIIDS snuojouog
90 87 02 e I € I I * * stsuadva snuiovsoD
S‘0 Ve L I 8 I if € Z I : Sninsou sdasojoud ya
S‘I €L 6V v 6 6 8 € I € I i ~ 9yUTUTIO}OpUr
seplieds 10y310
10 € I iG : Dqdvs Snsavsopquyy
61) LS z 61 SI € 6 G I I 4 € * $do01q0]8 sn3apsopqoyy
0°€ €rl 9 I 6 81 Cl L Ol Or Ol cE Cl eT € SNYIDUSOY IN] SnyIoUsOoYyNT
+96 OOF P 8I (G6 (G6 8T C9 VEE T LE9 68 16c L79 STE Le~ OPS Iyl 607 Ip * 11490]q uodojaudAyovog
[®}0} [e}0} [®10} 27S = IT (G6 0@ LI SI Gi Ol 6 8 L 9 S v (5 4 I JOKeT
gidues osjduirg sorseds
oO
ea a a a ee eee
"sorsods ys
€7 ATAV
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA 199
sticks. Whilst no such sticks were found at DK 1, there are numbers of bone
points in the deposits which might have served as projectile tips.
While there is thus no incontrovertible evidence to support the use of any
of the fishing methods discussed, the use of lines and spears or harpoons is
likely. Line-fishing may have been the most important method and on present
indications tidal traps were probably not used by the Die Kelders fishermen.
Fishing and economy
The data set out in Table 23 reveal that Pachymetopon blochii were the
staple fish diet throughout the accumulation of the DK | deposits. In layers
containing at least 50 fish, this species formed 83-95 per cent of the total. Their
numbers (1 334) in layer 12 show that fishing methods were competently
practised from the beginning of the late Holocene cave occupation. The next
most common fish was generally Lithognathus lithognathus, though with fre-
quencies considerably below those of P. blochii. Other fish were far less
numerous, only rarely exceeding 2 per cent of any layer total.
It is not possible to measure the overall significance of the fish component
in the food remains at DK 1 in dietary terms without a more complete study
of the relationship between the size of dentaries and live fish weights. Com-
parison could then be made between fish remains and shellfish or other food
remains in terms of calories. Such an investigation relies on an extensive pro-
gramme of sampling modern fish populations such as that being carried out by
C. Poggenpoel of the University of Cape Town, but lies outside the scope of
this investigation. However, to test the feasibility of such an approach six
P. blochii were measured and weighed (Table 24), but in such a small sample
TABLE 24
Fish: Pachymetopon blochii; measurements and flesh mass.
Max.
Specimen Skeletal Max. length Max. height thickness Mass
No. part (mm) (mm) (mm) (g)
L R IL, R L R
aE Premaxilla B32 13) 247) 10,11 10,05 2,80 2,75 226
Dentary 14,07 14,32 9,47 9,63 2,98 3,30
Deel.) Premaxilla 12,80 12,99 10,32 10,05 MBS HY) 194
Dentary 1 Oe ee bc 8,64 9,28 2,61 2,54
Sr mee’ Premaxilla 13,16 13,00 10,00 10,00 Do DENS) 179
Dentary 13,05 13,24 9,46 9,36 DS DSW)
(in A Premaxilla 13,88 14,06 11,20 10,75 Dsl ASS) 200
Dentary + 13,95 13,81 +10,04 10,01 Deion 90
Sash “ae Premaxilla 12,25 12,15 10,01 10,12 DO eS 152
Dentary 11,71 11,90 9,21 9,30 MpSio) ~ Ppphs
es ee es Premaxilla D452 5525 19,85 19,85 4,99 4,98 1031
Dentary DSO) mee 17,10 17,01 4,82 4,95
Note. L, R = Left, Right.
200 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
the correlation coefficient between jaw lengths and body weights was found to
be too unreliable to allow meaningful interpretation. The nutritional value of
this fish in the diet of the cave occupants is, however, indicated by the values of
protein (18,8 g/100 g) and oil (1,97 g/100 g) reported in the literature (Fox 1966,
table 36). Even allowing for 50 per cent loss of total mass for such inedibles as
skin and bones, the edible residue of fish would have contributed a significant
source of protein, given the numbers represented in the deposit.
BIRDS
At present only the bird fauna from layers 1 to 4 has been analysed and
the counts are shown in Table 25. G. Avery, who undertook the identifications,
TABLE 25
Birds: layers 1-4.
Layer
Species Common name lL 2-3 -@ Environment
Spheniscus demersus Jackass penguin 1 =2) sl 4
Family Diomedeidae Albatross spp 1 =
Family Procellariidae Petrel, small spp — — — 2
Family Procellariidae medium spp 1— — 1
Morus capensis Cape gannet 213) 2556 Marine
Phalacrocorax carbo White-breasted cormorant 1 ay ey Bel
Phalacrocorax capensis Cape cormorant Qe de Ni 3
Phalacrocorax neglectus Bank cormorant a a |
Larus dominicanus Southern black-backed gull aap IL why ah
Family Anatidae Duck spp —= jl 1 1 Fresh-water
Fulica cristata African coot — 2— 2
Francolinus capensis Cape francolin 1—- — — Terrestrial
Falco rupicolus Rock kestrel 1 i
Order Falconiformes indet. Onieae —- — — 1 Terrestrial: may nest on
Order Strigiformes indet. Owl sp —- i1t-— — ledges, probably
Corvultur albicollis Witteriected raven —- — — 1 natural occur-
Family Sturnidae Starling 1 2 a 2 rence in deposit
Total 12 Sees
Table compiled by G. Avery
is of the opinion (pers. comm.) that the species listed and the proportions in
which they are represented reflect a general pattern of bird-hunting indicated
in other local Holocene middens.
It can be seen from the table that marine birds make up the bulk of the
bird assemblage. When measured against the total of all bird remains, marine
birds account for 74 per cent. This is increased to some 87 per cent if five out
of the six terrestrial bird classes are excluded on the grounds that their presence
may simply have been due to their habit of nesting on near-by ledges (G. Avery
pers. comm.).
The frequency of bird remains in the top middens is low relative to other
classes of food remains and it is evident that in these layers the sea birds, which
form the bulk of the bird fauna, did not represent a major food resource.
Indeed, the bird fauna may have had even greater value as a source of long,
light shafts of bone for artefact use. Little can at present be said about the
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA 201
methods used for hunting these birds except to mention that cormorants usually
occur in large flocks, frequently settling on near-by rocks (McLachlan &
Liversidge 1970: 24) where they would have presented no problem to hunters
equipped with bows and arrows, clubs or snares. Gannets do not at present
come close inshore and the remains at the site may be derived from birds washed
ashore (G. Avery pers. comm.). One unusual find at the site was the partly
articulated skeleton of a gannet found in layer 10 in the eastern part of the
grid. This gannet was apparently not butchered and could be a natural inclusion.
REPTILES
Reptile remains at DK 1 are dominated by the tortoise Testudo angulata.
Evidence from the lower (M.S.A.) levels indicates that these slow-moving
ground game have been a source of food in the Gansbaai area since the first
known human settlements there, some 80000 years ago. But their survival is
threatened by the increase in land under cultivation, by collecting, and by their
continued use as food, both in small numbers by farm labourers and in large
quantities at farm “braais’ (barbeques) (Rau 1969: 43).
Tortoise counts from DK 1 (Table 26) show that the early occupants of
the cave during the late Holocene (layer 12) relied less on these animals as a
TABLE 26
Reptiles: tortoises (minimum numbers of individuals).
Maver ue, 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 22 Total
Individuals . . — 42 1. 2p 5 420 38 8 744 17 10 358
Yorigal . »o = ily SO Gil 1 Til 285 TOG By) eng oy OS oo
source of food than did their successors, and that they were more successful
predators of mammals and fish (Tables 23 and 27). As mentioned in the pre-
ceding section, tortoises were of value not only as food, but their carapaces were
also modified to serve as containers.
Snakes, both poisonous and non-poisonous, are fairly common in the
Gansbaai area, though rarely seen. Vertebrae and isolated jaw fragments were
found in all layers of the deposit. These have not been identified but are believed
to be principally mole snakes (Pseudaspis cana) which are the main species in
the area. They are non-venomous and kill their prey, mainly moles, dune
mole-rats, field rats and vlei rats by constriction (FitzSimons 1912: 98-100).
Some of the vertebrae were heavily ochre-stained and may have been threaded
for use as necklaces.
MAMMALS
Domestic animals
The introduction of domestic animals may be presumed to have brought
about important changes in the ecology of the peoples in the Die Kelders area.
The changes may have included an increase in population density following
more settled existence related to animal husbandry, whether or not the cave
202 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
occupants were themselves the herders, and a decrease in the importance of
hunting. In part these changes can be documented by the Die Kelders evidence.
Of importance here, however, is the direct evidence at DK 1 for the appearance
of herding. The occurrence of domestic sheep in prehistoric times at the Cape
was first demonstrated at Die Kelders and was later confirmed by finds at other
Jate Holocene sites. At numbers of these sites of later Holocene age studied or
under study there appears to be a close link between the introduction of sheep,
probably also cattle, and pottery.
Sheep (Ovis aries)
In previous publications dealing with the sheep remains at Die Kelders
(Schweitzer 1974; Schweitzer & Scott 1973), these were described as being
restricted mainly to layer 2a—b, with minor additions from layers 1 and 3.
Recent re-examinations of the faunal remains have, however, resulted in the
addition of a further five individuals, bringing the total sample count of firmly
identified animals up to thirty (Table 27). Layer 2a—b remains the main sheep-
TABLE 27
Mammals: Species list. Minimum numbers of individuals by which different mammalian
species are represented in the Later Stone Age horizons of Die Kelders 1 (Klein & Scott
unpublished). Stratigraphically lower units to the right.
ie)
S)
(=)
NS)
iS)
Ww
bh
Nn
oO
q
No)
al
i=)
_—
i)
Layer
Papio ursinus, chacma baboon
Homo sapiens, man
Canis mesomelas, jackal
Canis familiaris, dog :
Ictonyx striatus, zorilla .
Mellivora capensis, honey- badger
Genetta sp(p), genets
Herpestes pulverulentis, Cape erey
mongoose .
Felis libyca, wild- cat
Felis cf. serval, serval
Panthera pardus, leopard 5
Avelocephalusy pusillus, Cape fur
sea .
Mirounga leonina, elephant seal
Procavia capensis, hyrax
Loxodonta africana, African
elephant
Diceros bicornis, black rhinoceros
Hippopotamus amphibius hippo-
potamus :
Potamochoerus porcus, bush- “Pig °
Syncerus caffer, buffalo .
Bos taurus, cattle . ‘
Tragelaphus scriptus, bush-buck ‘
Hippotragus leucophaeus, blue
antelope ; 71
Aiesiesns buselaphus, hartebeest
Damaliscus dorcas, bontebok
Raphicerus melanotis, grysbok
R. campestris, steenbok .
Raphicerus spp, grysbok/steenbok
Oreotragus oreotragus, klipspringer
Pelea capreolus, grey rhebuck
Ovisaries,sheep . 5
Hystrix africae- australis,
porcupine :
Bathyergus suillus, mole- ‘rat ‘
Lagomorpha (2 spp), hares
Cetacea, cetaceans .
Llol tt
ell lee
mel | ere
Ped de
ell[] eo
Pda
Ma A
reves ie
ellille
meet ttle
mm aite | us
|| |
L]]
I sl
eles
PI
Pid)
ee
ote
eli)
| ee
a= — ee Y
lies
col u
Sas
wll oll ld
— i
w |
= [lps
wl w
mls
el
lS
Le a)
pS
| |
|
[=
|
I |
| |
| |
|
|
= |
elealal
Lt
lial
lee lfalealia
|| ||
(lieoy lee
=| S|
| |
(lea
Mle
ellie
Piel
<i} HESeall |
{esl esto
ONES | |
Ww
Set eyecare.
SSeS
I tes 2
El] eserves lt |
NA
o
ell—=lI11
_—
co
~~
po
a)
—_—
—_—
| SlSesel lt Tish Ul ale Thel IIIb) e
Kh
[| 8]
Nn
N
Un
i>)
Ww
(o>)
| Sl
vl Sl
I] al
pS
(ony
N
Nn
1s!
i)
ee
~]
i)
_
lle
|
|
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA 203
bearing horizon with a total sample of eighteen sheep. The remainder, which
were mainly identified from teeth and jaw fragments, were found in layers 1,
3-5, 7 and 10 (R. G. Klein pers. comm.), thus confirming the previous tentative
suggestion (Schweitzer 1974: 81) of the presence of sheep from the time layer 10
was deposited some 2 000 years ago. It should be noted that all sheep remains
were limited to the above-mentioned layers, which are sheil-middens, and no
sheep bones at all were found in the clearly demarcated and extensively excavated
occupation horizon, layer 12, which generated over 1 000 well-made potsherds,
and which was dated to 1960 + 85 B.P. (GX-1688). Support for the early
arrival of sheep in the area comes from Avery’s (1975: 112) excavation at
Hawston, from a layer dated to between 1860 + 60 B.P. (Pta—834) and
1900 + 40 B.P. (Pta—835) as well as from recent excavations at Byneskranskop
(R. G. Klein pers. comm.) for which a date of 1880 + 50 B.P. (Pta—-1865) has
been obtained from a layer containing both sheep remains and pottery.
The age groups reflected by these additional remains support the dominance
of immature animals in the previously established age group patterns. As the
additional material is mainly dental it does not contribute any new data on the
sex ratios of the sample. Comparisons based on tooth eruptions in living animals
must perforce incorporate a margin of error when related to skeletal remains
which lack gums, and the potential errors are further increased by subjectivity
in assigning border-line cases in age groupings. Further, age is more difficult
to determine in older specimens. The dominance of young males and older
females, based on the frequency of horn cores in the sample, was used to support
an argument that systematic herding was practised (Schweitzer 1974: 79-80).
It has since been established by G. Avery (pers. comm.) that over 60 per cent
of all ‘indigenous’ Namaqua Afrikaner female sheep at Carnarvon, Cape,
experimental station have horns. The validity of the argument may, therefore,
be somewhat weakened.
It is not inconceivable, however, that the sheep that were eaten during the
earlier timie of the cave occupation were gained by theft or barter and that the
cave occupants then were hunter—gatherers, but in layer 2 times the occupants
may well have been managing sheep flocks and in this sense would have been
herders.
Cattle (Bos taurus)
In addition to domestic sheep, the faunal remains from layer Z probably
aiso include cattie. At present the matter of identificaticz is coniolicated by the
dental and osteological similarities between young cattle and iz ture bustaloes,
and positive identification must await ‘he further studv 01 comparative maici.al.
Domestic doz (Canis familiaris)
Positive identification. of the domestic dog has not been possible because
of a paucity of comparative material and the small sample, as well as the possi-
bility of confusion with jackal remains. The remains recovered were a metatarsus
204 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
in layer 12 and a scapula in layer 2, both of which fall outside the observed
normal range for jackals.
Discussion
Interest in the domestic sheep remains stems mainly from the early dating
and the association with well-developed pottery. The finds place the introduction
of herding at a period somewhat earlier than the earliest known Iron Age
occurrences of domestic animals in the Transvaal (Mason 1973: 324-5; Wel-
bourne 1973: 325). This poses the question of the processes involved in the
introduction of domestic animals and pottery in pre-Iron Age times. There is
at present no direct evidence for an invasion by a different kind of people, but
the animals and the pottery are clearly exotic. The domestic animals did not
migrate of their own accord and, as there are good historical examples of major
translocations of groups of people of varying size, it is probable that the migra-
tion of people was also involved in some degree. It has been suggested (Deacon,
H. J. 1974) that the appearance of herding in the southern Cape is related to
the expansion of Bantu-speaking peoples and is thus part of the major demo-
graphic, economic and cultural changes southern Africa has been undergoing
during the last 2 000 years or so. Direct effects of the introduction of domestic
animals seen in the local archaeological record of Die Kelders relate primarily
to a relaxation of the earlier Holocene pattern of seasonal movement, although
hunting, gathering and fishing continued to be economically important.
Non-domestic animals
The mammalian fauna was identified and analysed by R. G. Klein and
K. Scott and is detailed in Table 27. This shows that the non-domestic group
of animals once commonly hunted for food were largely those still prevalent
in the area today. They comprise seals, small antelopes and dune mole-rats.
Exceptions are the blue antelope, which is now extinct, and black rhinoceros,
hippopotamus, and buffalo which have long been exterminated in the area.
The bontebok is now restricted to protected areas ana the vaal rhebok is
extremely rare.
The animals most commonly hunted for food are discussed below under
individual headings, while the other animals are included in a final section
de. ing with the rcle of hunting.
Seals (Arctocephalus pusillus)
Anwitiug .. ethno-historical references (Goodwin 1952a: 12), seals were
asily cubred to death They occur in substantial numbers throughout the
deposit Tucii restricted birth season, which occurs in November—December,
has been vsed by Parkington (1972: 241) to help establish seasonal occupation
periocs at Elands Bay Cave, a western Cape coastal site. R. G. Klein (pers.
comm.) points out that ‘none of the levels at Die Kelders has bones belonging
to seals clearly younger than 5-6 months (age as determined by comparison
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA 205
with aged specimens in the collection of the South African Museum), but the
clustering of bones at or near the size of 5-6 months old is tightest in levels
dating to around 2000 B.P.’. These layers contain only a few positively identified
sheep. From layer 2 on, when sheep occur in quantity, the number of bones of
seals older than 5-6 months is noticeably greater and there is an increase in
the number of full adults. The implication may be that, prior to the introduction
of sheep on a major scale, human populations were at Die Kelders for only
a few months in winter, from perhaps May until July or August. Subsequently,
with herding more established, local groups may have extended their stay until
September or October (R. G. Klein pers. comm.).
Small Bovidae
The genus Raphicerus is, after dune mole-rats, numerically the largest
mammal genus represented at DK 1 (Table 27). Two species, R. melanotis
(grysbok) and R. campestris (steenbok) occurred throughout the deposit, and
these animals still survive in the area today. They are small (7-14 kg), incon-
spicuous, non-gregarious antelopes with somewhat differing habitat preferences.
The grysbok prefers scrub-covered flats while the steenbok favours more open
country (Dorst & Dandelot 1970: 264-266). Both may be characterized as
selective browsers (Klein 1976: 171 from Jarman 1974). As indicated in Table 27,
grysbok outnumber steenbok by an average ratio of more than three to one,
and it may be assumed that the proportion remains the same for individuals
not identifiable beyond genus level. On the basis of the known habitat prefer-
ences of the modern species and the present-day topography and vegetational
cover, the information from DK 1 may be used to suggest that the cave occu-
pants preferred to hunt or trap grysbok in the vicinity of the cave rather than
to range further afield in search of steenbok. It may also be used to support
the assumption that environmental conditions during the Holocene occupations
of the cave were not much different from those of the present day. The marked
drop in the frequencies of both species after layer 12 may also be taken to
indicate an increasing reliance on meat from domestic animals.
Dune mole-rats (Bathyergus suillus)
These animals are by far the most numerous group in the faunal assem-
blage. This is understandable in view of the fact that they are virtually confined
to the soft sands and dunes adjoining the coast (De Graaff 1964: 172) and Die
Kelders is on the margin of a large dunefield. Dune mole-rats are found in
various kinds of vegetation, including fynbos, and their distribution shows no
particular correlation with rainfall except that they do not occur at places with
an annual rainfall of less than 100 mm (De Graaff 1964: 172).
Recent investigations into the suitability of using their pelts commercially
have not met with success, owing to the large number required. This does not,
however, rule out such use in the past. The meat of dune mole-rats is still eaten
today, particularly in poorer country areas. It is not known how the animals
206 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
were caught during the midden occupations. A study (Department of Nature
Conservation 1970) showed that their greatest activity occurs in July, when
two dune mole-rats pushed up fifty-seven heaps as against only three during their
lowest activity in February. This suggests that these animals would be more
easily hunted during the winter.
Micromammalian fauna
The micromammalian fauna from the excavation was analysed by D. M.
Avery, who is carrying out a study of micromammals from archaeological sites
since these are considered to be sensitive environmental indicators. Avery’s
counts and comments are included as Appendix 2.
The role of hunting
The occupants at Die Kelders in the late Holocene were in part dependent
on hunting for subsistence and the bulk of their kills was made up of the animals
which were most easily caught and could survive heavy predation. Projectile
hunting probably played a lesser role in that the main quarry, namely small
antelope, dune mole-rats and seals, would most likely have been hunted with
snares and traps or clubs. The largest game, elephant, rhinoceros and hippo-
potamus, are represented only by traces of bone or ivory fragments. This
suggests that these animals were probably butchered at the kill sites, possibly
after being trapped. Their small numbers indicate that their pursuit played a
lesser role in the lives of the hunters, who seem to have directed most of their
efforts to a very restricted area around the site.
The overall picture (Table 27) shows no marked changes in species compo-
sition during the time of the build-up of the midden, and a stable exploitation
pattern can be postulated. However, the fact that layer 12 contains 81 per cent
of the thirty-two species in the faunal list (excluding Homo sapiens) as against
a maximum of about 50 per cent in the other layers (53% in layer 7 and 50%
in layer 2) can be taken as further confirmation of the suggestion (p. 205) that
the introduction of domestic stock to the area resulted in a decrease in the
importance of hunting.
A fuller account of body part frequencies and distribution is in preparation
by R. G. Klein.
PLANTS
The only plant remains found at Die Kelders were small patches of the
estuarine grass, Zostera capensis, which occurred throughout the succession.
There was no evidence of the remains of any edible plants, although these are
known to be present in abundance in the area today. The sea also contains a
number of edible seaweeds which would have been accessible to the cave
dwellers during their shellfish collecting forays.
The absence of any traces of these or other plants from a matrix known
to have been capable of preserving such material is surprising and suggests that
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA 207
plant foods played little or no part in the diet of the Die Kelders people during
their probably seasonal stay at the cave. This would seem to be an important
conclusion since negative evidence is as valid as positive evidence. The explana-
tion may be in the temporary seasonal replacement of plant-food collecting by
shellfish collecting when groups were resident at the coast. This is to some
extent supported by as yet unpublished data from the near-by site of Bynes-
kranskop on the inland edge of the coastal plain. (Fig. 5) This site contains in
its upper layers (broadly contemporary with DK 1) evidence not only of plant
collecting in the form of corm cases and seeds, but also of exploitation of
coastal resources: fish, shellfish and the stems of the giant kelp, Ecklonia
maxima.
THE SITE AS A LOCATION FOR PREHISTORIC SETTLEMENT
The position of DK | at the junction of three environmental zones—rocky
shoreline, sandy beach and coastal plain—and within walking distance of a
fourth—estuarine lagoon—enabled its occupants to exploit the resources of
each. That they did so is shown by the artefacts and faunal remains from the
site.
Marine food remains both in the form of fish and shellfish show the exis-
tence of a strong tendency to exploit the rocky shore in preference to all other
zones. This may be interpreted as reflecting that zone’s ability to ‘sustain the
richest and most varied populations in the sea’ (Ager 1961: 12). It is, however,
noteworthy that shellfish collecting in this zone was focused more on the easily
accessible Choromytilus and Perna than on the larger Patella and Turbo, the
collection of which might have required venturing into deeper water. Shellfish
remains from the near-by sandy beach, though not necessarily all collected for
food, show a similar preference for easily obtainable surface-scavenging Bullia,
and though the collecting of Donax would have entailed a certain amount of
digging in the tidal sand, this would not have entailed much physical effort.
The presumed clubbing of seals must similarly have been carried out on dry
land as these animals would have evaded capture in the sea.
The terrestrial fauna is composed mainly of small ground game, comprising
tortoises, dune mole-rats and various small non-gregarious antelope. The
capture of these animals by traps and snares would not have necessitated wide
movement in the surroundings. There was probably a generally low dependence
on the use of the poisoned arrow in hunting and a corresponding lesser need to
track and pursue wounded prey for long distances. With plant-food collecting
of little importance at the site, the only other resources to be required away
from the sea-shore would seem to have been clay for making pots, ostrich
egg-shells for containers and manufacturing beads, and firewood, none of which
need have entailed long forays from the base.
Visits to the near-by lagoon(s) are shown by the regular occurrence of the
estuarine grass Zostera, and by the presence of fish generally found in lagoons.
208 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Such journeys may not have been frequent, judging by the small amount of
these materials found at the site.
The main discernible change in a generally stable subsistence pattern is
the increased importance through time of domestic stock. Although this did
not alter the general pattern of the use of local resources, with the herding of
of sheep the availability of grazing in the surroundings would have become a
new factor.
Die Kelders seems, therefore, to have been almost optimal as a location
for at least seasonal occupation in the annual round of hunter—gatherer—fishers
in the late Holocene. In view of the evidence provided by the excavation of the
successful and selective exploitation of the rich resources of the local environ-
ment, it is tempting to wonder why the site was occupied for such a relatively
short period in the history of the Later Stone Age peoples of the southern Cape.
It may well be that the excavation, which sampled only a very small part of the
total area of the cave complex, has fortuitously sampled only a part of the cave’s
occupational history, and that further excavations in other parts of the cave will
reveal longer, or different, periods of the site’s settlement history.
DIE KELDERS IN RELATION TO OTHER EXCAVATED SITES
As Die Kelders is situated in the southern Cape, characterized by a typical
fynbos vegetation and a distinctive mammal fauna (Hendey 1974: 15), other
sites in the same region dating to the Holocene, and to the later Holocene in
particular, may be expected to show close parallels. This is, indeed, the case,
and there is a general similarity in the kind of human adaptations evidenced in
the archaeological record at these sites. It may eventually prove more informa-
tive to analyse the lower-scale differences between sites that reflect local habitat
factors than to stress the gross similarities as is done here, but there are at
present too few properly detailed studies. Table 28 lists a number of occurrences
that provide data most relevant for correlation with Die Kelders and also
indicates some of the differences in local setting or habitat.
SUBSISTENCE ACTIVITIES
As Die Kelders is a coastal site, the subsistence data relate primarily to the
obtaining of food from the sea-shore. The variety of food found is equivalent
to that found at both open station middens such as Gordon’s Bay (Van Noten
1974), and cave-contained middens from Elands Bay on the west coast (Parking-
ton 1972) to Nelson Bay Cave on the south coast (Klein 1972, 1974). Basically,
the remains are those of shellfish, fish, marine birds and mammals, and terrestrial
mammals, including domestic animals, from most pottery-associated levels. At
coastal sites plant-food remains are notably rare or absent and it has been
suggested that shellfish collecting replaced plant-food collecting in a seasonal
round (Deacon, H. J. 1972). From this it follows that Die Kelders and other
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA 209
coastal sites represent one facet of the mode of life of the Holocene populations
in the southern Cape.
Shellfish collecting
The practice of shellfish collecting is documented as early as the last
interglacial at Klasies River Mouth (Voigt 1973a, 19736). It is however, for
the period from the terminal Pleistocene, i.e. from some 12 000 years ago, that
the main archaeological evidence for shellfish collecting is derived. It was in this
time that the thick and extensive middens at sites such as Matjies River were
built up. There is some change in the variety of shellfish exploited through
time in the longer sequences such as at Nelson Bay (Klein 1972: 186-189, 1974:
274) and this can be ascribed to changes in temperature and the coastal habitat
with the establishment of post-glacial (Holocene) conditions. Die Kelders does
not cover the longer span of time that would be expected to show changes in the
shellfish fauna available. For example, the ratio of Choromytilus to Perna,
shellfish which might be sensitive to sea temperatures and local environmental
changes such as sand-covered and bare rocks on the shore, is constant and thus
indicates that relatively stable conditions prevailed in the last 2 000 years. It
is fairly certain that shellfish were collected from the immediate shore and not
transported any distance. This is evident in the Die Kelders data and in the
quantities of mussels, limpets and other rocky shore species that can be collected
off the present shore. The situation is comparable to the Swartrif midden
(Deacon, H. J. 1969) where mussels predominate, indicating collecting directed
at an exposed rocky coast. The Swartrif midden shows clear differences from
the near-by Storms River mouth midden where water conditions favour limpets.
Although most middens indicate exploitation of species collected in the tidal
zones, the low spring tide boundary was regularly crossed to harvest the larger
Shellfish species such as haliotids and, as at Bonteberg rock-shelter on the
Cape Peninsula, even rock-lobster (Grindley 1967: 99). This would have
required wading. The evidence from Bonteberg shows that the rock-lobster
population was exploited intensively, whereas at DK 1 very little evidence of
rock-lobster was recovered.
Fishing
The fishing evidence from Die Kelders in its emphasis on Pachymetopon
blochii (hottentot) indicates a local habitat factor, but this again finds a parallel
in the Swartrif midden in the catches of Diplodus sp. (dassie) represented there.
That the species represented in midden accumulations are relatively varied is
further shown by the differing species frequencies identified from Nelson Bay
Cave (Klein 1972: 190-192).
There is the suggestion in Goodwin’s (1938b) Oakhurst report that fishing
became more important later in the Holocene. This is partly supported by the
Nelson Bay evidence and to a greater extent by that from Byneskranskop
(Schweitzer & Wilson 1978). The Die Kelders evidence, however, does not
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
210
a 8 a
(ZOLS—WID)
(us018 SE * S767
SL6l ‘£ “Uoovag -I9A9 PdSO]d) 0}
TL6] deoysuy JSOIOJ CUSAUYT (€OLS—UID)
696] dooysuy 918 10d Wd |, yUSLINI seypnsy dARD 09 + O€6I oARD Avg UOS|aNy
(WUSLIND seynsy
JSoIOJ VUSAUY wodJJ Wy ¢‘9 ynoqe)
986] UIMpoony 9}e 19d Wd |, 9q Poepjoy odeg — Jayfoys dAe_D suON IsINYYeO
D8E6] UIMPooH soquéy = AepIOAO UIO}SO\A dARD SUON Ae) doydipy
(PLEy-UID)
cS + OCTE
(€LEp-UID)
09 + 0862
(CLEP—UID)
PL6] UNION UvA soquh — AeIIOAO UIO}SOAA usppiu usadoO Or + 0087 USppIW Aeg s,uOop10H
vL6l
"( "H ‘uosveg
OL61 SsseI
2 posds ‘Ao[puLIH
L961 Ao[puLIg (L9I-aS)
L961 OO! F SOSP
poods x s33ep (991-€aS)
€96] }UOWINvog soquét — AeIIZAO UIO}SOAA JayJOYs dAeD 66 + 0S0Z Jayjoys 310qo}u0g
(LZI-®1d)
IL6I (JUYISIP WY 09 INOGe OS + OS8I
Js0duses30g juatINS ejonsuag) 01 (19 [-®1d)
9 UO SUIYIeg soquAy Iq Popo sdeg == CIN @) OS + 06 uosueH od
(L89-®1d)
TL6[ UOISUIyIeEg od} ppeapuens — jUdIIND ejonsuog dARD Sr + OISEZ Aeg spuerlq
Pei. ea a Se ne ee ee ee
SIMAIA{IY uoljpjJasa/ QUuoZ UIDJUNOP QUuoz [DISDO) ais fo ada |, Sajpp als’
UOGADIOIPOY
SS a ee LS
“SOUS JURAZ[OI JOYIO 78 LYE oISeg
87 AIEV
211
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA
ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee
vL6l
HOS %® Ulopy
cL6L
"¢ “H{ ‘uosraq
£961
uodveq 2 UOdvOq,
q “DEL6I ISIOA
soquAy
soyoyed ysnqg
pure soquéy
jo vore Ul
6961 peeds = sory PUSAU
6961 jo ulsiew
JOWA AA 2 IOSUIS SUIJSIXO IVONJ
OL6I 1SOIOJ O}eI10d
"( °H ‘uooveqd -W9} SULIOpIOg
OL61 JSOIOF 93eI0d
“¢ “H ‘uooveg -W9} SULIOpIOg
JSOIOJ 9} 810d
096] “NOT -WI9} SULIOp10g
(ud018
-I3A9 PdSO]9)
CL6I JSoIOJ VUSAUYT
‘( ‘H ‘uosevaq 9) e1aduU0 |,
SaqUasafay uoljnjasaf
QUuoz UIDJUNOJY
(Z8-US)
Jue SIP OO! + O61]
wy OZ jnogqe (SCrI-X)
JUSIINI seypnsy JOVOYS 9ACD O08 + 09€ 9ABD) S.11095
(8LEI-XD)
09 + OLIP
01
(L6EI-XD)
SOI + S877
¢ DARD
(€L6-XD)
O81 + S69P
O}
(696-XD)
C8 + S7SZ
JUOIINI seynsy SOABD DI 32 [ 9AeD YINOJ] JOALY Soisepyy
yuorInd
Sey[NSY O}UI Sur
-usdo0 NOU JSATY DARD ouON JOATY S,WWI01¢
JOIJOYS YOOI
suluto[pe
JUSIINI seylNsYy USPPI sUuON, JINIEMS
(49€€-T)
JUdIINI seylNsYy JOIJOYS YOO OO€ + OSLL
0}UI Suluedo SuUIUIO[pe (G49EE-D
YMOUL ISAT 9AOGY USpPIIA OST + OOPS JoyOYs JOATY sore
(SO7-MN)
Oll + O8I¥ (jesourny
(pO7-MN) Sey OALD BIaqqoy)
JUdLINI seylNsYy YN A@) OI] + OI9E : DARD S,UPUIJOH
QUOZ JDISDOD ais fo ada [, Sajop aus’
((JUO2) 87 AIEV I,
UOGADIOIPOY.
212 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
contribute to this suggestion because of the short period involved, but it is
obvious that in the late Holocene fishing was widely and competently practised.
Seal-hunting
At all coastal sites that have been studied in detail, seal bones have been
reported and clearly seals were an important source of food. Parkington’s
(1972: 241) excavations at Elands Bay led to the recovery of numerous seal
bones (Arctocephalus pusillus, Cape fur seal) which showed surprisingly little
variation in overall size. By measuring the mandibles and relating the results
to the present-day observations of the restricted annual pupping season, Parking-
ton was able to postulate that Elands Bay had been occupied during some part
of winter or early spring. R. G. Klein & K. Scott (pers. comm.), on the basis of
seal mandible size and additional information provided by measurements of
tooth eruption, have been able to show a similar winter season of seal-hunting
at Die Kelders, that later became longer. Independent confirmation of such
conclusions may in future be gained from oxygen-isotope measurements on
shells from these sites such as those made by Shackleton at Nelson Bay Cave
(Klein 1974: 274).
Marine birds and fowling
It would seem that sea birds were of importance as a source of bone for
tool-making as well as food. Klein (1974: 269-270, 1977: 121) has noted that
at Klasies River Mouth, a last interglacial site, it is the non-flying species that
are represented, whilst by contrast the remains of flying birds are common at
all excavated sites in the Holocene. At Nelson Bay Cave for example, gulls,
cormorants and albatrosses were found (Klein 1972: 193, 1977: 121). Although
fully detailed accounts are not yet available for Die Kelders, the same general
pattern is apparent.
Terrestrial mammal hunting
While midden accumulations clearly show a preference for coastal
resources, the hunting of terrestrial mammals persisted in the exploitation
pattern at all sites. In the Holocene in the southern Cape it is reasonably well
established that the main antelope species hunted were those commonly found
in the fynbos, notably steenbok, grysbok and duiker. The habitat requirements
of the individual species in large measure determine the relative frequencies
represented in samples as is shown by Klein’s (1972, 1974, 1977) recent studies.
The sites of Elands Bay, Nelson Bay, Klasies River Mouth and Scott’s Cave
all reveal a common emphasis on the small non-gregarious browsing antelopes
mentioned above (Klein & Scott 1974). Klein’s analyses have demonstrated
that the distribution of these antelope, when based on late Holocene site data,
coincides with their present distribution on the basis of vegetational patterns.
Thus the Elands Bay area, with its open country and bush, contains both grey
duiker (Sylvicapra grimmia), which is the only duiker found in open habitat
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA 213
(Dorst & Dandelot 1970: 259), and steenbok (Raphicerus campestris), which
is adapted both to open and bushy country. On the other hand, assemblages
from sites in or near temperate forests, such as Nelson Bay Cave, Klasies River
Mouth and Scott’s Cave, include blue duiker (Cephalophus monticola), a typical
browser found in forests (Dorst & Dandelot 1970: 258), as well as the more
numerous Raphicerus species. At both Scott’s Cave and Nelson Bay Cave the
latter remains can be identified as the Cape grysbok (Raphicerus melanotis)
which lives under the protection of scrub cover. Other animals common to
sites to the east of Die Kelders are bushbuck (Tragelaphus scriptus) and bush pig
(Potamochoerus porcus) which frequent the more wooded thickets and dense
bush (Dorst & Dandelot 1970: 199). In the fynbos region, the better watered
and grassier habitats to the east offered greater potential for hunting a wider
variety of antelopes and pigs, and it should be expected that there would be
differences between the faunal remains found at sites in environments similar
to Die Kelders and the remains from sites to the north-west. At Die Kelders
and sites in the western zone of the Cape Folded Belt, ground game such as
dassies, tortoises and dune mole-rats had relatively greater importance.
Herding
The Die Kelders data indicate that herding was practised in the southern
Cape from at least 2 000 years ago. Remains of sheep, and possibly cattle, have
now been recorded in the upper levels at the near-coastal site of Byneskranskop
(Schweitzer & Wilson 1978), and the coastal sites of Elands Bay (J. E. Parking-
ton pers. comm.) and Nelson Bay Cave (R. G. Klein and R. R. Inskeep pers.
comm.), at open middens (Avery 1974: 112), as well as at Scott’s Cave in the
Gamtoos Valley (Klein & Scott 1974). The best comparable data, however,
comes from Boomplaas Cave (Deacon, H. J. et al. 1978; Deacon & Brooker
1976: 211; Klein 1978) where domestic animals formed a minor component
some 2000 years ago, but were well represented some 400 years later. The
upper levels of Boomplaas are of similar (late Holocene) age to Die Kelders
and provide good evidence for the local increase in herding. At both Die
Kelders and Boomplaas, Klein’s current studies show that the introduction of
domestic stock had the apparent effect of reducing the importance of hunted
wild animals. Explanation may be sought in competition for grazing between
wild and domestic fauna associated with veld management practices such as
increased burning of the veld to improve grazing, which would have affected
wild antelope populations and distributions. The impact of the introduction of
domestic stock into the southern Cape is a field study in itself. The modification
of the pattern of seasonal occupation as a result of herding noted at Die Kelders
has yet to be documented elsewhere.
ARTEFACT MAKING
Traditionally, archaeologists have compared sites on the basis of their
artefact content on the assumption that similarity in the artefacts is a measure
214 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
of similar temporal, economic and social relationships. This concept does have
some validity at a general level, but it is also not consistently applied in many
archaeological writings. In recent years, however, there has been a trend towards
integrating the artefactual component with the other residues of human occu-
pation in an attempt to provide an ‘ecological’ perspective.
Artefacts can be viewed as related to a variety of tasks, from the acquisition
of food to the manufacture and maintenance of equipment and the performance
of less materialistic tasks. They also incorporate stylistic attributes that tran-
scend function.
Artefact assemblages at coastal sites
Stone artefacts
While it is not possible to generalize about artefact assemblages from
southern Cape coastal sites, evidence from such dated late Holocene sites as
Nelson Bay Cave (Inskeep 1965: 577), Bonteberg shelter (Maggs & Speed 1967:
82, 84), Hawston (G. Avery pers. comm.), Gordon’s Bay midden (Van Noten
1974: 125), and DK 1 suggests that the most striking feature is that the lithic
artefacts at such sites are in the main irregular cortical or primary quartzite
flakes with minimal retouch, giving the assemblages an impression of a general
lack of refinement. Formal Holocene microlithic tools were found at the above
sites but in extremely low numbers. Although this point is well known it has
received little explicit discussion in the literature. The conventional explanation
offered is that an easy and abundant food supply represented by shellfish did
not require an elaborate technology (Clark 1959: 207; Goodwin 19526: 137).
H. J. Deacon (1976: 79), noting that small convex scrapers dominate assemblages
at inland sites, suggests that their paucity at excavated coastal sites may be
linked to the replacement of plant food gathering and processing by shellfish
gathering. Perhaps the link here is in the kinds of tools and the activities under-
taken by females and it could even include a seasonal factor as suggested in the
discussion on bone tool function.
At sites even a short distance from the coast, such as Byneskranskop
(Schweitzer & Wilson 1978) and Oakhurst (Goodwin 19385: 306), where shell-
fish remains are found in quantities sufficient to indicate their having been a
dietary component, microlithic artefacts are found in considerably increased
abundance in the relevant assemblages. These coastal plain sites appear to
reflect activities intermediate in character between those of the coast and the
hinterland and their study is part of the South African Museum’s general
research programme through current studies at Byneskranskop.
Bone artefacts
The use of bone as a raw material for the making of a variety of formal
tools at Die Kelders has close parallels at numbers of other coastal sites, as has
been noted. Awls have received frequent mention. Projectile points are
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA DTS
apparently not as common, but it has been argued that trap-line hunting may
have been more important in the eastern zone of the Cape Folded Mountain
Belt (Deacon, H. J. 1972). Specific tool types such as spatulae have been reported
from sites such as Matjies River (Louw 1960: 93-94). It is noteworthy that the
small, double-pointed bone splinters thought to have served as fish gorges and
found at Nelson Bay Cave (Klein 1972: 200, fig. 8; Deacon, J. 1978, figs. 10-11;
R. R. Inskeep pers. comm.), Elands Bay (J. E. Parkington pers. comm.), and
Byneskranskop (Schweitzer & Wilson 1978) have not been found at Die Kelders.
The evidence from the other sites, however, suggests that this tool type is
related to occupation periods considerably earlier than the late Holocene
occupation of Die Kelders and does not occur in the contemporary sequences.
Shell artefacts and ornaments
Utilized Donax serra valves found in DK 1 have also been recorded from
Gordon’s Bay midden (Van Noten 1974) and Oakhurst (Goodwin 1938):
307-308). These are strong shells which would have provided scraping edges.
By contrast Choromytilus shell ‘crescents’ recorded from Oakhurst (Goodwin
19385: 307-339), Matjies River shelter (Louw 1960: 111), Klipkop cave (Good-
win 1938a: 216), and also found at DK 1, have yet to be convincingly demon-
strated to be artefacts and not the chance products of natural fragmentation
Choromytilus shell is thin and brittle and would hardly seem to have any
potential for use.
Ornaments are found at all southern Cape coastal sites where adequate
sampling has been undertaken. At Die Kelders these are of the same form and
made from the same species of shells as at the other sites. For example, at
Scott’s Cave some 650 km to the east, Glycimeris queketti and Nassa kraussiana
beads were found and these are the commonest beads found at Die Kelders.
Similarly, the sites of Matjies River and Oakhurst have produced Cypraea spp
and Conus shells, as have other sites. Pendants made of Turbo shell also have a
wide distribution.
Pottery
Pottery is an important artefact class in the Die Kelders sample, perhaps
the more so since this is one of the largest and earliest-dated samples from an
excavated site in the southern Cape. The importance of the Die Kelders pottery
sample is increased because it has been possible to make graphic reconstructions
of seven vessels, most of them of unusual shape. Rudner, in an extensive survey
of coastal pottery covering a distance of some 2 500 km and a total of 1 452
vessels, includes only 13 bowls (Rudner 1968: 621, table 2) whereas Die Kelders
layer 12 alone has yielded 2 bowls. Of the complete or near-complete vessels
analysed by Rudner (1968, figs 2-30), fifteen can be considered as morpho-
logically comparable with the layer 12 pots and bowls. Most of the material
studied by Rudner is from undated surface collections, and the material from
published excavated sites (e.g. De Hangen & Scott’s Cave) comes from horizons
216 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
with more recent radiocarbon dates than those for the DK 1 Holocene
occupations.
Of the material studied by Rudner (1968) the globular pots from Oakhurst
(his fig. 22: 2) and Tsitsikama Cave (his fig. 24: 1) are perhaps of most interest,
since they come from excavated sites (Goodwin 19385: Rudner 1968). The
Oakhurst pottery is housed in the South African Museum (SAM-AA6990),
and the globular pot in this collection resembles the DK 1 layer 12 pot, no. 1,
in general form only: it is larger, thicker (c. 7,5 mm) and coarser in finish than
the DK | pot and, indeed, almost all the material from layer 12. The Tsitsikama
pot, in the Port Elizabeth Museum (PEM 87), is smaller than the DK 1 pot, but
thicker-walled (7,0 mm) and, according to Rudner (1968: 534), °. . . in shape
and thickness it is reminiscent of Bantu pottery’. The whole question of the
relationship between the Later Stone Age Hottentot or ‘Strandloper’ pottery
and that of the Iron Age peoples to the north is urgently in need of examination,
since the early dates being obtained for Iron Age sites in the Transvaal (e.g.
Mason 1973) reduce somewhat the apparent time gap between the appearance
of herders in the southern Cape and Iron Age peoples in the eastern part of
South Africa. On present evidence it would seem that herders with a distinctive
pottery tradition preceded Iron Age pastoralists and agriculturists in South
Africa and, because of geographical separation in the early phases, the ‘Strand-
loper’ pottery is little influenced by the Iron Age wares.
The spouted pot from layer 2 seems intermediate between Rudner’s
(1968: 455) types D1 and D2, and bears only a general resemblance to the eight
examples he illustrates. Rudner (1968: 455) outlines the distribution of spouted
pots at coastal sites from Namaqualand to East London as well as inland.
The Die Kelders pottery, therefore, displays several unusual morpho-
logical features which have little similarity to material from other coastal sites.
This may well be related to temporal rather than geographical factors, a matter
which can be re-studied when material from more excavated and dated sites
becomes available.
Discussion
The Die Kelders people, as would be expected, concentrated their sub-
sistence activities on the exploitation of relatively abundant and accessible
local resources. In the preceding comparisons certain differences are evident
between resource utilization at DK 1 and other coastal sites, but these refer
mostly to individual factors and almost certainly reflect variations in local
environments. Differences become more striking at sites further from the coast,
at which it appears that the eating of plant foods replaced the heavy reliance on
marine resources revealed at coastal sites.
It seems evident, however, that the inhabitants of Die Kelders were part of a
population in the Cape Biotic Zone whose subsistence economy was funda-
mentally similar, and based on an intimate knowledge of local resources.
From the differences evident between coastal and inland sites, there appears
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA Dy
to have been a seasonally determined movement between the coast and the
interior, and site-to-site differences may well reflect local environmental differ-
ences affecting the basic resource utilization patterns of the same group(s)
moving seasonally (or for perhaps even longer periods) around what might
loosely be described as their ‘territory’.
As more information becomes available from a greater number of syste-
matic excavations in the various environmental sub-zones of the southern
Cape, it may well be possible to detect inter-group differences not solely attri-
butable to environmental determinants as now seems the case; but these subtle-
ties in the archaeological record are at present beyond resolution and remain a
challenge for the future.
The artefacts from Die Kelders also conform to what is known of the
technology of late Holocene population in the southern Cape. There are very
obvious parallels that can be drawn between the kinds of artefacts at a general
level and again at the level of more specific types of artefacts found at Die
Kelders and at occurrences up to some 500 km to the east. The kinds of resources
exploited at Die Kelders did not require a specialized technology outside that
in use in this ecologically homogeneous zone.
CONCLUSIONS
The excavation in the late Holocene midden member of the Die Kelders
Cave sequence reported in this study is an initial set of observations aimed at
an understanding of the ecology of the prehistoric peoples of the Gansbaai
coast. The DK | deposit is in reality two windows into the past, one covering
the last 2 000 years, and an earlier one in Upper Pleistocene times. The excavated
deposit of the latter time range gives a contrasting picture of a people certainly
technologically more primitive and perhaps lower on the scale of human
biological development. The Die Kelders site is not unique in offering potential
for research in the Upper Pleistocene—Holocene time range, broadly the last
100 000 years, and there are now numbers of known cave sites in the general
southern Cape region covering part of this time range. All, like Die Kelders,
are discontinuous sequences and the record of changes in human behaviour
through time will be pieced together only from several observations. From the
early Upper Pleistocene, there were apparently stable populations in the southern
Cape who regularly used caves, thereby affording the archaeologist the oppor-
tunity of excavating deep, stratified deposits. At the Die Kelders Cave complex
the opportunity is almost optimal in that the limestone country rock affords
good preservation of bone in association with stone artefacts and a very large
volume of deposit exists. The present excavations are essentially a test excava-
tion—a vertical cut through the sequence, especially in the Upper Pleistocene
levels. However, even on the limited scale and with the limited general objectives
under which the excavations were originally undertaken, they do contribute
directly to an understanding of the prehistory of the local area and the whole
southern Cape.
218 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
The earlier occupation of the Die Kelders Cave complex took place when
the sea-level was near that of the present day and during the main last glacial
regression the cave became blocked with sands. In this time range the focus for
occupation would have been on the then coastline across the exposed conti-
nental shelf and there is no record of human occupation in the cave. There is
abundant evidence of widespread human settlement in the southern Cape in
the late Pleistocene and early Holocene but the DK | part of the cave complex
was reinhabitated only in the late Holocene. Other parts of the complex may
show on excavation a longer record of Holocene occupation. The Byneskranskop
Cave, some 10 km from Die Kelders and excavated as part of the same research
programme (Schweitzer & Wilson 1978), preserves a relatively complete record
of occupation from some 13 000 years ago and supplements the Die Kelders
data in this respect. The evidence from Byneskranskop shows that the terminal
Pleistocene peoples in the region were exploiting coastal resources as well as
hunting a variety of animals that included forms such as Pelorovis, Equus
capensis and Megalotragus that became extinct at the end of the Pleistocene.
in the early Holocene the population ‘settled in’ and adapted to the new environ-
mental conditions of the post-Pleistocene. The Die Kelders late Holocene
occupation relates to the end of this adaptive phase.
In the post-Pleistocene, as evidenced at Byneskranskop, there is the adop-
tion of a fully microlithic technology, the pattern that has been detailed at sites
in the eastern zone of the Cape Folded Belt, such as Wilton. In stratigraphic
terms the Byneskranskop artefact sample includes the Wilton tradition as does
the Die Kelders sample. Locational differences in the Wilton technology are
largely reflected in the frequencies and variety cf tools, and microlithic artefacts
are poorly represented at coastal sites relative to inland sites in the time range
under discussion. This is explicable when it is appreciated that technology is
related to the kinds of resources exploited, and the location of settlement in
turn is related to the avaiiability of resources in the seasonal round. The Die
Kelders Cave complex is a classic coastal situation which would be expected
co, and does, reflect this in its technology, the coastal resources exploited, and
in the apparent vnter occupation. Byneskranskop Cave, although it contains a
longer Holocene stratigraphic record, is an intermediate inland situation which
provides some contrasts .. the kinds of artefacts used and the food resources
exploited. At this site partial depenuerce on marme resources is evident,
especially in the upper levels, but these are generally subordinate to terrestrial
resources. The full implication of the Byneskranskop Holocene occupation is
sul under study and cannot be anticipaied here. It is arn2 ~°*. however, that
neither the Die Kelders complex nor the Byneskransko, °¥ > e studied
in isolation and, indeed, more widespread observations wi.) o¢ needec before the
ecology of the Holocene peoples in this area can be fully «rccrstood. ‘t is
legitimate, however, in terms of this report to limit the focus to the Gansbaal
coast, and to the last 2 000 years.
Although the Die Kelders people principally exploited natural resources,
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA 219
the presence of remains of domestic stock in the deposits provides clear evidence
that the cave occupants, if not herders themselves, were in contact with pas-
toralists. At a later stage, in layer 2, the evidence points to herding being well
established in the area. In the context of South African archaeology Die Kelders
provided the earliest dated evidence for the appearance at the Cape of herders.
Who the early herders were is a pertinent question, the answer to which will
depend on recovering human physical evidence from archaeological sites.
Domestic stock have subsequently been recognized from numbers of similarly
aged sites in the general southern Cape region and the social, cultural, demo-
graphic and ecological implications of the introduction of herding have added
a new dimension to archaeology in the southern Cape. A point of interest that
has emerged which may require further substantiation is that while in the
initial (ayer 12) deposits occupation of the site seems to have been restricted
to the winter months, towards the end of the occupation (layer 2) the site was
being occupied for longer periods, extending into late spring and perhaps even
early summer. This is perhaps a result of increasing reliance on domestic stock
for food whether or not this was owned by the cave occupants.
The investigations at Die Kelders are also significant in drawing attention
to basic similarities in the subsistence economy and technology of populations
in the Cape Biotic Zone in the later Holocene. It may appear unusual to stress
homogeneity in the adaptation of human groups in a mosaic-type environment
as the conclusion to the study of a localized area, but the evidence from Die
Kelders has close parallels elsewhere. Perhaps the Gansbaai coast demanded
of its prehistoric inhabitants a unique mixture of adaptive strategies to
cope with local conditions, but by and large these are variations on the general
theme of hunter—gatherer-fisher adaptation in the fynbos landscape in the
Holocene.
As this is essentially a site report, the specific details of the pattern of
local human adaptation are of importance. However, it is possible to view the
Die Kelders evidence from both a static and a dynamic viewpoint. Clearly the
local habitat, which in the last 2 000 years has remained largely unchanged, has
limited the variability of behaviour patterns available to the prehistoric popu-
lations. It is thus possible to assume a measure of stability and consider the
evidence in static terms. On the other hand, the time range sampled in the late
Holocene midden revealed the introduction of domestic animals and pottery
and implies changes in social organization and resource exploitation that
demand a more dynamic view. The evidence from the site which principally
samples two relatively discrete time ranges—the first and fifth centuries A.D.
—shows that significant changes were taking place. Obviously the Stone Age
of the southern Cape relative to the historical period cannot be dismissed as a
kind of hazy past of no importance; and further excavations can only benefit
by providing an increasing understanding of the ecology of not only the post-
Pleistocene peoples on the Gansbaai coast but also of the prehistoric peoples
of southern Africa.
220 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The report is based on the results of seven field seasons stretching over the
period 1969-73 during which assistance was rendered by Graham Avery,
Neville Eden, Dieter Hamman, Susan James, Julia King, John Lindor, Kathleen
Lombard, David Parish, Cedric Poggenpoel, Katharine Scott, Veronica Scott,
and Martin Williams. Sincere thanks are due to all of them for generous help.
Professional assistance in other disciplines was kindly given by Mr W.
Brand (Department of Bio-chemistry, University of Cape Town) who analysed
pot scrapings; Mr C. Boucher (Botanical Survey, Stellenbosch) who studied
and provided information on the local flora; Prof. K. W. Butzer (University of
Chicago) who analysed some sediment samples from the site; Mrs J. Deacon
(University of Stellenbosch) who gave advice on stone typology; Mr F. Far-
quharson (now at the University of Durban-Westville); Dr T. H. Fraser (Rhodes
University); Mr S. Kannemeyer (South African Museum), and Mr C. Poggen-
poel (University of Cape Town) who helped to identify the fish remains at
DK 1; Dr B. Kensley (South African Museum) who identified the sea-shell
remains and inspected the local beach intertidal zones; Prof. R. G. Klein
(University of Chicago) and Miss K. Scott (formerly of the South African
Museum, now University of Cambridge) who identified and analysed the
mammalian fauna; and Mr M. J. Wells (Department of Agricultural Technical
Services, Pretoria) who identified the bedding material at DK 1.
Mrs D. M. Avery, Mr G. Avery, Miss M. Blackman, Mr P. P. H. Hamel,
Prof. R. G. Klein, Mr B. D. Malan, and Mr M. L. Wilson are thanked for
comments and assistance in various forms.
Mr V. Branco of the South African Museum did most of the illustrations.
Mr J. Tyers, M.P.C., bore the costs of erecting fencing to guard the entrance
to the site.
Warmest thanks are due to Prof. R. R. Inskeep (formerly of the University
of Cape Town, now of the University of Oxford), with whose support this
project was initiated, and to Prof. H. J. Deacon of the University of Stellen-
bosch, who provided supervision and encouragement in the later stages of
evaluating the findings and preparing the report.
The writer wishes to thank the South African Museum authorities for
financial support and the South African Human Sciences Research Council
for grants that have aided the fieldwork at Die Kelders. Opinions expressed or
conclusions reached are those of the author and should not be regarded as
representative of those of the Human Sciences Research Council.
REFERENCES
AGER, D. V. 1961. Principles of Palaeoecology. New York: McGraw-Hill.
AVERY, G. 1974. Open station shell midden sites and associated features from the Pearly Beach
area, south-western Cape. S. Afr. archaeol. Bull. 29: 104-114.
AveERY, G. 1975. Discussion on the age and use of tidal fish traps (visvywers). S. Afr. archaeol.
Bull. 30: 105-113.
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA 221
Avery, G. 1976. A systematic investigation of open station shell midden sites along the south-
western Cape coast. Unpublished M.A. thesis, University of Cape Town.
BARNARD, K. H. 1951. A beginner’s guide to South African shells. Cape Town: Maskew Miller.
BARNARD, K. H. 1954. South African shore life. Cape Town: Maskew Miller.
BEAUMONT, P. 1963. The Bonteberg shelter—a progress report. J. Sci. Soc. Univ. Cape Town
1963: 20-21.
BIDEN, L. 1954. Sea angling fishes of the Cape (South Africa). Cape Town: Juta.
BUCHANAN, W. F., HALL, S. L., HENDERSON, J., OLIVIER, J., PETTIGREW, J. E., PARKINGTON,
J. E. & ROBERTSHAW, P. T. 1978. Coastal shell middens in the Paternoster area, south-
western Cape. S. Afr. archaeol. Bull. 33: 89-93.
CARTER, P. 1965. Bushman fishing as depicted in rock paintings. Scient. S. Afr. 2: 578-581.
CLARK, J. D. 1959. The prehistory of southern Africa. London: Penguin Books.
Day, J. H. 1969. A guide to marine life on South African shores. Cape Town: Balkema.
DEACON, H. J. 1969. Melkhoutboom Cave, Alexandria district, Cape Province: a report on
the 1967 investigation. Ann. Cape prov. Mus. 6: 141-169.
DEACON, H. J. 1970. Two shell midden occurrences in the Tsitsikama National Park, Cape
Province. Koedoe 13: 37-49.
Deacon, H. J. 1972. A review of the post-Pleistocene in South Africa. S. Afr. archaeol. Soc.
Goodwin Ser. 1: 26-45.
DEACON, H. J. 1974. An archaeological study of the eastern Cape in the post-Pleistocene period.
Unpublished Ph.D. thesis, University of Cape Town.
DEACON, H. J. 1976. Where hunters gathered: a study of Holocene Stone Age people in the
eastern Cape. Claremont: South African Archaeological Society.
DEACON, H. J. & Brooker, M. 1976. The Holocene and Upper Pleistocene sequence in the
southern Cape. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 71: 203-214.
DeEAcon, H. J. & DEACON, J. 1963. Scott’s Cave: a Late Stone Age site in the Gamtoos Valley.
Ann. Cape prov. Mus. 3: 96-121.
DEACON, H. J., DEACON, J., BROOKER, M. & WILSON, M. L. 1978. The evidence for herding at
Boomplaas Cave in the southern Cape, South Africa. S. Afr. archaeol. Bull. 33: 39-65.
DEACON, J. 1969. Re-excavation and description of the Wilton type-site, Albany district,
eastern Cape. Unpublished M.A. thesis: University of Cape Town.
DEACON, J. 1972. Wilton: an assessment after 50 years. S. Afr. archaeol. Bull. 27: 10-45.
DEACON, J. 1978. Changing patterns in the late Pleistocene/early Holocene prehistory of
southern Africa as seen from the Nelson Bay Cave stone artifact sequence. Quart. Res. 10:
84-111.
De Graaff, G. 1964. Dune mole rats. Unpublished D.Sc. thesis, University of Pretoria.
DEPARTMENT OF NATURE CONSERVATION. 1970. Rep. Dep. Nat. Conserv. Cape of Good Hope. 26:
142-144.
De VILLieRS, H. 1974. Human skeletal remains from Cape St Francis, Cape Province. S. Afr.
archaeol. Bull. 29: 89-91.
Dorst, J. & DANDELOT, P. 1970. A field guide to the larger mammals of Africa. London: Collins.
ERICSON, J. E. & STICKEL, E. G. 1973. A proposed classification system for ceramics. Wid
Archaeol. 4: 357-367.
Fitzsimons, F. W. 1912. Snakes of South Africa. Cape Town: Maskew Miller.
Fox, F. W. 1966. Studies on the chemical composition of foods commonly used in southern
Africa. Johannesburg: South African Institute for Medical Research.
Goopwin, A. J. H. 1935. A commentary on the history and present position of South African
prehistory with full bibliography. Bantu Stud. 9: 291-417.
Goopwin, A. J. H. 1938a. Klip Kop cave Hermanus. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 24: 211-219.
Goopwin, A. J. H. 19385. The archaeology of the Oakhurst shelter, George. Trans. R. Soc.
S. Afr. 25: 229-280.
Goopwin, A. J. H. 1946. Prehistoric fishing methods in South Africa. Antiquity 20: 134-141.
Goopwin, A. J. H. 1952a. Jan van Riebeeck and the Hottentots. 1652-1662. S. Afr. archaeol.
Bull. 7: 2-53.
Goopwin, A. J. H. 19525. Early man on the Cape Peninsula. Jn: Mabutt, J. A. ed. The Cape
Peninsula. Cape Town: Maskew Miller.
Goopwin, A. J. H. & VAN RieT Lowe, C. 1929. The Stone Age cultures of South Africa.
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 27: 1-289.
GRINDLEY, J. R. 1967. The Cape Rock Lobster Jasus lalandii. S. Afr. archaeol. Bull, 22: 94-102.
DUD ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
GRINDLEY, J. R., SPEED, E. & Maaoas, T. 1970. The age of the Bonteberg Shelter deposits,
Cape Peninsula. S. Afr. archaeol. Bull. 25: 24.
HENDEY, Q. B. 1974. The Late Cenozoic carnivora of the south-western Cape Province.
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 63: 1-369.
InsKEEP, R. R. 1965. A complex archaeological task at Cape cave. Scient. S. Afr. 2: 575-577.
INSKEEP, R. R. 1972. Nelson Bay Cave, Robberg Peninsula, Plettenberg Bay. Palaeoecol. Afr. 6
247-248.
KENSLEY, B. 1973. Sea-shells of southern Africa. Gastropods. Cape Town: Maskew Miller.
KLEIN, R. G. 1972. Preliminary report on the July through September 1970 excavations at
Nelson Bay cave, Plettenberg Bay (Cape Province, South Africa). Palaeoecol. Afr. 6
177-208.
Kein, R. G. 1974. Environment & subsistence of prehistoric man in the southern Cape
Province, South Africa. Wid Archaeol. 5: 249-284.
KLEIN, R. G. 1976. The fossil history of Raphicerus H. Smith, 1827 (Bovidae, Mammalia) in
the Cape Biotic Zone. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 71: 169-191.
KLEIN, R. G. 1977. The Ecology of Early Man in southern Africa. Science 197: 115-126.
KLEIN, R. G. 1978. A preliminary report on the larger mammals from the Boomplaas Stone
Age Cave site, Cango valley, Oudtshoorn District, South Africa. S. Afr. archaeol. Bull. 33:
66-75.
KLEIN, R. G. & Scott, K. 1974. The fauna of Scott’s cave, Gamtoos Valley, south-eastern
Cape Province. S. Afr. J. Sci. 70: 186-187.
KoLpB(En), P. 1738. The present state of the Cape of Good-Hope 1. 2nd ed. Transl. by G. Medley.
London: Innis & Manby.
Louw, J. T. 1960. Prehistory of the Matjies River shelter. Mem natn. Mus. Bloemfontein 1:
1-143.
MAcCCALMAN, H. R. & GROBBELAAR, B. J. 1965. Preliminary report of two stone-working
OvaTjimba groups in the northern Kaokoveld of South West Africa. Cimbebasia 13.
McLAcHLAN, G. R. & LiversipGE, R. 1970. Roberts’ Birds of South Africa. Johannesburg:
Central News Agency.
Maacs, T. & SPEED, E. 1967. Bonteberg shelter. S. Afr. archaeol. Bull. 22: 80-94.
Mason, R. J. 1973. First early Iron Age settlement in South Africa: Broederstroom 24/73,
Brits district, Transvaal. S. Afr. J. Sci. 69: 324-325.
MoopiE, D. ed. 1838. The Record. Photostatic reprint 1960. Amsterdam, Cape Town: Balkema.
PARKINGTON, J. E. 1972. Seasonal mobility in the Late Stone Age. Afr. Stud. 32: 223-243.
PARKINGTON, J. E. & POGGENPOEL, C. 1971. Excavations at De Hangen. S. Afr. archaeol.
Bull. 26: 3-36.
PERINGUEY, L. 1911. The Stone Ages of South Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 8: 143-147.
PETTIJOHN, F. J. 1957. Sedimentary rocks. New York: Harper & Brothers.
RAND, R. W. 1971. Marine resources of South Africa. Jn: CLAASSENS, J. W. & PoTGIETER, H. J.
eds. Proteins and food supply in the Republic of South Africa: 103-128. Cape Town:
Balkema.
Rau, R. 1969. Uber die geometrische Landschildkroete (Testudo geometrica). Salamandra 5:
36-45.
RuDNER, J. 1968. Strandloper pottery from South & South West Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 49:
441-663.
Rupner, J. & RUDNER, I. 1973. A note on early excavations at Robberg. S. Afr. archaeol. Bull.
28: 94-96.
SAMPSON, C. G. 1974. The stone age archaeology of southern Africa. New York, London:
Academic Press.
SCHALKE, H. J. W. G. 1973. The Upper Quaternary of the Cape Flats area KCbee Province,
South Africa). Scr. Geol. 15.
SCHULZE, B. R. 1965. Climate of South Africa. Part 8. General Survey. Pretoria: The Weather
Brean
SCHWEITZER, F. R. 1970. A Preliminary report of excavations of a cave at Die Kelders. S. Afr.
archaeol. Bull. 25: 136-138
SCHWEITZER, F. R. 1972. The investigation of a coastal cave midden in the south-western Cape.
Palaeoecol. Afr. 6: 246.
SCHWEITZER, F. R. 1974. Archaeological evidence for sheep at the Cape. S. Afr. archaeol.
Bull. 29: 75-82.
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA O98
SCHWEITZER, F. R. 1975. The ecology of Post-Pleistocene peoples on the Gansbaai Coast, south
western Cape. Unpublished M.A. thesis, University of Stellenbosch.
SCHWEITZER, F. R. & ScorT, K. J. 1973. Early occurrence of domestic sheep in sub-Saharan
Africa. Nature, Lond. 241: 547.
SCHWEITZER, F. R. & WILSON, M. L. 1978. A preliminary report on excavations at Bynes-
kranskop, Bredasdorp district, Cape. S. Afr. archaeol. Bull. 33: 134-140.
SINGER, R. R. & Wymer, J. J. 1969. Radiocarbon date for two painted stones from a coastal
cave in South Africa. Nature, Lond, 224: 508—510.
SmiTH, J. L. B. 1949. The sea fishes of southern Africa. Johannesburg: Central News Agency.
SPEED, E. 1969. Prehistoric shell collectors. S. Afr. archaeol. Bull. 24: 193-196.
STEPHENSON, T. A. 1944. The constitution of the intertidal fauna and flora of South Africa.
Ann. Natal Mus. 10: 261-358.
STEYN, H. P. 1971. Aspects of the economic life of some nomadic Nharo Bushmen groups.
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 56: 275-322.
TANKARD, A. J. & SCHWEITZER, F. R. 1974. The geology of Die Kelders cave and environ-
ments: a palaeoenvironmental study. S. Afr. J. Sci. 70: 365-369.
TANKARD, A. J. & SCHWEITZER, F. R. 1976. Textural analysis of cave sediments: Die Kelders,
Cape Province, South Africa. In: DAvIDSON, D. & SHACKLEY, M. eds. Geoarchaeology:
earth science and the past. London: Duckworth.
Taytor, H. C. 1961. Ecological account of a remnant forest near Stanford, Cape Province.
i SPA BOLw2T alsa OS:
TAyLor, H. C. 1972. The vegetation of South Africa with emphasis on the fynbos of the
south-western Cape. Jn: Cape flora. Cape Town: The Board of Extra-Mural Studies,
University of Cape Town.
THACKERAY, F. & FEAST, E. C. 1974. A Midden Burial from Cape St Francis, eastern Cape
Province. S. Afr. archaeol. Bull. 29: 92.
VAN Noten, F. L. 1974. Excavations at the Gordon’s Bay shell midden, south-western Cape.
S. Afr. archaeol. Bull, 29: 129-142
VoGEL, J. C. 1969. The Radiocarbon time-scale. S. Afr. archaeol. Bull. 24: 83-87.
VoicT, E. 1973a. Klasies River Mouth Cave: an exercise in shell analysis. Bull. Transy. Mus. 14:
14-15.
VoicT, E. 19736. Stone Age molluscan utilization at Klasies River Mouth caves. S. Afr. J. Sci.
69: 306-309.
WELBOURNE, R. G. 1973. Identification of animal remains from the Broederstroom 24/73
Early Iron Age site. S. Afr. J. Sci. 69: 325.
WILKINS, W. H. ed. 1901. South Africa a century ago; letters written from the Cape of Good
Hope (1797-1801). London: Smith Elder.
WILLcox, A. R. 1963. The rock art of South Africa. Johannesburg: Nelson.
APPENDIX 1
PRELIMINARY NOTES ON THE GEOLOGY OF DIE KELDERS, CAPE
By
KARL W. BUTZER
The University of Chicago
(With | table)
THE GEOLOGICAL SETTING
The archaeological cave site of Die Kelders (see Schweitzer 1970) is situated
on a part of the southern Cape coast that preserves a complex and interesting
late Cainozoic sedimentary record. The group of caves is uniquely situated at
the southern extremity of Walker Bay, at the contact of the Table Mountain
quartzite, the late Tertiary Bredasdorp beds, Pleistocene aeolianites, and recent
dune-sands.
Die Kelders | is eroded along the contact of strongly jointed, folded
Paleozoic quartzite and quasi-horizontal Bredasdorp strata, along what appears
to be a planation surface locally cut at 7 to 8 m above m:.s.I. (mean sea-level).
These Tertiary beds grade up from interfingering, basal subangular conglo-
merates, breccioid lenses, and light-brown (Munsell hues 7,5 YR) ferruginized
silts, to a well-stratified, very pale brown (10 YR), limestone (up to 90% CaCOs)
with a residue of medium-grade quartz sand. Exposed to a thickness of 10 m
or more, these well-indurated deposits require further study but relate to other
late Tertiary (or early Pleistocene?) units described from the region by Spies
et al. (1963) and inferred from the submerged continental shelf by Dingle (1971).
The Bredasdorp beds at Die Kelders are disconformably overlain by two
major generations of aeolianite (see Table 1). Both are white (10 YR), semi-
cemented, coarse sands consisting of ground-up molluscan debris, subangular
comminuted quartzite grains, and subrounded quartz. Bedding of the older
aeolianite typically varies from 4 to 22°, and a component of very coarse grains
(5%) as well as residual weathering products (59% or more) renders sorting
moderate. The younger aeolianite is less indurated, finer grained, less weathered
and better sorted, with bedding dips of over 28°. These two generations of
aeolian sands are hardly distinguishable in terms of texture or shell components
from modern dune-sands (see also Walsh 1968), indicating close coastal proxi-
mity. However, bedding is different and reflects on foresets and topsets
embanked against and ultimately sweeping over the top of the bed-rock cliffs,
with little indication of the marked dunal topography (merging barchans) of
today. Cumulative thickness is in excess of 20 m and a horizon of loamy,
derived soil wash separates the two. It appears that Middle Stone Age artefacts
225
226 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
occur with this soil, suggesting that closer study of the aeolianite complex is
certainly warranted.
THE CAVE SEDIMENTS
The temporal relationship of the aeolianites to the cutting of the Die
Kelders caves remains to be determined. None the less, the caves are typical
marine grottoes, excavated by wave-cutting and carbonate solution along the
contact of the quartzite and Bredasdorp strata. The notches preserved in the
back of the caves suggest a responsible sea-level initially at least 7 m above that
of the present. However, the structural-lithological complexities impose caution
on any simple sea-level interpretation prior to systematic examination of a
larger coastal stretch (compare Davies 1972).
The oldest cave deposits are discontinuous flowstones and stalagmites,
consisting of finely-banded, very pale brown (10 YR), cryptocrystalline calcite
with a residue of opaline silica and medium-grade quartz sand. Disposition of
these ‘travertines’ appears to indicate a sea-level slightly higher than today.
These initial calcite precipitates were followed by breccia accumulation,
today recorded by only a few remnants of indurated and corroded, Bredasdorp-
derived rubble. This breccia, which contains Levallois flakes of Middle Stone
Age type in situ, very probably represents frost-weathered eboulis secs although
the state of cementation and weathering precludes systematic, morphometric
study. In this regard there are striking similarities to the frost-weathered rubbles
coinciding with most of the Middle Stone Age occupancy of Robberg’s Nelson
Bay Cave, near Plettenberg Bay (see Butzer 1973a, 19735; also Butzer & Helgren
1972).
The unconsolidated sedimentary sequence being excavated by Schweitzer
(1970) is considerably younger, since practically all the initial travertine and
breccia fill had already been removed by corrosion and mechanical erosion.
In fact, it is difficult to explain this effective episode of re-excavation without
resort to a period of m.s.]. at least a little higher than that of today.
The oldest, unconsolidated cave fill was no longer exposed in 1971, and
the Middle Stone Age strata seen were limited to some 30 cm of weathered,
oxidized (10 YR yellowish brown, 7,5 YR strong brown and 2,5 Y pale yellow,
from bottom to top) and decalcified (CaCO, 2,3-5,3°%) sands dipping gently
to the back of the cave; pH values now range from 7,0-8,1. The textual spectra
indicate a marked increase in grain-size towards the top (Table 1), with a
coincident decrease in rounded quartz sands of more distant origin. Comparison
with modern dunes and off-shore marine sands (Table 1) shows clearly that
the shoreline was initially located well off-shore, implying a glacial-eustatic
regression. The terminal strata indicate that a transgression was under way,
although the shoreline was still located farther out than today. A detailed
sediment column and faunal comparison through the whole of the Middle
Stone Age complex promises to be quite informative.
Following the long period of weathering, during which some 75 per cent
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA DOF
of the Middle Stone Age sediment. bulk was leached out, fresh aeolian sands
accumulated in the cave. These are well-stratified, very pale brown (10 YR),
coarse sands, with a pH of 8,6 and a little finer-grained than corresponding
recent sediments (Table 1). They suggest a slightly lower sea-level, with more
extensive sandy beaches in front of the cave, immediately prior to accumulation
of the first Later Stone Age middens c. 2100 B.P. (see Schweitzer 1970).
The sediments of the late midden complex are primarily cultural, although
similar sands continued to blow into the cave throughout the period of inter-
mittent occupancy. A total of nine sediment samples were analysed from this
part of the sequence, but the information is of limited implication for possible
variability of the internal or external environment. Depending primarily on
cultural components (ash, carbonized organic materials, shell, nacre, bone,
TABLE |
Texture of various sandy units at Die Kelders (non-carbonate residues).
YeCaCO; S95u-2mm 210-595u 59-210u 37-59 37p
Modern dune . : 4 : 59,6 3,3 VID 17,4 0,6 0,9
Modern marine sand , f 85,9 1,8 SIP DSF 4,0 14,3
L.S.A. aeolian sand : ; 60,2 2,4 5451 3577 0,6 eh
M.S.A. aeolian sand (—5 cm) 23 2,3 45,8 47,8 0,8 3,3
M.S.A. aeolian sand (— 30cm) 5,3 2303 8,0 83,6 2,9 Sy
Younger aeolianites : ; 67,1 0,2 58,4 37,6 (a Del
Older aeolianite ; : : 79,8 Dp 60,3 27,8 152 5,6
artefacts and debitage) and their relative density, CaCO, content of the under-
2 mm fraction ranges from 72 to 91 per cent, pH 7,7-8,6, electrical resistivity
+ 100-200 millivolts, and colour from white to greyish-brown (10 YR) or
light brownish-grey (2,5 Y). The final 25 cm of deposit contain less quartz
sand, but are increasingly calcified. A thin, localized calcite crust caps part of
the interbedded middens and serves to emphasize that there has been no more
than incidental aeolian accretion in the cave since abandonment c. 1350 B.P.
(see Schweitzer 1970). This striking reduction of sand can best be explained by
a return to modern sea-level shortly after 1500 B.P., with the water mark
remaining at the cave entrance ever since.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
These preliminary descriptions and analyses were made possible through
the courtesy of Mr F. R. Schweitzer (South African Museum) and with the
assistance of grant GS-3013 of the National Science Foundation (Washington).
Discussions with Mr Schweitzer, Mr G. Avery and Dr A. J. Tankard (South
African Museum), as well as Prof. H. J. Deacon (Stellenbosch), and Mr
D. Parish (then at the South African Museum) are gratefully acknowledged.
228 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
REFERENCES
Butzer, K. W. 1973a. Geology of Nelson Bay Cave, Robberg, South Africa. S. Afr. arch.
Bull. 28: 97-110.
Butzer, K. W. 19735. The question of Pleistocene ‘periglacial’ phenomena in South Africa.
Boreas 2: 1-11.
Burzer, K. W. & HELGREN, D. M. 1972. Late Cenozoic evolution of the Cape coast between
Knysna and Cape St Francis, South Africa. Quat. Res. 2: 143-169.
Davies, O. 1972. Pleistocene shorelines in the southern and south-eastern Cape Province.
Part 2. Ann. Natal Mus, 22: 225-279.
DINGLE, R. V. 1971. Tertiary sedimentary history of the continental shelf off southern Cape
Province, South Africa. Trans. geol. Soc. S. Afr. 74: 173-186.
SCHWEITZER, F. R. 1970. A preliminary report of excavations of a cave at Die Kelders. S. Afr.
arch. Bull. 25: 136-138.
Spies, J. J., ENGELBRECHT, L. N. J.. MALHERBE, S. J. & VILJOEN, J. J. 1963. Die geologie van
die gebied tussen Bredasdorp en Gansbaai. Pretoria: Geological Survey of South Africa.
Expl. Shts. 3419C, 3419D and 3420C, Geol. Surv. S. Afr.
WALSH, B. N. 1968. Some notes on the incidence and control of driftsands along the Caledon,
Bredasdorp and Riversdale coastline of South Africa. Bull. Dep. For. S. Afr. 44: 1-79.
i
APPENDIX 2
THE MICROMAMMALIAN FAUNA FROM THE LATE STONE AGE
LEVELS AT DIE KELDERS
By
D. M. AVERY
South African Museum, Cape Town
(With 2 tables)
Detailed analysis of the micromammalian remains from Die Kelders and
other southern Cape archaeological sites is in progress. For this reason a brief
comment only is given here.
The list of micromammalian species represented in the Late Stone Age
levels at Die Kelders was compared with that for material obtained by Grindley
et al. (1973) from owl pellets collected near Stanford. This modern locality,
which lies about 10 km inland and north-east of Die Kelders, is the nearest so
far found to the archaeological site. It was chosen for this reason and for the
fact that it is thought that owls were also responsible for the accumulation of
the Die Kelders material. The Stanford locality was in the banks of the Klein
River with a surrounding habitat consisting of a ‘fringe of Phragmites and
macchia along the river encompassed by agricultural lands, rooikrans thickets
and gum plantations’ (Grindley et al. 1973: 266). The fauna from here does not
appear to have been affected unduly by the effects of agriculture; Rattus rattus
is a commensal species imported from Europe and may be excluded from
consideration. One could probably expect a similar assemblage from Die
Kelders today, even though it is on the coast, so that it seems not unreasonable
to make the comparisons effected below. Because half of the Die Kelders
specimens come from layer 12, the following remarks, although general, refer
basically to that level.
The general impression given is that in the past the area supported a denser
ground cover with more grass and that the climate was perhaps rather wetter
than it is today. The relatively small number of some sand-loving species
(Chrysochloris asiatica and Tatera afra) and the absence of others (Cryptomys
hottentotus, Georhychus capensis and Gerbillurus paeba) at Die Kelders support
this view. It should be noted, however, that Bathyergus suillus (Cape dune
mole-rat) was found in the macrofauna so that there must have been sand,
presumably littoral dunes, in the area. The presence of Dendromus melanotis,
Steatomys cf. pentonyx and Mystromys albicaudatus, albeit in small numbers,
points to the existence of a certain amount of grass. Stomys spp also eat mainly
grass stems and weeds and Rhabdomys pumilio subsists mainly on similar green
vegetation. Dense ground cover is attested by the presence of Crocidura flaves-
229
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
230
a a ee ee ee ee
66 66 8VI Ol ¢ OL ® OR Ol 7c Lf 4 e 6 I
Lol GC ee ae 3G me — = ye1 13JA SJopunes
10°€1 61 EE eee COT ype, . S ie Sere ee a. el "WI ITA,
LO'ST Ga v I [lf € [ Soe) ar asnoU-pyoy pedig
TO‘ET 61 (Gp ee ea ee [ ee asnow ode
Il'y 9 G I [ee ae ee ae eae jIq4o8 odea
89°0 I See ee he caer Mae ae ISNOW PIIe}-9}1Y AA
91°9 6 i ae ee ee ee || [= — asnoul 3ej odea
LE] G a eG asnow Ssurquutjs Aw3Ad Korn
[210L
Le C pee Neg ee 2 ee | yeq Kurey odea
I‘p 9 1 =z | —— | en [ — yeq 90Ysesi1oy adey
cre S ee an Ge | | = yeq SOYsasioY S,AO1oID
LGC && ee ue Ce ee Es te ee (SePy Soe MOIYS $9104
(Gas ¢ ee ee Ee =e aC eo SS a MaIYs JleMp AdIS Jassoy
srs 8 Be ee OES ae | > MOIYS-YSNU poy
(Gas ¢ ae gee ee re | =a I — — g]our uapyos odea
/o ot ce O Cl ©) G© £ © & yw & @ 7
SOA]
IDSAAPUNDS SAUOJE
SNIDAOAAL SAUOIE)
oyluund stwuopqvyy
IXNDAAAIA SAULODAG
DA{D DAAID I,
SNJDPNDIIGD SAWOASA JW
xduojuad “Jd sdwuojvajs
SHOUDJAU SnULOApuag
LJalecyexope|
AOJON1A] SIIOAJN
sisuadpd snydojoulyy
snsoaya snydojoulyy
eiaidoryy
SNIADA XBAOSOA JA
DildDA SnouNny
SUdISAAD]f DANPIIOAD
DINDISD SIAOJYIOSAAYD
BIOATIOOSUT
so1seds
SS SSS a a a eae ee ee ee ee ee ee
“SIOP[I IC 3B SfOag] “W'S” 94} Ul pojussoidos soisods uvIPeUIUeWIOJOIU JO STeENPIAIPUL JO SJoquINU WNUUTUTPY
| dav 1
231
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS, SOUTH AFRICA
[e101 OO;OO! S8€1 6666 9PtI [BIOL
[BIOL I6€L TOL =68LbS =sOO8 [e1OL
V1 TQJA Slopunes avs AapUunDS SAUL0JE 8097 9€ eal Z YE LOJA Siapunes IDSAAPUNDS SAWOIE
1O'€I 6[ yet IA SNIDAOAAL SAUOJE
jel [oJA 9}eUTLUe'T SnNIDULUD] SAU0IE TL‘0 I
OSNOUU-Pjoy. Podi.g ound stwopquyy = 7S°9 6 LOS! CE QSNOUW-pjsy podiysg ouiuind sduopqoy y
yel yorlg SNJJOA SNIJOM 06°Z ~
ssnou adea ixndaddaa SAWODIG = SHI G 1O'€1 61 oesnow odey 1XNDAAAAA SAWUODAG
osnoUul JIVMG SAplojnuluu snp ZL‘0 I
[iqios AuisAg pganvd SnAnppjiqsaH ZL‘O I
[Iqios ode) DAJO DABIOL, €6°SI GG Ilv 9 [Igios odey DAO DAIID I,
8S‘0 I OSNOU! Pojiej}-SHIU AA SNIDPNDIIG]V SAWOAJSA
91°9 6 esnouwl yey odey xduojuad “Jd SAWojvaly
LET G esnow suiquiljs AuisAd Adi SIJOUDJAU SNWUOAPUA’
yei-ojoul odeay sisuadpa snyadys0aH Wie Gk IZ
VEI-9JOUL UOWIWIOD, = SNJOJUaJJoY SAWIOJdAAD ZOE ¢
eIUOpO Y BIJUIPO xf
[BIOL Srl G 06°8 te [210.1
suTJOIEs oded SISUBADI SNIISAIdT Sr‘ G
Le‘T G yeq Airey oded AOJOILAL SIJOA AL
Il‘v 9 yeq s0ysosioy oded sisuadvo snydojouiyy
THE ¢ yeq VOYSESIOY S,AOIJJOIH) Snsoaya snydojoulyy
e1o}dosiyD e1oydosiyO)
[e101 v9°P7 vE Ig9€ €¢ [210.L
MOIYS JSOIOF [CEN Aaf0d XAsOSOA IW LOL IT L6€7 CE — MOIYS 1S9L0F SNIADA XAAOSOAIW
MOIYS JIeMp AdIS 19Ved1H) SNX1] SNOUNS' LZ € Cre ¢ MOIYS JIEMp AVIS JOSSIT DijidDA SnoUNS!
MOIYS-YSNU Poy SUBISAADY{ DANPIIOAD 08's 8 SPs 8 MOIYS-YSNU POY SUIISAADY DANPIIOAD
SQJOW UdsPjOH "JOpUl avplsojyoosdayD OL‘8 Tl (Gas ¢ jouw Uspjos odeD DINVISD SIAOJYIOSAAYY)
BIOATJOOSUT we "ON vA "ON BIOALIOSUT
Es ke eA ae, es nO I Ca es RG RS I PIU ek UR che heen Nn Oh. IS Pp oF eet a oe ect CV eer Pei om os
GuOANV.LS suddlay did
‘PIOJULIS LOU PUNOJ sjo]jad [MO Woy CY} YIM SIOP[O IC] 1 SfOAgT “W'S"] 94} Wosy eUNLJOIOIU OY) Jo UOSIIedWIOD
Z AVL
232 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
cens, Myosorex varius, Rhabdomys pumilio and Stomys spp, whereas Praomys
verreauxi suggests a more scrubby environment, probably on rather higher
ground. The high proportion of Myosorex varius at Die Kelders indicates
that the environment was particularly suited to these animals’ needs which
includes a mean annual rainfall of about 500-700 mm. Whilst Otomys irroratus
and O. saundersae are often found coexisting, it is thought that the former
prefers a rather wetter habitat than the latter. There could, therefore, be some
significance in the shift in dominance from one species to the other.
The presence of Steatomys cf. pentonyx at Die Kelders is possibly signifi-
cant. Roberts (1951: 450) notes that Steatomys spp aestivate underground in
nests of grass for part of the year. Assuming this to be the case, they would
have been caught during the winter when they were active since they are not
likely to have been aestivating in the cave. Assuming also that owls and human
beings did not occupy the cave at the same time, this could lead to the suggestion
that the human beings were there in the summer. Confirmation or destruction
of this hypothesis will require further work.
REFERENCES
GRINDLEY, J., SIGFRIED, W. R. & VERNON, C. J. 1973. Diet of the Barn Owl in the Cape
Province. Ostrich 44: 266-267.
Roserts, A. 1951. The Mammals of South Africa. Johannesburg: Trustees of ‘The Mammals
of South Africa’ Book Fund.
APPENDIX 3
HUMAN SKELETAL REMAINS FROM DIE KELDERS, CAPE
By
G. P. RIGHTMIRE
State University of New York at Binghamton
Human skeletal remains from Die Kelders DK | consist of a recognizable
burial of Late Stone Age association, other scattered bones not associated with
this burial, and a few isolated teeth found in Middle Stone Age context.
The burial is represented by skull parts and other bones, all in highly
fragmentary condition. One parietal is nearly intact, and most of the occiput
can be pieced together. But the facial parts are badly broken, and the upper
teeth are all loose, except for the deciduous lateral incisor, canine, dm! and dm?
which are still in place in a fragment of maxilla from the right side. The crowns
of all permanent upper incisors, one canine and several upper premolars are
present, and the central incisors have roots which are partly calcified. It is
difficult to assess the state of eruption of these anterior teeth, but M! was
clearly in place on both sides. One unerupted M? crown is also present in the
collection.
The lower jaw is more or less intact and contains the left deciduous molars
and M, as well as the right milk canine, dm, dm, and M,. The two permanent
central incisors are in position but have been glued, and whether they were
fully erupted at the time of death is uncertain. Both M,’s are in their crypts.
All this dental information suggests an age for the L.S.A. burial of 6-7 years.
Postcranial remains consist of vertebral fragments, a right scapula, both
humeri (lacking epiphyses), and bits of ribs. Other pieces are small and generally
not diagnostic. Measurements were not taken.
38)
iy
Ti
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the International code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb.
nov., syn. nov., etc.
An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name (and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific name must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
not acceptable.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-—A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
) 6
e.g. ‘... the Figure depicting C. namacolus ...’; ‘. .. in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...’
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. Du Toit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
FRANZ R. SCHWEITZER
EXCAVATIONS AT DIE KELDERS,
CAPE PROVINCE, SOUTH AFRICA
THE HOLOCENE DEPOSITS
\
t
= = a es 8 Na Seat 4 . \.*
ra D ws D WK™ B NN. ‘
S* = 2 E oh YO,
— ee Se ee
}INVUGIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILONLILSNI
LIBRARIES SMITHSON!
z tJ uJ
wn — big Z, < —
< "e, g r=
Cc y OL il &
= Vj fae)
O =
FA =
STITUTION NOILNLILSNI S3Jiuy¥vudia LIBRARIES
7
INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI
INSTITUTION NOIMLNLILSNI
fee
co
cr
Zz t- | same
oO om =
= w ow w
= x Pe) ee
aa > > >
— ee a "2
= m 3 mi z m <i> OS SA 7
= wo . w w ‘
LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI NVINOSHLINS S31yuyy aT
Zs ote , Ze “n i ee. a) ay
é = S Wy i 9735 = UYy
ame Tp) Wn uv - \ . Ww yy? ve. OW w Lo hye.
= = zr MOUS oO ld 5 fe) j
— — E F WN SS z ‘ ‘: , = Z, Lo
Sey ie = S
NOILALILSNI_ NVINOSHLINS S3IYVYSGIT LIBRARIES
— 4 = = = =f
a = = ce 2 —
= o = S = 3
ay Z2 a Zz aT z
3JI4Y¥VHUYS!IT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN NOILALILSNI NVINOSHLINS S31Y¥UVUT
fe z aa 2 - 2 . @
o o oO ° ~ @.) 3
—— w —
0 = ig ‘Ss De) xe =
> re ; > = > ra
z = = - 2 =
w 7) ae 72)
yh z : O Z O Eh
NOILNLILSN! NVINOSHLINS S31u¥vWYdIt _SMITHSONIAN
wn = Ww z Ww z
= < = re = <
oO ks i os © ae Oo a
= “if = = = = =
> GQ = > = Sieh =
: = Ww 4 w” Ss 4 7)
JIYVYUaII_ LIBRARI ES SMITHSONIAN _ INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI_NVINOSHLINS = S3 IyVvues
o ul 1G ul 2 #
= ow. = a a oe
= %, —t
: <i 2 < 2 <
a mtr z <4 4 oS
NSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI S3'1YVYdIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN
5 c 3 z = ee
F 2 = : - 4% >
= > = ex SS Typ Lis >
- za 3 — = f bs ° =
= an = os Z on |
LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3I1uVvudl
v =
=
x
m7)
Oo
=
>
za
SMITHSONIAN
SMITHSONIAN
NYINOSHLIWS
SMITHSONIAN
NYINOSHLIWS
Me |
, Lae
. ‘ .
SX - :
NSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI_ NVINOSHLINS S3IUVYGIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUT Oh
oe
*
RARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI
SMITHSON
NVINOSHL
NN
SMITHSOR
NVINOSHJ
NVINOSHLIWS
ES SMITHSON
uw ig oe us wo $ NO
a. Y yy = a = RAS a
<f Y 2 < z BA :
‘Yj = = 7
Ud fs) = 5 a
= a = dee |
NVINOSHLINS S3IY¥YVYGIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN
\s za = a [=
o ii = Se As.
= w = ow
= 0] > > 9]
: : : 3
- -
in ex re pi
= o 2 o
INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3iyuvugit
Jiu y,
%
y A”,
en: ad
SSIYVYGIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION
Vly,
Oo
%
«
NS
NVINOSHLINS S3IYVYaIT LIB
NVINOSHLINS
Woe
Sa
SMITHSONIAN
NVINOSHLIWS
LALILSNI_ NVINOSHLINS
NOILNLILSNI
LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN
NOILNLILSNI
NOILNLILSNI
RARIES_ SMITHSONIAN_INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI
NVINOSHLINS S3iuvudlt
INSTITUTION
saiuvugin
INSTITUTION
INSTITUTION
. DC;
LNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3IYVYEIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION
NS ;
.
2)
x
NVINOSHLINS S3IYVUdIT LIBRARIES
SMITHSONIAN
.
RARI SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION
SMITHSONIAN
NVINOSHLIWS
SMITHSONIAN
NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS Sa1yuvuagit
SONGS a - us 2 uw |
Av — . = — = — :
[8 a a 2) ce = &
GZ : EE) 2 BR E
aac o = ee) = fs)
a z2 Jj z 2 nies
INLILSNIT S3IYWYGIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION
- = o z . a
MSTITU DS ow Oo = oO o |
* 2 E as = _ |
z FE > = <2
| S, x E aa = Pe a |
LZ» m = Mm 2 m |
n “a x w = wn
RAR! ES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI_ NVINOSHLINS Sa fyvygit
Satta < * = Wy = = Yy,
i Zz x 4 yy _ 2 =
5 2 AY a Vp Vi oD d
aN \S a AO Gla =.
= \ >" = >
(7p) 4 (7p) a
S3IYVUGIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN. INSTITUTION
rr
SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION LIBRARIES -
il NT
3 9088 01206 6700
ae F fi
= Tee, " 4 :
“2 Se “ “2 we %
2. =. Ss
agra 5 % ‘ :
PETS Ate Saare ce, ee : ;
Ve eae ‘ te! ¥% dt a a om
BPke eat - . "4 &
TON ER 07S Farah 5a P : AES ao
Po = a ie a ec er q
WANE Ry, : ‘ ‘
RMS Seg = He : + ‘
ev 38% Mar ay oes fe f
Was eraectg 1 f
SoBe seranty Re - wee
Fay Dy aig : .: : ,
he a nd eS Pe F
wh wavbe args. ni .
fie z cig :
% . A -
Clerk eg Dk? A ;
ee eae neg : 5
. 4 ers b fs
Vormpeyiee es BFL HS) cat
tate ny rumen PYLE whit
™ Fiery Ore re 3 7
oo
t=) “Oy ai . 2
bs ap eny i Sey 3 rs
2 erat gs ; “ : Mpae,:
By 8c :
frre epi * .
PHAM ey dey tee 2 Pe,
See " -
YP iy Ue es tie . Ls :
ints ae Sus egy, ;
afgun : wc
ot ere . , ‘ ‘
<P y D 3
an 34, 3 i
eae
See ‘ -
ea * .